GAIL (India) Limited

0GAIL (India) Limited(A Nav Ratna Company)Tender No. GAIL/VIZ/006278/R1TENDER FOR CONSTRUCTION OFOFFICE BUILDING AT DT, VISAKHAPATNAM, A.P.VOLUME II OF IVTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSGAIL (India) Limited(A Nav Ratna Company)Despatch Terminal, Sheela Nagar,Opp: Ayyappaswamy Temple, BHPV Post,Visakhapatnam – 530 012.

1GAIL (India) Limited(A Nav Ratna Company)BRIEF SCOPE OF WORKPART - `A’ (LUMP SUM SECTION)IT INCLUDES: OFFICE BUILDING, CONNECTING CORRIDOR ANDM.S. EMERGENCY STAIRCASE(CIVIL AND INTERNAL PLUMBING WORKS)PART - `B’ (ITEM RATES SECTION)IT INCLUDES: INTERNAL & EXTERNAL ELECTRIFICATIONWORKS, INTERIOR WORKS, AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM, FIREALARM & PUBLIC ADDRESSABLE SYSTEM, SEPTIC TANK,ANAEROBIC & BLEACHING TANKS, COMPOUND WALL(DISMANTLING AND CONSTRUCTION), STORM WATER DRAINS,EXTERNAL CC PAVEMENT AND EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY/SEWERAGE LINES ETC.,CONSULTANTSOWNERSIRI CONSULTANTSGAIL (India) LimitedConsultants & Engineers,(A Nav Ratna Company)Plot No.601, Street No.11,Despatch Terminal,Dharamkaran Road, Ameerpet,Opp:Ayyappaswamy Temple,HYDERABAD – 500016.BHPV PostPH: 040 -23730343, 55789738. Visakhapatnam – 530 012FAX. NO.: 040- 55789738 PH: 0891-2749768,2749769E-mails: siriconsultants@rediffmail.com FAX. NO.: 0891 2749770

2S.NO.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSINDEXCONTENTSPAGENOSA GENERAL – INFORMATION 4I SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL 51 SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXCAVATION AND EARTH WORK 62 SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT 83 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CAST-IN-SITU REINFORCED CONCRETE 114 SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL REINFORCEMENT 345 SPECIFICATIONS FOR FORM WORK 376 SPECIFICATIONS FOR BRICK MASONRY WORK 427 SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS & WINDOWS (WOOD WORK) 458 SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING & PAVING 509DELETEDSPECIFICATIONS FOR CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING WITHMETALLIC HARDENER5110 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CERAMIC TILES GLAZED & MATT FINISH 5111 SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER PROOFING FOR ROOF 5212 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTERING WORK 5313 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINTING WORK 56

3S.NO.CONTENTSPAGENOS14 SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINTINGS 5915 SPECIFICATIONS FOR FALSE CEILING 6216 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CHAINLINK FENCING 6517 LIST OF APPROVED MAKE (CIVIL) 6718 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING & SANITARY WORKS 6919 LIST OF APPROVED MAKE (SANITARY) 89II SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL 1TECHNICAL CONDITIONS 2CHAPTER-1 – INTERNAL WIRING 5CHAPTER-2 – POWER CONTROL CENTRES / POWERDISTRIBUTION BOARDS / MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES.9CHAPTER-3 – LAYING OF CABLES 16CHAPTER-4 – EARTHING 19CHAPTER-5 – SUB – STATION 21CHAPTER-6 – LIGHTING PROTECTION 25RECOMMENDED MAKES OF MATERIALS 29III SPECIFICAITON FOR AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM 1IV SPECIFICATION FOR INTERIOR WORKS 1V LIST OF MANDATORY TESTS 1VI LIST OF DOCUMENTS / REGISTERS TO BE MAINTAINED 1VII TENTATIVE QUANTITIES 1

41.1 GENERAL:A. GENERAL INFORMATIONThe work under this tender shall be executed strictly in accordance with constructional and materialrequirements defined under these specifications. The Contractor shall carefully acquaint himself withthese specifications to determine his contractual obligations for the work. The conditions of thesespecifications will be binding on the Contractor and no deviation shall be permissible unless specificallyapproved by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge in writing. In absence of any detailed specificationsthese specification, latest Indian Standard specifications and code of practice shall become applicable.Wherever the codes and specifications are silent then the same shall be governed by sound engineeringpractices and the decision of the Engineer-in-charge / Consultant in matters of interpretation etc., shall befinal and binding on the Contractor.1.2 DRAWINGS / DIMENSIONS:Figured dimensions on drawings shall supersede measurements by scale and drawings to a large scale takeprecedence over those to a smaller scale. Special dimensions or directions in the specifications shall bechecked on site. The dimensions where stated do not allow for wastage, laps joints etc., the levels.Measurements and other information concerning the existing site on the drawings are believed to becorrect, but the Contractor shall verify them for himself and also examine the nature of the ground as noclaim or allowance whatsoever shall be entertained hereinafter on account of any errors or omissions inthe levels or the description of the ground turning out to be different from what was expected or shown onthe drawings.1.3 CORRELATION OF DRAWING:Before commencement of work, the Contractor shall correlate all relevant structural, Construction andservices drawings and satisfy himself that the information available is complete and unambiguous. TheContractor shall be responsible for any error / difficulty in execution / damage incurred owing to anydiscrepancy in the drawings which has been overlooked by him and has not been brought to the notice ofthe Engineer-in-charge / Consultant before execution.1.4 B.I.S CODES OF PRACTICE:Wherever any reference is made in the specifications to any bureau of Indian Standard (IS) code ofpractice, it shall be understood to indicate the latest version of the code of practice in usage at the time ofconstruction.1.5 ALL SIMILAR RATES TO HAVE SAME QUOTED RATEIt shall be noted by the bidder that a similar item repeated at various sub heads of the tender, he shouldquote same rates. For any reasons different rates are quoted the lowest rate shall be considered forderiving the substituted / extra item rate if required.1.6. ASSESSMENT OF QUANTITIES IN LUMPSUM PARTThe quantities of the lump sum section of the tender (given in Vol-III part-A) are indicative only for thereference of the bidders. However, the bidders are advised to make their own assessment of the quantitiesbased on the drawings and scope of work to arrive for the exact quantities. GAIL shall not be responsiblefor any omissions / errors made by the bidder in assessment of the actual quantities required for theexecution of the lumpsum section of the job. Extra claims on account of the error made by the bidder inassessment of the true quantities of the items of work shall not be entertained whatsoever.1.7. VARIATION IN LUMPSUM PARTFor any variation in the quantities of any item in Lumpsum section due to site conditions orotherwise upto and including + 1% (taken all together) the quoted rate shall remain firm. Beyond, thislimit if there is any variation during the execution of works the same may be worked out for payment /recovery as per the extra / substituted item clause of Special Conditions of Contract.

5II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFORCIVIL WORK

6SPECIFICATIONS1. SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK1.1 SCOPEThe scope of work broadly includes but is not necessarily limited to the following i. e. clearing of the site,excavation of foundation trenches, back-filling, disposal of surplus earth as required including dewatering,shoring and strutting. Contractor shall provide all tools, labour, equipment and incidentals necessary,required for completion of all aspects of work covered in these specifications.1.2 TYPES OF SOILContractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the types of soil in excavation by an inspection ofnature of the ground at site & scrutiny of the investigation details available with the Consultant.1.3 CLEARING THE SITEThe site on which the structure is to be built shown on the drawing and the area required for setting outand other operations like road, drains, sheds, etc. should be cleared and all obstructions, loose stones,materials, and rubbish of all kinds, stump, brush wood and trees removed as directed, roots being entirelygrubbed up. All useful materials obtained will be the property of the Engineer-in-charges and will behanded over to the Consultant. Rejected materials will be removed by the contractor to his own dump.1.4 GROUND LEVELS AND SITE LEVEL PLANBefore starting the excavations, the requisite block levels of the entire plot shall be taken by the contractorin consultation with the Consultant and a proper record of these levels to be kept, which shall be jointlysigned by the Contractor and the Consultant. A block level plan showing-all the ground levels of the plotshall be prepared and shall jointly be signed by the Contractor and the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.1.5 SETTING OUTAfter clearing the site, and preparing the site level plan, the Contractor will set out the center lines of thebuilding or other involved works and get the same approved from the Consultant.It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install substantial reference marks, bench marks etc. andmaintain them as long as required by the Consultant. The Contractor will assume full responsibility forproper setting out, alignment, elevation and dimension of each and all parts of the work1.6 EXCAVATION AND PREPARATION OF FOUNDATIONS FOR CONCRETING1.6.1 GeneralFoundation trenches shall be dug wet or dry to the dimensions as shown on the drawings or as directed bythe Consultant. The excavated materials shall be stacked at a sufficient distance away from the edge of theexcavated pit so as not to endanger the stability of the sides. The soil heap shall not exceed more than 2 mfrom the ground.The contractor shall, at his expense and without any extra charge, make provision for all shoring andstrutting, extra excavation in slope, extra excavation in working space, dredging or bailing out water, andthe excavation shall be kept free from water when the foundation work is in progress.If excavation is carried out to greater width, length or depth than specified, extra depth shall be made upby filling in lean concrete and extra length or width by filling in with earth rammed hard or by masonry asdirected by the Consultant’s Cost of such extra excavation and the filling required therein as specifiedabove shall be borne in full by the contractor.

7If required to protect the sides of pits and trenches, timber shoring and strutting shall be erected. Thetimbering shall be closed or open depending on the nature of the soil and work, and arrangement oftimbering including sizes and spacing of members used shall be as approved by the Consultant. NO extracharges shall be admissible on this account.The bottoms of all excavation shall be trimmed and leveled in accordance with drawings / directions ofthe Consultant / Engineer-in-charge. The bottoms of all excavation shall be rammed and wetted beforedeposition of concrete. The contractors shall report to the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge when theexcavation is ready to receive concrete. NO concrete shall be placed in foundations until the contractorhas obtained the approval of Consultant / Engineer-in-charge.1.6.2 PROTECTIONAll foundation trenches and similar excavations shall be strong, fenced and marked with red lights at nightfor watchmen to avoid accidents.Adequate protective measures shall be taken to see that the excavation does not affect or damageadjoining structures. All measures required for the safety of the excavation, the people working in andnear the foundation trenches, property and the people in the vicinity shall be taken can by the Contractorat his own cost, being entirely responsible for any injury and damage to property caused by his negligenceor accident due to his construction operations.1.6.3 STACKING OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS:Work for excavation shall include sorting out of useful materials and stacking them on site as directed.Materials suitable and useful for back-filling, plinth, filling, leveling of the plot or other use shall bestacked convenient places, but not in such a way as to obstruct free movement of men, equipment andvehicles or encroach on the area required for constructional purposes.1.7 BACKFILLING1.7.1 Earth obtained from excavation (or approved earth brought from out side for which no extra paymentshall be made) shall be filled in layers as described in 1.7.3 around the foundations and under floors, Incase extra earth used for filling is required under floors, plinth protection including sit outs, courtyards,the contractor will do at their own cost. The lump sum offer shall be deemed to include the earth filingrequired under floors and plinth protection with plinth height shown in Drawing above the bottom offoundation concrete and finished courtyard level shown in Drawing below D PC /coping level of the mainbuilding.1.7.2 QUALITY OF FILLFill shall be of well compacted, well graded earth or sand and shall be free from tree stumps, organicmatter, seed and peat etc Where earth or sand from source other than excavation at site is used, the qualityof such earth or sand shall be the same as that obtained from excavation at site, or superior to it. Fine sandfor filling is River Sand. Black cotton soil shall not be used for back filling or plinth filling.1.7.3 COMPACTIONThe fill shall be spread in layers not exceeding 20 cm thick and each layer shall be watered andthoroughly consolidated by suitable mechanical rollers, rammers, vibrators or other approved plant orsystem of compaction. The fill material shall be pulverized before depositing in place. An optimummoisture content shall be maintained for the filled materials. Compaction shall be done so as to achieve adry density of not less than 90% of the maximum density obtained at optimum moisture content, exceptfor the upper 20 cm layer which shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95% of the maximumdensity.In order that the fill shall be reasonably uniform through out, the material shall be dumped in place inapproximately horizontal layers “Edge dumping”, a process by which the materials is pushed off edge ofthe fill and allowed to roll down the slope shall not be carried out. If there is traffic over the fill duringconstruction, either by construction equipment or otherwise, it should be routed to make the compactionas uniform load shall be maintained and also care shall be taken to prevent any wedging action.

81.8 DE-WATERINGWork for excavation shall include bailing or pumping out water which may accumulate in the excavationduring the progress of work either form subsoil, seepage, springs, rain or any other cause and divertingsurface flow if any by bunds or other means. Pumping out water shall be done in such approved manneras to preclude the possibility of any damage to the foundation trenches, concrete or masonry of anyadjacent structure. When water is met with in foundation trenches, pumping out water shall be from anauxiliary pit of adequate size dug slightly outside the building excavations. The depth of the auxiliary pitshall be more than the working foundation trench levels. The auxiliary pit shall be refilled with approvedexcavated materials after the de-watering is over.The excavation shall be kept free from water -1. When Concrete/Reinforcement work/water proofing work is in the progress.2. Till the Consultant consider that concrete/mortar is sufficiently set.1.9 SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALAll excavated material certified as surplus and not useful, shall be removed by the Contractor from thesite in an approved manner at his own cost and risk so as indemnify owner from any claims any time ofwhatsoever nature.1.10 CONTRACT SUM TO INCLUDEApart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, the contract sum shall also include for thefollowing(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)(g)(h)(i)(j)Clearing siteSetting out works, profiles etc as required and setting up bench marks and other reference marksProviding shoring and strutting and subsequently removing the sameBailing and pumping out water as required and directedExcavation at all depth (unless otherwise specified in the drawings) and removal of all materialsof whatever nature wet or dry and necessary for the construction of foundation etc. and preparingbed for laying concreteSorting out useful excavated materials, transporting them beyond the structure and stacking themneatly on the site for back-filling or reuse as directedBack-filling the trenches alongside masonry or concrete with approved excavated material up tothe natural ground level including watering and rammingNecessary protection (including labour, materials and equipment) to ensure safety against risk oraccidentDrilling of small holes as directed to explore the nature of substratum if necessaryExcavation in soft rock/hard rock if necessary.2. SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANTIITERMITE TREATMENT2.1 GENERALPrevention of termite from reaching the super structure can be achieved by creating a chemical barrierbetween the ground and the building by treating the soil beneath the building and around the foundations.The work shall be carried out as per IS 6313 part II. of 2001 or the latest edition.This shall be provided to sides and bottom of trenches and footings including treating the backfill offoundations up to ground level and the vertical surface of wall, and filling of each under floors andtreating the surface at ground level 900 mm around the building.2.2 MATERIALAnti termite treatment, shall be carried out strictly in accordance with CPWD specifications usingChloropyrifos (CPP) an Emulsified concentrate @ 1% concentration or any other approved chemical.

92.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CHEMICAL TREATMENTThis is a process in which chemical treatment is applied to a building in the early stages of its constructionat the rate specified In IS 6313 part II of 2001 or the latest edition.Hand operated pressure pump shall be used for uniform spraying of the chemical. To have proper checkfor uniform spraying of chemical graduated containers shall be used. Proper check should be kept thatspecified quantity of chemical is used for the required areas during the operation.2.4 TIME OF APPLICATIONSoil treatment shall start when foundation trenches and pits are ready to take lean concrete in foundations.Laying of lean concrete shall start when chemical emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surfaceis quite dry. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or soil is wet with rain or sub soilwater. The foregoing applies also in the case of treatment to the filled earth surface within the plinthbefore laying the sub grade for the floor.2.5 DISTURBANCEThe treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed after they are formed. If by chance, treated soil barriers aredisturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and completeness of the barrier system.2.6 TREATMENT OF COLUMN PITS AND WALL TRENCHESa) The bottom surface and the sides (up to a height of above 300 mm) of the excavation made forcolumn pits and trenches shall be treated with the chemical at the rate specified in IS 6313 part IIof 2001 or the latest edition.b) After the column foundation and the wall foundation come up, the back fill in immediate contactwith the foundation structure shall be treated at the rate specified in IS 6313 PART OF 2001 orthe latest edition of the vertical surface of the substructure for each side If water is used forramming the earth fill, the chemical treatment shall be carried out after the ramming operation isdone by prodding the earth at 150 mm centers close to the wall surface and spraying the chemicalwith the above dose. The earth is usually returned in layers and the treatment shall be carried outin similar stages. The chemical emulsion shall be directed towards the concrete to masonrysurface of the columns and walls so that the earth in contact with these surfaces is well treatedwith the chemical.c) In the case of R.C.C. framed structure with columns and plinth beams and R.C.C basement withconcrete, mix is rich and dense (being 1:2:4 or richer), it is unnecessary to start the treatmentfrom the bottom of excavation for columns and plinth beams. The treatment shall start at thedepth of 500 mm below ground level. , From this depth the back-fill around the columns, beamsand R.C.C. basement wall shall be treated at the rate as per IS 6313 Part II of 2001 or the latestedition. The other details of treatment shall be as laid down in the Clause (b) above.2.7 TREATEMENT OF TOP SURFACE OF PLINTH FILLINGThe top surface of the filled earth within plinth wall shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the rate asper IS 6313 Part II 2001 or the latest direction (surface area) before the sand/sub-grade is laid. Holes up to50 to 70 mm deep at 150 mm centers both ways shall be made with crow bars on the surface to facilitatesaturation of the soil with chemical emulsion.2.8 TREATEMENT OF JUNCTION OF WALL AND FLOORTo achieve continuity of the vertical chemical barrier on inner wall surface from the ground level, smallchannel 30 X 30 mm shall be made at all the junctions of wall and columns with the floor (before layingthe sub-grade) and rod holes made in the channel up to ground level 150 mm apart and the chemicalemulsion poured along the channel as per rate of application, mentioned in IS 6313 Part II (2001) or thelatest edition so as to soak the soil right up to bottom. The soil shall be tamped back into place after thisoperation.

102.9 TREATEMENT OF SOIL ALONG EXTERNAL PERMIETER OF BUILDINGDuring progress of work, provide hole in the soil with iron rods along the external perimeter of thebuilding at intervals of about 150 mm and depth 300 mm and filling these holes with chemical emulsionat the rate (as per IS 6313 Part II of 2001 or the latest edition) per meter of perimeter of the external wall.2.10 TREATMENT FOR EXPANSION JOINTSAnti termite treatment shall be supplemented by treating through the expansion joint after the sub gradehas been laid as per IS 6313 Part II of 2001 or the latest edition.2.11 TREATMENT OF SOIL SURROUNDING PIPES AND CONDUITSWhen pipes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the foundations, the soil surrounding the pointsof entry shall be loosened around each such pipe, or conduit for a distance of 150 mm and up to depth of75 mm before treatment is commenced When they enter the soil external to the foundations, they shall besimilarly treated unless they stand clear of the walls of the building by about 75 mm for distance of over300 mm from ground level.2.12 SAFETY PRECAUTIONSAll chemicals used for anti-termite treatment are poisonous and hazardous to health. These chemicals canhave an adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the skin, in haled as vapors or spray mists orswallowed.Person using or handling these chemicals should be warned of these dangers and advised that absorptionthrough the skin in the most likely source of accidental poisoning. They should be cautioned be observecarefully the safety precautions given below.These chemicals are usually brought to site in the form of emulsifiable concentrates. The containersshould be clearly labeled and should be stored carefully so that children and pets cannot get at them. Theyshould be kept securely closed.Special care should be taken to prevent skin contact with concentrates. Prolonged exposure to diluteemulsions should also be avoided Workers should wear clean clothing and should wash thoroughly withsoap and water, especially before eating or smoking. In the event of severe contamination, clothing shouldbe removed at once and the skin washed with soap and water, if chemicals splash into the eyes theyshould be flushed with plenty of fresh water and immediate medical attention should be sought.The concentrates are oil solutions and present a fire hazard owing to the use of petroleum solvents.Flames should not be allowed nearby during the mixing. Care should be taken in the applications andpresent a fire hazard owing to the use of petroleum solvents Flames should not be allowed nearby duringthe mixing.Care should be taken in the application of chemicals to see that they are not allowed to contaminate wellsor springs which serve as source of drinking water.2.13 GUARANTEEThe contractor shall guarantee through a guarantee bond, the anti-termite work for 10 years from the dateof completion of the project, and shall indemnify the Engineer-in-charge against any defects that arisetherein during the guarantee period as aforesaid. They shall immediately rectify, any defects that mayoccur therein, and repair all other damage occurring to any part of the structure on account of defect inAntitermite treatment, during the guarantee period of aforesaid.

113. SPECIFICATION FOR CAST – IN – SITU REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE3.1 GENERAL3.1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section covers the requirements for finishing of cement concrete, proportioning, batching, mixing,testing, placing, compacting, finishing, jointing, curing and all other work as required for cast in placereinforced concrete. The contractor shall provide all the materials including cement, steel, labour,equipment, ‘form work’, scaffolding etc., required for completion of all reinforced concrete works as perdrawings and documents.Cement concrete shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,water, with or without admixture as approved, proportioned and mixed as specified herein.3.1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHEREa) Steel reinforcementb) Form work3.1.3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDSThe codes and standards generally applicable to the work of this section are listed hereinafter.IS 383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concreteIS 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concreteIS 516 Methods of testing for strength of concreteIS 1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concreteIS 1489 Portland - Pozzolana cementIS 1838 Performed fillers for expansion joints in concrete non-extruding and resilient typeIS 1946 Code of practice for use of fixing devices in walls, ceiling and floors of solidConstructionIS 2389 Methods of testing of aggregate for concrete’sIS 2505 Concrete vibrators, immersion typeIS 2645 Integral cement water proofing compoundsIS 3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildingsIS 3558 Code of practice for use for immersion vibrators for consolidating concreteIS 4082 Recommendation on stacking and storage of construction materials atIS 7861 Code of practice for extreme weather concretizingIS 7861 Recommended practice for hot weather (part I) concretizingIS 8112 Ordinary Portland Cement grade 43IS 12269 Ordinary Portland Cement grade 53PART— IThe following clauses are intended to amplify the requirements of the reference document listed aboveand the contractor shall comply with these clauses3.2 SUBMITTALS3.2.1 Material Report3.2.2 Prior to start of delivery of materials required, the following shall be submitted by the contractor to theConsultant / Engineer-in-charge for approvalSuppliers and / or sources of all consumable materials including cement, steel, fine and coarse aggregates,water additives, bricks and timber etc.Quality Inspection Plan to ensure continuing quality control of ingredients by periodic sampling, testingand reporting to the Consultant on the quality of materials being supplied.

123.3 PLANT AND EQUIPMENTThe contractor shall submit the following to the Consultant well in advance.The proposed program, methods and details of plant and Equipment for be used to testing of ingredientsand concrete samples.The proposed programme methods and details of plant & equipment to be used for concrete work.3.4 REPORTS FOR INSPECTION AND TESTINGDuring concreting operations, the contractor shall conduct inspection and testing as described under thelist of mandatory tests in this volume and all reports thereon shall be submitted in summary form to theConsultant / Engineer-in-charge.3.5 SCHEDULESBefore commencement of the work the contractor shall prepare working schedules of concreting givingdates and rate of pour for each item of work and submit the same to the Consultant / Engineer-in-chargefor their approval.3.6 MATERIALSBefore bringing to the site, all materials for cement concrete shall be approved by the Consultant /Engineer-in-charge. All approved samples shall be deposited in the office of the Consultant / Engineer-inchargebefore placing orders for the materials with suppliers The materials brought on to the work shallconform in every respect to their approved samples.Fresh samples shall be deposited with the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge whenever type or source of anymaterial changes The contractor shall check each fresh consignment of materials as it is brought on to theworks to ensure that they conform to the specification and / or approved samples.The Consultant / Engineer-in-charge shall have the option to have any of the materials tested to findwhether they are in accordance with specifications at the contractor ‘s expense. All bills vouchers and testcertificates which in the opinion of the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge are necessary to convince him asto the quality of materials or their suitability shall be produced for his inspection when required.Any materials which have not been found to the specification and not approved by the Consultant /Engineer-in-charge shall be rejected forthwith and shall be removed from the site by the Contractor’s athis own cost within the time stipulated by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge. The Consultant / Engineerin-chargeshall have the powers to cause the contractors to purchase and use materials from any particularsource, as may in their opinion be necessary for the proper execution of work.3.6.1 CEMENTCement shall be provided by the ContractorOn the following types of cement as specified shall be useda. Ordinary Portland Cement 43 grade confirming to BIS 8112-1987b. Ordinary Portland Cement 53 grade confirming to BIS 12269-1987Cement at site shall be stored in dry weather proof go-downs (or shed) built by the Contractor at his owncosts in stacks which are not higher than 10 bags. The cement go-down shall be constructed as per CPWDspecifications. The contractor shall conduct all necessary tests as specified in the IS, of the cementsupplied by Engineer-in-charge at the contractor’s cost to ascertain himself on quality of the materialissued.

133.6.2 AGGREGATESa) Aggregates from natural sources shall be in accordance with IS:383. The contractor shall submit to theConsultant / Engineer-in-charge certificates of grading and compliance from the suppliers for allconsignments of aggregate. In addition at site from time to time, the contractor shall test the aggregates inaccordance with IS: 2386 parts 1, II, III and IV. The contractor shall allow for and provide all necessaryapparatus for carrying out each test and for supplying test records to the Consultant.b) For fair faced concrete, the contractor shall ensure that aggregates are free from iron pyrites andimpurities which may cause discoloration.c) The fine aggregates shall be river sand, stone dust or other approved sand. It shall be free from clay, loan,earth or vegetables matter and from salt or other harmful chemical impurities It shall be dean sharp, strongangular and composed of hard siliceous material.The grading of sand as determined by the method prescribed in IS: 2386 part I shall be within the limits ofgrading zone III given in Table 1. When the grading falls outside the percentage limits given for sievesother than 600 micron, 300 micron, and 150 micron (I.S) sieves by not more 5 percent, it shall be regardedas falling within this zone. The 5 percent can be excess submission on one more sieves.TABLE 1FINE AGGREGATEI. S. Sieve Percentage passing for GradingIV ZONEI ZONEII ZONEIII ZONE10 mm 100 100 100 1004. 75 MM 90-95 90-100 90-100 95-1002 36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-1001.18mm 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100600 micron 15-34 35-59 35-60 80-100300 micron 5-20 8-30 8-30 20-65150 micron 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15The maximum quantity of silt as determined by the method prescribed in IS: 2386 Part II shall not exceed8%.Stone dust shall be within the limits of Grading Zone III given in table 1. When the grading falls outsidethe percentage limits given for the sieves other than 600 micron and 300 micron (IS) sieves by not morethan 5 percent and on 150 micron sieves by not more than 20 percent it shall be regarded as falling withinthis zone. The 5 percent can be excess summation on one or more sieves.3.6.2.1 COARSE AGGREGATEThe coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone or broken stone. Coarse aggregate obtained from crushed orbroken stone shall be angular, hay, strong, dense, durable clean and free from soft, friable, thin, flat,elongated flaky pieces. The coarse aggregate should be from the approved source/quarry.Coarse aggregate River shingle or pit gravel shall be rounded, sound hard, clean, non porous, suitablygraded in size with or without broken fragments and free from flat particle of shale, clay, silt, loam andother impurities.Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Consultant than a supply of properly gradedaggregate of uniform quality can be maintained over the period of the obtaining the coarse aggregate indifferent sizes & blending them in correct proportions as and when required.The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be such that the concrete can be placed without difficulty soas to surround all reinforcement thoroughly and fill the comers of form work.

143.6.3 WATERWater used in the works shall be potable water and free from deleterious materials. Water used for mixingand curing concrete as well as for cooling and/or washing aggregate shall be fresh and clean, free frominjurious amounts of oil, salts, acids, alkali, other chemicals and organic matter.Water shall be from the source approved by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge and shall be inaccordance with Clause 4.3 of IS: 456.Before starting any concreting work and whenever the source of water changes, the water shall be testedfor its chemical and other impurities to ascertain its suitability for use in concrete for approval of theConsultant. No water shall be used until tested and found satisfactory. Cost of all such tests shall be borneby the contractor.3.6.4 ADMIXTURES AND ADDITIVESChemical admixtures are not to be used until permitted by the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge in case theiruse is permitted, the type, amount and method of use of any admixture proposed by the contractor shall besubmitted to the Consultant for approvalThe contractor shall further provide the following information concerning each admixture to theConsultant/Engineer-in-charge.a) Normal dosage and detrimental effects, if any, of under dosage and over dosage.b) The chemical names of the main ingredients in the admixture.c) The chloride ion content, if any, expressed as a percentage by weight of admixture.d) Whether or not the admixture leads to the entertainment of air when used in the manufacturer’srecommended dosage.e) Where two or more admixtures are proposed to be used in any one mix, the manufacturer’swritten confirmation of their compatibility.In reinforced concrete, the chloride ion of any admixture as determined in accordance with IS: 6925 andthe total chloride ion in all admixtures used in concrete mix shall not exceed 0.30n percent by weight ofcement.The admixtures when used shall conform to IS: 9103. The suitability of all admixtures shall be verified bytrial mixes.The addition of calcium chloride to concrete containing embedded metal will not be permitted under anycircumstances.Regarding admixtures when used shall be based on lingo-sulphonates with due consideration to clause 5.2and 5.30 of IS: 7861.3.7 PLANTWaterproofing admixtures shall comply with IS: 2645.The contractor shall obtain the approval of the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge for all plant items heproposes to use for the manufacture and placing of concrete.The arrangement shall maintain all items of plant at all times in a clean and efficient working condition.3.8 STORAGEAll goods and products covered by these specifications shall be procured well in advance and stored asspecified below.3.8.1 CEMENTCement shall be stored on a raised floor in dry weather proof & dust free but well ventilated shed.

15Cement bags shall be stacked close together away from external walls and in stacks of not more than tenbags to avoid lumping under pressure.Cement stored during monsoons or cement expected to be in store for more than eight weeks shall becompletely enclosed in 700 micron polyethylene sheet so arranged that the flap closes on the top stack.The contractor shall ensure that protective polyethylene sheet is not damaged at any time during use.Consignments of cement shall be used in order of delivery A record shall be kept of the batch numbers ofcement deliveries in such a form that the part of the works in which the cement is used can be readilyidentified. If during delivery or by test, the cement is found to be defective, the same shall be returnedback forthwith.The contractor shall be responsible for the storage of cement at the site and no claim will be entertained inthe event of any damage occurring to cement due to faulty storage by the contractors or on account of hisnegligence.Cement stored on site for a period longer than eight weeks shall be tested to the satisfaction of theConsultant/Engineer-in-charge before it is used in the works. Cement that has failed the tests conductedshall not be used in the works and shall be remarked from the site immediate by without fail.3.8.2 STORING OF AGGREGATEAggregates shall be stored on a suitable well drained raft of concrete, timber, metal or other approvedmaterial. The storage of aggregates on the ground will not be permitted.Each size of aggregate shall be stored separately in such a manner as to prevent spillage and mixing ofone aggregate with an adjacent aggregate The dividing walls of any bin shall be of sufficient height andthe aggregate shall be so deposited that a distance of 100 mm shall be left between the top of the divisionwall and any part of the aggregate stackWhen stack piling, the aggregate shall not form pyramids resulting in segregation of different sizeparticles. The stacks shall be regular and of a height not exceeding two meters.3.9 Grades of ConcreteThe grades of concrete shall be in accordance with the following table. The grade of concrete to beused in each section of work will be shown in the drawings or in the Bill of Quantities:Grade of ConcreteCHARACTERSTIC STRENGTHCharacteristic strength i.e.compressive strength of 15 cm.Cubes at 28 days (N/mm2)10 10 2515 15 2520 20 2025 25 2030 30 2035 35 20Nominal maximumaggregate size (mm)

16Unless otherwise specified in the drawings, the maximum nominal size of coarse aggregates fordifferent grades of concrete shall be as under:a) For concreting in very narrow space or in very small thickness 12 mmb) For all reinforced concrete work except in massive foundations 20 mmc) For all ordinary plain concrete and massive reinforced foundations 10 mmAll mix design grades viz., M10, M15, M20, M25, M30 etc., shall be designed and have a minimumcement content as follows:Grade Qty (in kg)M-10 200M-15 300M-20 400M-25 600M-30 800Minimum content of cement remaining unchanged, as specified above for each type of concrete mix,the proportion and quantities of local sand and aggregate are to be worked out and determined in thefield/laboratory as per Road Research Note No.4, Department of Scientific and Industrial Research,United Kingdom for design of concrete mixes or as per ACI 613 with the approval of the Engineer.Any change in the source of aggregates will require the re-designing of the concrete mix for theEngineer's approval.3.10 Mix DesignGeneralAt the commencement of the contract, the Contractor shall make preliminary tests to determine theproportions by weight of cement, fine aggregates, coarse aggregates and water necessary to producerequired grades of concrete. The mix proportions shall be selected to ensure that workability of thefresh concrete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing and when concrete hardens, it shallhave the required strength, durability and surface finish. The Contractor shall get approval of theEngineer to such proportions before start of concreting. However, such approval shall not relieve theContractor of his responsibility to produce concrete having compressive strengths as laid down in theforegoing table.No departure from the approved proportions will be permitted during the works unless and until theEngineer gives written authorization for any change in proportion. The Engineer shall have authority atany time to check whether the mixing of concrete is being carried out according to the approvedproportions.For the major and important RC works and for all special works, the design of mixes shall be made bythe Contractor at his own cost, for each grade of concrete as well as for various workability. The designof mixes shall be made according to relevant I.S. codes or to approved standard methods.The concrete made by designing the mix is termed hereinafter as "Design Mix Concrete".The Contractor shall use only design mix and weigh batching for RCC. Only ifspecially permitted by the Engineer, he will be allowed to use nominal mix or volume batching. TheContractor shall make available at least two concrete mixers with weigh batching facility. He shall alsomake available concrete cube, testing machine, cube moulds etc. to test the crushing strength ofconcrete at site. He shall also indicate while submitting the Bid, the methods proposed to carry out thedesigns for the mix.

173.11 Water/Cement RatioWhere a particular water/cement ratio is stipulated in the design or drawing along with thecharacteristic grade of concrete, the design of mix shall be carried out by adjusting the other variablefactors to obtain characteristic strength of concrete with stipulated water/cement ratio.In the structures where the impermeability and shrinkage of concrete have an important bearing on thedurability and serviceability of the structures, such as water retaining structures, basements,underground premises, tunnels, pump houses, exposed structures near sea side or deserts, pre-stressedstructure, thin precast members etc., the water/cement ratio shall be kept low and preferably notexceeding 0.45.The water cement ratio as achieved in the mix design or as specified in the drawings shall be adhered tostrictly and shall not be varied without the permission of the Engineer.3.12 WorkabilityThe workability of fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is just suitable for the conditions ofhandling and placing so that after compaction, it becomes completely consistent and homogeneouslysurrounds all the reinforcement and completely fills the formwork.The workability of fresh concrete at the place of batching/mixing shall be measured by compactingfactor test and at the place of disposition by means of slump test. During the finalization of trial mixes,the relationship between compacting factor and slump test shall be established for each grade ofconcrete as well as for various levels for workability.Normally, in the condition of low water cement ratio as well as for medium/high workability, theworkability shall be achieved by increasing the cement content.In cases where the cement content is to be limited to reduce the heat of hydration, and the water /cement ratio is also to be kept low to reduce the permeability or due to other requirements the desiredworkability may be achieved with the use of limited doses of plasticizer or air entraining agent. In suchcases, the method of mixing and dosage of the plasticiser / air entraining agent shall be according to themanufacturer's specification and with the approval of the Engineer.Consistency and workability of concrete shall be checked by measuring the slump of a truncated coneof concrete straight from the mixer under normal working conditions. The conical mould shall be ofmetal, 300 mm high and 100 mm and 200 mm in diameter at top and base respectively.Moulds shall be prepared by the Contractor. The slump range of concrete shall be as per the tabulationgiven below, as well as standards.Slump tests shall be performed as per IS:1881 at intervals established by the Engineer at theContractor's cost in such a way as to check that the degree of consistency established by the Engineerfor work in progress is maintained. The table below gives the general slump range to be followed forvarious types of construction unless otherwise shown on drawings or instructed by the Engineer.Various types of construction ....Slump (in mm)... Max. Min.Reinforced foundation walls and footings 80 35Plain footings, caissons and structure walls 75 20Compressor foundations and for heavy mass constructions 50 20Pumps and other misc. equipment foundations 75 35Columns, slabs, beams and reinforced walls 100 50

183.13 DurabilityThe durability of concrete, depending on the exposure condition, is to be taken into account whiledesigning the mix. For given aggregates, the cement content should be sufficient to make sufficientlylow water/cement ratio and Appendix A of IS: 456 shall be taken as guideline for durabilityconsiderations.3.14 Trial MixesAfter approval of the mix design by the Engineer, the Contractor shall make in presence of theEngineer the trial mixes for each grade of concrete as well as for required workability.Before starting the trial mixes, necessary preparatory works like determination of sieve analysis of theaggregates, densities of different ingredients, moisture contents in the aggregates, shall be completedaccording to the relevant BIS Codes.Each trial mix shall be handled and compacted by the method which the Contractor proposes to use forthat mix in the works and the mixes shall not show tendency of inadequate compaction by the methodproposed.The compacting factor and the slump of each trial mix shall be determined immediately after mixingand the values shall not exceed the maximum value obtained in the mix design.Five (5) 150 mm test cubes shall be made from each trial mix. These shall be cured and tested inaccordance with relevant BIS codes. In order to have the specified characteristic strength in the field,the concrete mix as designed in the design mix shall have higher average compressive strengthdepending on the degree of quality of control at site.Before commencement of the concreting works of particular grade of concrete, the Contractor mustcomplete the work of trial mixes and subsequent testing of the test cubes obtained there from and thedesire of the approved mix for that particular grade of concrete.The entire cost of all the trial mixes including all the preparatory works for trial mixes, preparation oftest cubes and their testing shall be borne by the Contractor.3.15 Nominal Mix ConcreteNominal mix concrete may be used for all concrete of grade M-10 and below. If design mix concretecannot be used for any reason for grade M-15 and M-20, nominal mix concrete may be used with thepermission of the Engineer. Nominal mix concrete shall be in accordance with Table-3 of clause 8.3 ofI S 456. The stipulations of clauses 8.3.1 and 8.3.2 of IS: 456 shall also be taken into consideration..3.16 Volumetric Mix ConcreteWhere concrete is specified in volumetric proportions such as 1:4:8, 1:3:6, 1:2:4, 1:1.5:3, 1:1:2 etc., inthe Bill of Quantities, coarse & fine aggregates shall be measured by volume & cement by weight. Thewater cement ratio shall be within 0.45 & 0.70 depending upon the workability.3.17 Batching of Concrete3.17.1 CementCement shall always be batched by weight. A separate weighing device shall be provided for weighingcement. Where the weight of cement is determined by accepting the weight per bag, a number of bagsshall be weighed separately to determine the average net weight of cement per bag and the same shallbe checked regularly.

193.17.2 Aggregates3.18 Water3.18.1 GeneralFor both design mix concrete and nominal mix concrete, the aggregates,(coarse and fine) shall bebatched by weight.In particular cases, or where weight-batching is not possible, proportioning by volume batching may beallowed by the aggregates throughout the period of construction. For this purpose, the Contractor shallsubmit to the Engineer sufficient data indicating the weight/volume relationship of the aggregates shallbe made by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where aggregates are moist and volumebatching is adopted, allowance shall be bulking in accordance with IS (Part III).Suitable adjustments shall be made for the variation in the weight of aggregates due to variation in theirmoisture contents.Water may be measured either by weight or by volume. When measured by volume, it shall be by wellcalibrated conical shaped jar or vessel or from a calibrated tank filled to the mixer.3.18.2 Adjustment of Water Due to Moisture Contents in Coarse and Fine AggregatesIt is very important to maintain the water cement ratio constant at its correct value. For the correctdetermination of the amount of water to be added in the concrete mix, to maintain the water cementratio constant, the amount of moisture content in both coarse and fine aggregates shall be taken intoconsideration, be checked as frequently as possible, the frequency for a given job being determined bythe Engineer according to weather condition.3.18.3 Determination of Moisture Content in the AggregatesDetermination of moisture content in the aggregates shall be according to IS 2386 (Part-III). Wheretests are not conducted, the amount of surface water may be estimated from the following table:3.18.4 AdmixturesAggregatesSurface water carried by Aggregates% by weight l/m3Very wet sand 7.50 120Moderately wet sand 5.00 80Moist Sand 2.50 40Moist gravel stone chips * 1.25-2.5 20-40• coarser the aggregate, less the water it will carryAny solid admixture, to be added, shall be measured by weight, but liquid or semi-liquid admixturemay be measured by weight or volume.The Bidder shall indicate the brand name, the Manufacturer and the properties of any admixture to beused for the concrete as per Bill of Quantity items or on his own initiative.

203.18.5 Accuracy of BatchingThe accuracy of batching shall be within the following tolerance:1 Cement within + 2% by weight2 Aggregate within + 5% by weight3 Water within + 0.5% by weight.3.19 Mixing of Concrete3.19.1 Machine MixingConcrete shall always be mixed in mechanical mixer. Water shall not, normally, be charged into thedrum of the mixer until all other ingredients are already in the drum and mixed for at least one minute.Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of materials and the mass is uniform incolour and consistency. The mixing time from the time of adding water shall be in accordance with IS1791, but in no case less than 2 minutes or at least 40 revolutions.3.19.2 Hand MixingWhen hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer, it shall be carried out on a water tight platform andcare shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the mass is uniform in colour andconsistency. In case, of hand mixing, 10% extra cement shall be added to each batch at no extra cost toGAIL (INDIA) LTD.,3.20 Transportation of ConcreteConcrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of placing concrete as rapidly aspracticable by any means, which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients andmaintain the required workability. No water shall be mixed with the concrete after it has left the mixer.Where concrete is transported over long distances, the Contractor shall provide suitable means bywhich different grades of concrete are readily identifiable at the place of final deposit.3.21 Preparatory Works/Surface Preparation3.21.1 For Concrete Directly on Earth FoundationEarth foundation on which direct placement of concrete is specified, shall be rammed and consolidatedas directed by the Engineer such that it does not crumble and get mixed with concrete during or afterplacement. If the foundation is quite wet, the same shall be kept dry and then sufficiently consolidated,if necessary, a thin top layer of the wet soil shall be removed and replaced by sand or other suitablematerials as directed by the Engineer without extra cost to GAIL (INDIA) LTD., Care shall also betaken that earth from the sides also does not get mixed with the concrete, during or after placement,before it has sufficiently set and hardened.The earth foundation, over which concrete is to be placed directly, shall not be kept abandon at thespecified level and concrete shall be placed immediately following otherwise suitable measures shall betaken, as directed by the Engineer without extra cost to GAIL (INDIA) LTD.,

213.21.2 For Construction JointsConcrete shall be cast, as far as possible, continuously until the parts of structure to be built arefinished. Should this not be feasible, the type, number and location of construction joints shall beapproved by the Engineer prior to placing concrete.All such joints shall have continuous square bond grooves to produce substantial and water-tight-keyand the exposed faces of joints shall be monolithic with the main mass of concrete formed andcompleted under substantially shattered faces. The Contractor shall take all the necessary steps bymeans of timber edgings etc. to ensure an exact horizontal straight finish to outside edge of any lift ofconcrete. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor is at liberty to arrange his ownconstruction joints but the following restrictions are to be observed:1. There shall be no vertical construction joints2. No longitudinal joints shall be made in the walls and floors of trenches and pits unlessotherwise shown in the drawings.3. Concrete pouring shall be reasonably large, but in no case shall the height of pouring concreteexceed 1.5 m without the Engineer's firm approval. Such approval of the Engineer shall not inany way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to ensure that the construction is watertight and that no segregation takes place.4. Laitance shall be removed from the surface of concrete before it has set hard by washing andwire brushing so as to expose the stones of the top layer without undue erosion of the mortaror damage to the under laying concrete.All beds and joints in concrete faces, which have become set, are to be picked all over and all loosematerials removed before fresh concrete is deposited thereon. The indentations shall be at least 12 mmdeep and not less than seventy five percent of the area of the existing concrete face to be covered over.Immediately before depositing fresh concrete, the exposed surface shall be cleaned of foreign matter byfurther wire brushing, if necessary. It shall then be thoroughly washed and surplus water removed. Thesurface, while still moist, shall be covered with layer of 1:1 cement mortar which must be vigorouslystippled into the surface by means of a stiff brush, the depositing of the fresh concrete following onclosely. Pockets to form keys shall be left in the surface of the concrete at constructional joints, 75 mmdeep and approximately equal to 20% of the exposed surface.All costs in connection with the forming of construction joints shall be to the account of the Contractorand shall be deemed to be included in the rates for concreting and formwork and shall not be separatelypaid for. In a column, the joint shall be formed 75 mm below the lowest soffits of the beams, includinghaunches, if any.Concrete in a beam shall be placed throughout without a joint but if the provision of a joint isunavoidable, then the joint shall be vertical and at the centre of, or within, middle third of the span,unless otherwise shown on the drawings.3.21.3 On Vertical Surfaces of MasonryWhen the concrete is placed on the vertical surface of masonry (as in the case of thin concrete finsprojected from the vertical masonry surface), a groove of dimension as directed by the Engineer shallbe cut in the masonry to ensure a proper bond and the surface shall be cleaned thoroughly. Before the

22placement of concrete, the surface shall be kept moist by spraying water at least for the period of 2hours and a thick coat of cement slurry shall be applied immediately before the placement of concrete.3.21.4 Inside the Form Works (Cleaning, Surface Preparation etc.)The interior of the form works, where the concrete is to be placed, shall be thoroughly washed by highpressure water jet or air jet to completely clean the entire volume from the dirts, grease/oil foreign anddeleterious materials etc. The reinforcements shall be completely cleaned and free from all sorts of dirtsgrease/oil, rust, foreign/deleterious materials etc. Before placement of concrete, the form works comingin contact with concrete, shall be coated highly with form oil or raw linseed oily material or providedwith any approved material to prevent adhesion of concrete to the form work, but utmost care shall betaken so that such oily material does not come in contact with the reinforcement.3.22 Placing and Compaction of ConcreteBefore placing the concrete, the Contractor shall ensure that:1. All mixing and placing equipment is thoroughly cleaned2. All concreting space is free from debris and rubbish3. All forms have been thoroughly wetted or oiled and firmly installed in line and plumb to theEngineer's approval.4. All reinforcement is cleaned of loose rust, scales and other injurious adherents and is firmlybound and correctly placed and has been so approved by the Engineer.5. All inserts, sleeves, foundation bolts and embedded parts have been correctly and firmlyinstalled to conform to the Engineer's drawings and have been carefully checked to complywith the drawings. Special care shall be taken to locate and check sleeves or inserts, whichmay not be symmetrically placed with respect to centre lines.The Contractor and Engineer shall separately inspect and check the above mentioned points and recordand sign the results in a register which shall be maintained by the Contractor in a approved form. Noconcrete shall be placed without the Engineer having inspected and approved in writing. Inspite ofensuring the above requirements, the Contractor shall fill pour cards furnishing the necessary details ofthe job, duly signed by the Engineer. This, however, will not absolve the Contractor from hisresponsibility to correctly execute the work. Pour cards shall contain the following information:Design Index- Date- Slump- Workability- Work test specimen- Type of finishing and admixtures used (if any)- Period of removal of shuttering/props/forms.a. The concrete pouring method shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall alwaysbe such as to avoid any possibility of segregation of the components or shifting of thereinforcement.b. Special grout or mix shall be used for difficult and intricate locations as specified by theEngineer. During placing, the concrete shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement,embedded parts and corners of the formwork.c. Greatest possible care shall be taken by the Contractor that reinforcement and embedded parts,particularly foundation bolts and sleeves, are not displaced during placement of concrete.While concreting mats and other such locations where top and bottom reinforcement areadopted, top reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of all slurry and mortar sticking tothem at the time of concreting top layers.d. The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting commences and should not besubsequently disturbed. No water shall be mixed with the concrete after it has left the mixer.Method of placing should be such as to preclude segregation. Approved mechanical vibrator

23shall be used for compacting concrete, and concrete shall not be non vibrated or undervibrated. No concrete shall be placed until the place of deposit has been thoroughly inspectedand approved by the Engineer, all inserts and embedment properly secured in position andchecked and forms properly oiled. No concrete shall be placed in the absence of the Engineer.e. Concrete shall be placed on clean bed having the designed level. The bed shall be cleaned ofall debris and other objectionable materials. Seepage water, if any, shall be controlled ordiverted.f. Concreting shall not be carried on during rains unless all precautions have been taken by theContractor and necessary permission has been given by the Engineer. Suitable measures shallbe taken to control the temperature of concrete.g. Where plums are permitted in massive concrete, they shall be washed and carefully placed.No stone shall be closer than 30 cm to an exposed face, nor nearer than 15 cm to an adjacentstone.h. Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of more than 2 m except through a chute, thedesign and type of which shall be subjected to approval of the Engineer.i. The concrete shall be placed, spread and compacted by approved mechanical vibrator.Vibrators shall not be used for pushing concrete to adjoining areas.j. For members involving vertical placing of concrete (e.g. columns, walls etc.), each lift shall bedeposited in horizontal layer extending for the full width between shuttering and of such depththat each layer can be easily and effectively vibrated and incorporated with the layer below bymeans of compaction being employed.k. For members involving horizontal placing of concrete (e.g., slabs, beams etc.), the concreteshall be placed along the line of starting point in such quantities as will allow members to becast to their full depth along the full width between side shuttering and then gradually broughttowards the finishing point along its entire front parallel to the starting line. Vibration andsurface finish shall follow behind the placement as closely as possible.l. Utmost care shall be taken to avoid the displacement of reinforcements/ embedded parts ormovement of form work or damage to faces of the form work or transmission of any harmfulvibration/shocks to the concrete which has not yet hardened sufficiently.m. All members shall be concreted at such a rate that no cold joint is formed and fresh concrete isplaced always against green concrete, which is still plastic and workable.n. Should any unforeseen occurrence result in a stoppage of concreting for one hour or suchother time as might allow the concrete, already placed, to begin to set before the next batchescan be placed, the Contractor shall make at his own cost, suitable tongue, and grooveconstruction joint, as approved by the Engineer. Any additional reinforcement required asdirected by the Engineer shall also be provided by the Contractor at his own cost. Beforeplacement of new batches of concrete over that construction joint, the surface preparationaccording to this specification stipulated earlier, shall be done by the Contractor.o. The concrete shall be worked well up against whatever surface it adjoins and compacted tosuch a degree that it reaches its maximum density as a homogeneous mass, free from air andwater holes and penetrates to all corners of moulds and shuttering and completely surroundsthe reinforcement. All measures shall be taken to make the shape, size, and location of thefinished concrete including its embedment, holes, openings etc, well within the acceptedtolerance limit.3.23 Construction JointsNormally, the construction joints including crack inducing joints shall be constructed as per locationsand details indicated on the drawings. Where the location of the joint is not specified in the drawings, itshall be in accordance with the following guidelines. In all construction joints, the reinforcements shallpass through as per drawings and the same shall not be disturbed in any way.a) In Columnsi) In case of Projection from Basement Slab, 300 mm from the top of base slab or 75mm from the top of the haunches whichever is higher.

24ii)iii)In framing the beam at different elevation, 75 mm below the lowest soffit of thebeam and in case of projection from beams and slabs 75 mm from the tope surface ofthe beam/slab or at the top surface of beam/slab whichever facilities formwork.For columns below flat slabs, 75 mm below the lowest soffit of the slab.b) In Walls (Horizontal Construction Joints)Note:i) For Walls Projecting From Base Slab, 300 mm from top of base slab.ii) For Walls supporting the suspended slab, 75 mm from the lowest soffit of the slab.In the case of water retaining structures and structures under the influence of ground water,approved water bars of suitable size shall be provided to make the joint completely watertight.c) In BeamsBeams shall be cast, as a rule, without a joint. But if provision of a joint is unavoidable, thejoints from simply supported beam shall be vertical and at the middle of the span; incontinuous beam, the same shall be at the point of minimum shear force.d) In Suspended Slabsi) In slab of small span, there shall be reconstruction joints.ii) In slabs of large span and continuous slabs, the Construction joint, if allowed by theEngineer, shall be vertical at the middle of span and at right angles to the principalreinforcement.e) In Walls (Vertical Construction Joint)As a rule, walls shall be cast monolithically without any vertical construction joint, unlessspecified in the drawing. However, for a long wall, Engineer may allow vertical constructionjoint and the same shall be at the place of minimum shear force.f) In Slabs Resting on Groundi) For Plain ConcreteConcreting shall be done in alternate panels not exceeding 10 m2 in area. The largest paneldimension shall be 5 m.ii)iii)For Nominally Reinforced SlabThe area of pour shall not exceed 40m2 and the maximum panel dimension shall not exceed8m.For the Basement Slabs Which Act as Structural MemberThese shall be no construction joint.g) In Ribbed BeamsThe beams shall be monolithically with the slab in one continuous operation.3.24 Cold JointsAn advancing face of pour, which could not be covered before expiry of initial setting time forunexpected reasons, is called a cold joint. The Contractor shall remain always vigilant to avoid coldjoints. If however, a cold joint is formed due to unavoidable reasons, the following procedures shall beadopted for treating it:1. If the concrete is so green that it can be removed manually and if vibrators can penetrate thesurface without much effort, fresh concrete can be placed directly over the old surface and thefresh concrete along with the old concrete shall be vibrated systematically and thoroughly.

252. In case the concrete has hardened a bit more than (a), but can still be easily removed by a lighthand pick, the surface shall be raked thoroughly and the loose concrete removed completelywithout disturbing the rest of the concrete in depth. Then a rich mortar layer of 12 mmthickness, shall be placed on one cold joint and then the fresh concrete shall be placed on themortar layer and vibrated thoroughly penetrating deep into the layer of concrete.3. In case the concrete at the joint has become so stiff that it cannot be remoulded and mortar orslurry does not rise in spite of extensive vibration, a tongue and groove joint shall be made byremoving some of the older concrete and the joint shall be left to harden at least for 12-24hours. It will then be treated as regular construction joint and the surface preparation of thesame, before placement of concrete, shall be as described in the appropriate clauses of thesespecifications.3.25 Sub-standard concreteShould the work strength of controlled concrete fall below the specified strength, Engineer shalldecide:1. To reject the work, in which case the Contractor shall replace the defective work with concreteof required strength and bear all costs for dismantling and replacing including cost ofassociated form work, reinforcement, embedded parts & all associated works.2. To accept the work at a reduced rate, in which case the unit rate payable for sub-standard workwill be reduced by GAIL (INDIA) LTD., directly in proportion to the work strength ascompared to the specified strength. The Engineer may, in addition, require other testsperformed on the respective structural member so accepted period to its acceptance with orwithout necessary corrective measures and in each such case, the Contractor shall bear allcosts for all such tests or corrective measures, besides the reduction in the unit rates asspecified herein.3. Concrete of strength below fifteen (15) percent of the specified strength will not be accepted.4. The test load shall be 125% of the maximum superimposed load for which the structure wasdesigned. Such test load shall not be applied before 56 days after the effective hardening ofconcrete. During the test, struts strong enough to take the whole load shall be placed inposition leaving a gap under the members. The test load shall be maintained for 24 hoursbefore removal.5. If, within 24 hours of the removal of the load, the structure does not show a recovery of atleast 75% of the maximum deflection shown during the 24 hours under load, the test loadingshall be repeated after a lapse of alteast 72 hours. The structure shall be considered to havefailed to pass the test if the recovery after the second test is not at least 75% of the maximumdeflection shown during the second test.If the structure is certified as failed by the Engineer, the cost of the load test shall be borne by theContractor.3.26 Optional TestsThe Engineer, if he so desires, may order tests to be carried out on cement, sand, coarse aggregate,water in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards.Tests on cement shall include1. Fineness test2. Test for normal consistency3. Test for setting time4. Test for soundness5. Test for tensile strength6. Test for compressive strength7. test for heat of hydration (by experiment and by calculation) in accordance with IS:269.Tests on sand shall include1. Sieve test.

262. Test for organic impurities.3. Decantation test for determining clay and silt content.4. Specific gravity test.5. Test for unit weight and bulkage factor.6. Test for sieve analysis and fineness modulus.Tests on coarse aggregates shall include1. Sieve analysis.2. Specific gravity and unit weight of dry, loose and rodded aggregate.3. Soundness and alkali aggregate reactivity.4. Petrographic examination.5. Deleterious materials and organic impurities.6. Test for aggregate crushing value.Any or all these tests would normally be ordered to be carried out only if the Engineer feels thematerials are not in accordance with the specifications or if the specified concrete strengths are notobtained and shall be performed by the Contractor or at an approved test laboratory at the cost of theContractor.If the work cubes do not give the stipulated strengths, the Engineer reserves the right to ask theContractor to dismantle such portions of the work which, in his opinion, are unacceptable and re-do thework to standards stipulated, at the Contractor's cost. The unit rate for concrete shall be all inclusive,including making preliminary mix design and test cubes works, cubes, testing them as perspecification, slump tests, optional tests etc.,3.27 Concrete for Equipment or steel structures foundationsConcrete for equipment foundation, whether principal or auxiliary, shall be poured continuously so thatthe structure becomes monolithic, particular care being exercised to see that the base slabs, if any, areof compact impervious construction. Tunnels, passages, apertures and so forth shall be provided inaccordance with the drawings for the installation of mechanical and electrical equipment, pipes orcables. The top elevation of the equipment foundations or parts shall be accurately cast to 20/50 mm(or more as may be specified on the drawings) above the level required for grouting and it shall bepneumatically chiseled off and well roughened just prior to the erection of the equipment concerned.All embedded anchor bolts or bolt sleeves shall be accurately and firmly set with the aid of approvedtemplates, steel supports and/or other accessories. For holding the embedded bolts or sleeves in thecorrect position during concreting, template shall have to be of steel of suitable section approved by theEngineer. Two sets of templates shall have to provided, one to hold the bottom and the other the top ofthe bolts or sleeves. The bottom template shall be securely and rigidly fixed by providing anchoragearrangement and by welding to the lowest part of the steel reinforcement and other structural supports.The top templates shall be securely fixed by tying with guy wires and turn buckle arrangements to firmand rigid adjoining structures and staging. The bottom template that is embedded in concrete will bemeasured and paid for as embedded steel.Bolt pockets, where required, shall be cast with wooden taper wedges. These shall be withdrawn at anappropriate time when the concrete has set, the pockets cleaned, roughened and then covered orblocked thoroughly to prevent debris getting into these. The exposed portions of bolts and embeddedparts shall be kept well greased and adequately protected from damage throughout construction. Anydamages found shall have to be corrected at the Contractor's cost GAIL (INDIA) LTD., shall have theright to use the foundations, pads, piers, slabs, floors and all concrete work as needed for other worksor equipment erected prior to its "Taking Over".3.28 Requirements for Concreting in Special Cases3.28.1 Concreting in Deep LiftsPlacing of concrete in lifts exceeding 3 m in columns and 2 m in walls is in the category of deep lifts.

27Before commencement of work, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer, thedetails of the methods he proposes to adopt for concreting.The placement of concrete shall preferablybe by tremie chute or any other approved method.In structures of heavy/complicated reinforcement or in complicated form works, the Contractor shallprovide sufficient number of windows in the form works as directed by the Engineer to check theplacement and compaction of concrete in different stages. Such windows shall be closed as soon as theconcreting reaches the bottom level of the same.3.28.2 Concreting Under WaterThe mix and method of concrete to be placed under water shall be approved by the Engineer.Under water, concrete shall contain at least ten (10) per cent more cement over that required for normalplacement.An account of extra cement so used shall be maintained by the Contractor and the Engineer jointly andthe extra cement used shall be separately paid for. Plumbing of water shall not be permitted for twentyfour (24) hours after completion of placement. No flow of water, natural or artificial, shall bepermitted during placement and upto twenty four (24) hours after completion of placement.3.28.3 Cold Weather ConcretingWhen conditions are such that the ambient temperature may be expected to be 4.5oC or below duringthe placing and curing period, the work shall conform to IS: 7861 (Part-II).3.28.4 Hot Weather ConcretingConcrete shall not normally be placed when the atmospheric temperature exceeds 40°C in the open. If,in spite of programming concrete work in the cooler hours of early morning, evening or night,placement is necessary in too hot a weather, then the Contractor shall take at least the followingadditional precautions:1. Stock-pile aggregates in shade2. Do not use fresh, factory hot cement3. Use cold water4. Cool form work by sprinkling water without collecting water inside5. Reduce to minimum the time interval between mixing and placing6. Place, vibrate and finish as quickly as possible7. Initiate curing as soon as concrete hardens.Positive temperature control by methods like pre-cooling, post cooling or cooling of concrete bycirculating cold water through small embedded pipe lines inside concrete, if required, shall be specifiedand shall be undertaken.3.28.5 Concreting in Large Pours (Mass Concrete)The aim of controlling the concreting in large pours is to reduce cracking caused by shrinkage due toheat of hydration. The Contractor shall submit detailed proposal to the Engineer for approval about themethod of pouring and the measures to reduce heat of hydration, which he proposes to adopt.The maximum height of lifts will depend on the type of cement used. The use of cement having lowheat of hydration, could allow greater lifts.The Contractor shall provide all the necessary arrangements like pre-cooling of aggregates, cooling offresh concreting by passing cold water through pipes placed inside the concrete or such other measuresat least 38 hours before the placement of concrete and also provide the facility for recording oftemperature at least 24 hours prior to placement of concrete.The minimum interval between concreting of successive lifts, separated by horizontal constructionjoint, shall be six days or as directed by the Engineer.

28The minimum interval between the concreting of adjacent pours separated by vertical constructionjoints shall be three (3) days, or as directed by the Engineer.3.29 Finishes to Exposed Surface of ConcreteThe Contractor is to include his quoted rate for concrete, the provision of normal finishes in bothformed and unformed surfaces as and where required by the Engineer without any extra cost to GAIL(INDIA) LTD., Some common finishes are indicated below:3.29.1 Surfaces which do not Require PlasteringSurface in contact with casing shall be brought to a fair and even surface by working the concretesmooth against casings with a steel trowel while it is being deposited and also by working over thesurface with a trowel immediately after the removal of the casings or centering, removing anyirregularities and stopping air holes, etc. Use of mortar plaster is not permissible for correcting levels,removing unevenness etc. However, if in the opinion of the Engineer, such plastering is unavoidable,then the thickness of plaster shall in no case exceed 5 mm and the plastering shall be in CM (1:3).3.29.2 Faces of Foundations which will be Back FilledNeither the smoothness of the surface not the positions of the joints in the form work are important.Small blemishes caused by entrapped air are permitted. No special surface finish is required.3.29.3 Exposed SurfacesSurface of beams/columns flushing with the block work or other structures where it is intended toplaster, shall be backed adequately as soon as the shuttering is stripped off so that proper bond with theplaster can develop.3.29.4 Surface for Non-integral FinishWhere a non integral finish such as floor finish is specified or required, the surface of the concrete shallbe struck off at the specified levels shall be furnished and finished rough.3.29.5 For Monolithic FinishWhere no more finishing course is to be supplied as in the case of basement floor, industrial flooring orthe screed concrete flooring etc., the concrete shall be completed and struck off at the specified levelsand slopes in a screed board and then floated with a wooden float. Steel trowel ling is then started afterthe concrete has hardened enough to prevent the excess of fines and water to rise to the surface but nothard enough to prevent proper finishing. Trowelling shall be such that the surface is flat, smooth andneatly finished.3.30 Curing of Concrete3.30.1 GeneralThe purpose of curing is either to provide sufficient water at optimum temperature or to prevent loss ofmoisture from the concrete itself so that the cement inside the concrete is sufficiently hydrated which,of course, is a slow and prolonged process. As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, thecuring shall be started.3.30.2 Different Methods of CuringAny one of the following may be used for curing as approved by the Engineer.a) Curing by Direct WaterThis is done either by pounding or spraying water.

29PoundingPonding is widely used for curing slabs and pavement. Earth bands are formed over the slabs and wateris pumped or poured into them and the same is replenished at interval to make up for the loss ofevaporation. As this type of curing is one of the best methods, 10 days of curing after final setting issufficient.By Spraying WaterCuring is done by spraying water by suitable means at approved time intervals. While spraying, it shallbe ensured that the complete area is covered. In order to avoid cracking, cold water shall not be appliedto massive members immediately after striking the form work, while the concrete is still warm.Alternative wetting and over drying shall be avoided.Curing by spraying water shall be continued as least for 18 days.b) Curing of Concrete with Absorbent Material Kept DampThe entire concrete surface is covered either with hessian, burlap, sawdust, sand, canvas orsimilar material and kept wet continuously for at least 12 days after final settings.c) Curing by Covering Concrete Surface with an Impressive SheetThis is achieved by covering the entire concrete surface with water proof paper or plasticsheets specially manufactured for this purpose. The waterproof papers are stuck together byadhesive compound and the plastic sheets can be welded at site.Such type of covering shall be kept at least for 24 days after the final setting. It is preferableto have sheet as white in appearance since the white colour will reflect hot sunrays and keepthe concrete temperature at reasonable level.d) Curing by Providing Protective Membrane by Applying curing compoundThis is achieved by applying a membrane forming compound (curing compound) over theconcrete surface. Generally, these are available in the emulsion form. The application of thecuring compound should be started immediately after stripping off the shuttering in case offormed surface and after the surface has hardened in case of unformed surface.The curing compound membrane forming emulsions dry up within 3 to 4 hours afterapplication and forms a continuous coherent adhesive membrane over the concrete surface.Such membrane serves as a physical barrier to prevent the loss of moisture from the concreteitself. Membrane forming emulsions are generally coloured black or white to improvevisibility for ensuring uniform application. Black colour shall never be used for curing in veryhot weather. In order to prevent glare, a colouring pigment may be added to whitecompounds.Black curing compounds are either Bituminous or Asphaltic emulsions and shall be used tosurfaces which are to be covered by back filling or on the floor which is to be covered withtiles and linoleum.White curing compound shall be used for the surfaces of tall structures under exposure of hotsun where other method of curing can not be properly ensured.e) Curing by Chemical CoatingFor chemical curing, sodium silicate or calcium chloride is used. The use of calcium chlorideshall be done with the approval of the Engineer. Normally, the sodium silicate mixed withwater is applied over concrete surface and, when it dries up, it forms a thin varnish like film,which fills up the pores, and surface voids and prevents evaporation of water. This also actslike curing compound but only difference is that curing compounds are available in readymixed emulsion forms while sodium silicate is to be mixed with water at site.

303.30.3 Limitation to Use of Different Methods of Curing:i) Curing by the processes as indicated in Section B – Clause 3-24 and more specifically as persub-clause 2(b) of the above clause gives very good results in normal warm climate formaturity of concrete.ii) In cold weather, the process as indicated in sub-clause 2(b) of clause 3-24 gives very goodresult for maturity of concrete.iii) Where water cement ratio is less than 0.5, the methods indicated in sub-clause 2(d) and 2(e) ofclause 3-24 of Section B, shall not be used.iv) In warm climate also, where the methods of curing as indicated in sub-clauses 2(a) and 2(b) ofclause 3-24 cannot be properly ensured, any suitable method of curing as indicated in subclauses2(c) to 2(e) of clause 3-24 of Section B, as approved/directed by the Engineer, shall beadopted.3.31 Testing of Concrete3.31.1 GeneralThe Contractor shall carry out, entirely at his own cost, all sampling and testing in accordance with therelevant IS standards and as supplemented herein. The Contractor shall get all tests done in anapproved laboratory and submit to the Engineer, the test result in triplicate within 3 days aftercompletion of the test.3.31.2 Consistency Test (Tests of Fresh Concrete)At the place of deposition/pouring of the concrete, to control the consistency slump tests and/orcompacting factor tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with IS 1199 as directed bythe Engineer.The results of the slump tests/compacting factor tests shall be recorded in a register for reference dulysigned by both the Contractor and the Engineer. That register shall be considered as the property ofGAIL (INDIA) LTD., and shall be kept by the Contractor at site in safe custody.The results of the slump tests/compacting factor tests shall tally, within accepted variation of 12%, withthe results in the respective design mix, in case of mix design concrete and with the values indicated inthe table under clause 6.1 of IS:456 in case of nominal mix concrete.For any particular batch of concrete, if the results do not conform to the requirements as specified in IS456, the Engineer has the right to reject that batch and the Contractor shall remove the sameimmediately from the site, at no cost to GAIL (INDIA) LTD.,.3.31.3 Strength Test of ConcreteWhile placing concrete, the Contractor shall make six (6) 150 mm test cubes from particular batches ofconcrete as desired by the Engineer. The frequency of taking test cubes shall be either according toclause 14.2 of IS:456 or as directed by the Engineer.The cubes shall be prepared, cured and tested according to IS 516. Out of the six (6) test cubes, 3 shallbe tested for compressive strength at 7 days after casting and the remaining 3 at 28 days after castingA register shall be maintained at site by the Contractor with the following details entered and signed byboth the Contractor and the Engineer. That register shall be considered as the property of GAIL(INDIA) LTD.,a) Reference to the specific structural memberb) Mark on cubesc) The grade of concrete

31d) The mix of concretee) Date and timef) Crushing strength at 7 daysg) Crushing strength at 28 daysh) Any other information directed by the Engineer.3.31.4 Acceptance Criteria for Test CubesThe acceptance criteria of concrete on strength requirement shall be in accordance with the stipulationsunder clause 15 of IS:456.3.31.5 Non-destructive Tests on Hardened ConcreteIf there is doubt about the strength or quality of a particular work or the test results do not comply withthe acceptance criteria as stipulated under clause 15 of IS:456, non-destructive tests on hardenedconcrete like core tests and/or load tests or other type of non destructive tests like ultrasonic impulsetest etc. shall be carried out, as may be directed by the Engineer, by the Contractor at entirely his owncost.The core tests and load tests shall comply with the requirements of clause 16.6 of IS: 456 shall beapplicable.3.31.6 Concrete Below Specified StrengthIn case of failure of test cubes to meet the specified requirements, the Engineer may take one of thefollowing actions:1. Reject the work and instruct that section of the works to which the failed cubes relate shall becut out and replaced at the Contractor's expense.2. Instruct the Contractor to carry out additional tests and/or works to ensure the soundness ofthe structure at the Contractor's expense.3. Accept the work with reduction in the rate in appropriate item.3.31.7 Concrete failed in Non-destruction TestsIn case test results of the core tests or load tests in a particular work do not comply with requirements ofrespective clause (16.3 for core test and 16.5 for load tests) of IS 456, the whole or part of the work concernedshall be dismantled and replaced by the Contractor as may be directed by the Engineer no extra cost to GAIL(INDIA) LTD., and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No payment for the dismantled concrete includingrelevant form work, reinforcement, embedded fixtures etc. shall be made. In the course of dismantling if anydamage occurs to the adjacent structure or embedded item, the same shall be made good, free of charge by theContractor, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.3.32 EXPANSION JOINTS3.32.1 GENERALExpansion joints shall be provided where shown on the drawings or as directed by Consultant. They shallbe constructed with an initial gap between the adjoining parts of the works of the width specified in thedrawings.The contractor shall ensure that no debris is allowed to enter expansion jointsExpansion joints shall be provided as per drawings.Contractor shall ensure that expansion joints are made water-tight and that no leakage occurs throughthese joints for which he shall be responsible to redo at his own cost.3.32.2 OPEN JOINT FILLERSWhere shown on the drawings, open joints in the structure shall be filled with joint fillers.

32The joint filler shall be easily and uniformly compressible to its original thickness, tampable, easily cut orsawn, robust, durable, resistant to decay due to termite or weathering, unaffected by water and free of anyconstituent which will bleed into or stain the concrete.The joint filler shall be of same thickness of the joint width, it shall extend through the full thickness ofthe concrete unless otherwise specified and shall be sufficiently rigid during handling and placing topermit the formation of straight joints3.32.3 JOINT SEALING COMPOUNDSJoints sealing compounds shall seal joints in concrete against the passage of water prevent the ingress ofgrit or other foreign material and protect the joint filler. The compound shall have good extensibility andadhesion to concrete shall have good extensibility and adhesion to concrete surfaces and shall haveresistant to flow and weathering. Polysulphide joints where specified on the drawings shall be seated withpolysulphide liquid polymer, stored, mixed handled, applied and cured strictly in dimensions, thoroughlycleaned and treated with recommended primer strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s writteninstructions prior to sealing. The Contractor shall use only competent personnel experienced in theapplication of polysulphide for such work.Where specified in the drawings, rubber/bituminous based sealant shall be of an approved manufacturer.The treatment of the joint and the use of sealing compound shall be strictly in accordance with themanufacturer’s written instructions.3.32.4 WATER BARSWhere water bars are shown on the drawings, the joints shall incorporate an approved PVC external typewater-bar complete with all necessary molded or prefabricated intersection pieces assembled inaccordance with the drawings with bends and butt joints in running lengths made by heat welding in anelectrically heated jig.Jointing and fixing of water-bars shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturers writteninstructions.The water-bars shall be installed so that they are securely held in their correct position during the placingand compacting of the concrete.Where reinforcement is present adjacent to water-bars, adequate clearance shall be left between thereinforcement and water-beds to facilitate of the concrete.3.33 CRACKSIf any cracks develop in the reinforced cement concrete construction which in the opinion of theConsultant may be determined to the strength of the construction, the contractor at his own expense shalltest the structural element in question If under these test loads the cracks shall develop further thecontractor at his own expense shall dismantle the construction, cart away the debris, replace theconstruction and carry out all consequential work there to at no extra cost.If the cracks are not detrimental to the stability of the construction in the opinion of the Consultant, thecontractor at his own expense shall grout the cracks with pneumatically applied mortar. At his ownexpense and risk he shall also make good all other building works such as plaster, molding, surface finishof floods, roofs, ceiling etc. which in the opinion of the Consultant have suffered damage either inappearance or stability owing to such cracks.The repair work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge. The decisionof the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge as to the extent of the liability of the contractor in the above mattershall be final and binding on the contractor.

333.34 SUPERVISIONAll concreting work shall be done under strict supervision of the qualified and experienced representativesof the Contractor as well as those of the Consultant The contractor’s Engineer and supervisor who are inchargeof concreting work shall be skilled in this class of work and shall personally supervise all theconcreting operations.Special attention shall be paid to the following:-(a)(b)(c)(d)Proportioning, mixing and quality testing of the materials with particular control on the watercement ratio.Laying of material in place and thorough compaction of the concrete to ensure solidity andfreedom from voids and honey combing.Proper curing for the requisite period.Reinforcement and inserts/embodiments position are not disturbed during concreting andconsolidation by vibration.3.35 QUALITY CONTROLThe Consultant/Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to make changes in the mix proportions includingthe increased cement content or/and a change in the Contractor’s control procedure, should the qualitycontrol during progress of the works prove to be inadequate in his opinion.All the concrete work shall be true to level, plumb and square within the acceptable tolerance.corners, edges and rises in all cases shall be unbroken and finished properly and carefully.The3.36 TOLERANCESThe acceptable tolerances for formed concrete surfaces shall be given below: -a) Variation from plumb for -i. Columns and walls to be rendered 6 mm in 3 metersii. Exposed columns and walls 3 mm in 3 metersb) Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the thickness of slabs andwalls: - 6 mm & + 12 mmAll the works executed beyond the tolerance limits are liable to be rejected and no extra cost shall be paidto the contractor for reconstructing the same as desired by the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.3.37 TESTING ROOMA testing room of not less than 10 sqm equipped with the following apparatus and qualified concretetechnician, labour and materials required for carrying out tests therein shall be provided by the contractorat his own cost:1. Sieve Set (For aggregate 20 mm down)40 mm, 20 mm, 16 mm, 12.5 mm, 10 mm, 4.75 mm, 600 micron, 300 micron, and 75 micron havingdiameter of 45 cms.2. Weighinga) Physical balance cap. 200 gms with weigh box (accuracy 0.5 gm)b) Counter Scale cap 20 Kgc) Weights5 kg 1 No 500 gms 1 No.2 kg 2 Nos. 200 gms 1 No.

341 kg 1 No. 100 gms 1 No.3. Slump Cones 2 Nos4. 15 cms moulds 18 no.5. Electric/Kerosene Heater6. pans etc. as directed by the Consultant7. Measuring Cylinders of 1000 ml., 500 ml and 100ml.8. Wash bottles of the Capacity of 500 ml., 2 Nos.9. Sink10. Work benches, shelves, desks and any other furniture and lighting as required by the Consultant.11. Spring balance dial type cap. 100 kg12. Litre measuresa) 10 Lit 1 No.b) 5 Lit 1 No.c) 2 Lit 2 Nosd) 1 Lit 1 No.e) 1/2 Lit 1 No.13. Cube Testing Machine 100 Tons.14. Oven.15. Cores/ Apparatus for conducting Proctor Density Tests.3.38 CO-ORDINATION OF WORKThe contractor is fully responsible for coordinating with the other agencies for sanitary, electrical work,etc. to ensure execution of their work related to commencement of concreting. Nothing extra shall bepayable to the contractor, if the works pertaining to concreting have to be dismantled and redone due tolack of co-ordination on the part of the contractor in ensuring completion of works of such agenciesbefore concreting had been undertaken.4 SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL REINFORCEMENT4.1 GENERAL4.1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section covers the requirements for fabricating, delivering and placing of steel reinforcement inposition for casting all types of concrete work4.1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHEREApplicable Codes and Standards:The codes and standards generally applicable to the work this section is listed in this section.IS: 280IS: 432IS: 456IS: 1139IS: 1566IS: 2502Mild wire for general engineering purposePart I Mild steel and medium tensile steel barsPart II Hard drawn steel wireCode of practice for plain and reinforced concreteHot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and high yield strength steel deformed barsfor concrete reinforcementHard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcementCode of Practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcementThe following clauses are intended to amplify the requirements of the reference documents listed aboveand the contractor/Engineer-in-charge shall comply with these clauses.

354.2 SUBMITALS4.2.1. BAR BENDING SCHEDULEThe Contractor shall prepare Bar Bending Schedule for reinforcement before fabrication4.3 MATERIALS4.3.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENTSteel reinforcement to be procured by the Contractor for works shall be either of the following types:-(a) Mild steel of Grade 1 tested quality conforming to IS: 432-Part(b) 3370 Code of practice for concrete structures for (Part 1 to IV) the storage of liquids(c) High yield strength cold worked deformed steel bars of tested quality conforming to IS: 1786 orhot rolled high tensile deformed steel bars of tested quality conforming to IS: 1139.(d) Hard drawn steel fabric conforming to IS: 1566.(e) Where galvanized reinforcement is specified in the drawings, the bars or mesh shall be hot-dipgalvanized after bending generally in accordance with IS: 2629 and IS: 4759. Galvanizedreinforcement shall be coated with a layer of zinc no where less than 0.05 mm in thickness.All reinforcement shall be stored horizontally above ground level on supports, skids or other approvedsupports, clear of any running or standing water. Contact with soil should be avoided. Proper drainage andprotection from the elements shall be provided to minimize corrosion.Before steel reinforcement is placed in position, the surface of the reinforcement shall be cleaned of rust,dust, grease and other objectionable substances. In order to confirm them self the quality periodical testsas specified as the relevant IS shall be conducted by the contractor at his own cost for the materialsprocured by the Contractor.4.3.2. BINDING WIREBinding wire shall be black annealed steel wire conforming to IS: 280 and of minimum 18 gauge.4.3.3. WELDING ELECTRODESElectrodes used for welding of steel bars shall be of ordinary mild steel grade electrodes conforming to IS:814 and shall be of the best quality approved by Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.4.4 STORAGEReinforcement steel shall be handled and stored in a manner that bending or distortion of the bars isavoided and contamination of steel is preventedAll reinforcement shall be stored horizontally above ground level on supports, skids or other approvedsupports, clear of any running or standing water Contact with soil should be avoided. Proper drainage andprotection from the elements shall be provided to minimize corrosionBars of different classifications and diameters shall be stored separatelyA record shall be kept of the batch numbers of reinforcement deliveries in such a form that the part of theworks in which particular reinforcement is used can be readily identified.Welding electrodes shall be. Stored in moisture control-led environment in accordance with themanufacturer’s recommendations.4.5 FABRICATIONReinforcement steel shall be carefully and accurately cut, bent or formed to the dimensions andconfigurations shown on the drawings and as per bar bending schedules approved by the Consultant /Engineer-in-charge.All reinforcement shall be bent cold using appropriate pin size. Bars may be preheated only on approvalof the Consultant. Quenching shall not cool hot bars. Bends shall be in accordance with IS: 2502.

36It shall be ensured that the bars are not straightened in any manner that will injure the material. Any barsincorrectly bent shall be used only if means for straightening and rebinding be such as not to affectadversely the material. Reinforcement shall not be re-bent or straightened without prior review by theConsultant. No reinforcement shall be placed in position on the works without approval of the Consultant,whether or not it is partially embedded in hardened concrete.Reinforcement steel having a reduced section, visible transverse cracks in bends, or otherwise damaged inanyway shall not be used.Spiral reinforcement shall be accurately fabricated to the diameter and pitch shown on the drawings. Oneand one half finishing turns shall be provided at both top and bottom unless shown otherwise.Cut ends of galvanized rods shall be given a protective coat of an approved zinc paint immediately aftercutting.4.6 LAPPINGAs far as possible bars of maximum length available shall be used. All bars shall be in one length unlessotherwise shown on the drawings or agreed with the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.Laps shown on the drawings or otherwise specified by the Consultant shall be based on the used of bars ofmaximum length by the contractor. In case the Contractor wishes to use shorter bars, laps shall beprovided at the Contractor’s cost in the manner and locations approved by the Consultant /Engineer-incharge.Not more than 1/3 rd of the bars or as specified in the drawings shall be lapped at one section.Reinforcement bars shall not be welded unless shown on the drawings or instructed by the Consultant /Engineer-in-charge.4.7 PLACEMENTAll reinforcement shall be placed accurately and maintained in the position indicated on the drawings.The contractor shall provide approved type of supports for maintaining the bars in position and ensuringrequired spacing and correct cover of concrete to the reinforcement as called for in drawings. Pre-castcement concrete blocks of required shapes and size, MS. chairs and spacers bars shall be used in order toensure accurate positioning of reinforcement. Pre-cast concrete blocks shall be cast well in advance andshall be at least equal in quality to the class of concrete specified in the work.In fair faces of concrete, temporary spacers only shall be used and removed or withdrawn as compactionof concrete proceeds. Spacers will not be permitted to be left in fair faces of concrete.All intersections of the reinforcements shall be securely tied with two strands of binds wire twisted tightto make the skeleton or net work rigid so that the reinforcement is not displaced during placing ofconcrete.Tack welding of crossing bars shall not be done except as authorized or directed by the Consultant /Engineer-in-charge. Nothing extra will be paid for tack welding.The contractor shall take all responsible precautions to ensure that when handling or erectingreinforcement no damage shall be done to finished concrete Bars that are partially embedded in concreteshall not be filed bent partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent unless concurrence has beenobtained from the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge.Walkways and borrow runs for placing and compacting the concrete shall be independent of thereinforcement.Loose binding wire and other extraneous metal shall be removed from inside the form work prior toconcrete placing.

37Without relieving the Contractor of the responsibilities for the correctness thereof, the reinforcement shallbe inspected and approved by the Consultant in writing before any concrete is placed and the contractorshall allow sufficient time for such inspecting and any subsequent remedial action to be carried outNo part of the reinforcement shall be used for conducting electrical currents.4.8 COVER TO REINFORCEMENTUnless shown otherwise on the drawings, minimum cover for all reinforcement shall be provided as perIS: 456 care shall be taken to maintain the correct cover to reinforcement.For concrete members exposed to weather, earth, action of harmful chemicals, acid vapor, salineatmosphere, sulphurous smoke etc minimum cover for reinforcement shall be increased by 15 cm to 40mm as directed by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge.The maximum cover for reinforcement shall not be greater than that specified above or shown on thedrawings plus 10 mm except for bundled bars.For bundled bars, minimum, concrete cover shall be equal to the equivalent diameter of the bundle butneed not be greater than 50 mm.Exposed reinforcement intended for binding with future extensions shall be protected from corrosion asshown in the drawings.4.9 CLEANINGAfter placing, the reinforcement shall be maintained in a clean condition until the concrete is placed. Onno account the bars shall be oiled or painted or mould oil used on the formwork be allowed to come incontact with the bars.Before concreting is commenced, the bars shall be thoroughly cleaned with dry gunny bags if they arecoated lightly with rust or other impurities.4.10 WORK WILL INCLUDEa) All cutting to lengths, labour in bending and cranking, forming hook ends, handling, hoisting andall that is necessary to fix reinforcement in work as per Drawings and specifications This shallalso include all that is fairly intended and is necessary for completion of work.b) Cost of pre-cast concrete cover blocks to maintain cover and holding reinforcement in position,chairs, spaces, dowels, pins, laps, etc.c) For fabricating and fixing reinforcement in any structural member irrespective of its location,dimension and level.d) Work at all levels.e) All the above mentioned works shall be included in the quoted rates Nothing extra shall bepayable to the contractor on this accountf) Reinforcement Steel procurement shall be done by the Contractor.5 SPECIFICATIONS FOR FORMWORK5.1 GENERAL5.1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section covers the requirements for providing, fabricating and erecting of form work includingpropping, bracing, shoring, strutting, rising, bolting, wedging and all other temporary and all othertemporary supports to the concrete during the process of setting subsequent removal of forms.

385.1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHEREa) Cast-in-place Reinforced Concrete5.1.3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDSThe codes and standards generally applicable to the work of this section are listed hereinafterIS:IS:456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.4990 Ply wood for concrete shuttering work.5.2 SUBMITTALS5.2.1 TYPE OF FORM WORKPrior to start of delivery of material for formwork, the contractor shall prepare samples of different typesof formwork for about 10 sqm and obtain approval of the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.5.2.2 DESIGN OF FORMSBefore fabricating of forms, the contractor shall submit design calculations for proposed form work toConsultant/Engineer-in-charge for his approval However, the approval of his responsibility for adequatelyconstructing and maintaining the forms so that they will functions properly.5.2.3 TIE BOLTSIn case the contractor proposes to use tie bolts running through the concrete, the location and size of suchtie bolts shall be submitted to the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge for his Approval.5.3 MATERIALS5.3.1 Formwork shall be timber, plywood, steel or any other material capable of resisting damage to the contactfaces under normal conditions of erecting forms, fixing steel and placing concrete. The selection ofmaterials suitable for formwork shall be made by the Contractor based on the maximum qualityconsistent with the specified finished and safety.5.3.2 TIMBERTimber used for formwork shall be easily workable with nails without splitting. It shall be stable and intoliable to warp when exposed to sun and rain or wetted during concreting.5.3.3 PLYWOOD5.3.4 STEELPlywood used for formwork shall be 12 mm thick shuttering quality plywood complying with IS: 4990and of make approved by the ConsultantSteel form work shall be made of minimum 2 mm thick or more as required black sheets stiffened withangle iron frame made out of M S angles 40 mm X 6mm.5.4 DESIGN CRITERIAFormwork shall be designed for the loads and lateral pressures due to dead weight of concrete,superimposed live loads of workmen, materials and plants and for other loads as indicated on thedrawings.Forms shall be designed to have sufficient strength to carry on the hydrostatic head of concrete as a liquidwithout deflection tolerances exceeding the acceptable limits.

39Where necessary to maintain the tolerances indicated on the drawings. The formwork shall be camberedto compensate for anticipated deflections due to the weight and pressure of the fresh concrete, and alsodue to any other construction loads. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the camber shall be provided asbelow:-Types of memberSimple spanContinuous Restrainedspan Cantilever CantileverCamber in cms WhereK =L =D =5.5 ERECTION OF FORMWORKCompression SteelAs % of tensile steel0%50%0%50%0%50%(K X L X 2.54)/DCamber coefficientLength of member in meterDepth of member in meterCamberCo-efficient0.0660.0370.0320.0200.0860.046Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete during vibration and to shape it to therequired line. The formwork shall conform to shapes, lines, levels and dimensions of the concrete sectionsshown on the drawings.Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration ofconcrete and shall be maintained rigidly in position. Form work shall be adequately supported byadequate number and size of struts, braces, ties and props to ensure rigidity of forms during concreting.Where props rest on natural or filled up ground, to avoid any settlement, the soil shall be thoroughlycompacted and bases of props shall be sufficient size so as to restrict the bearing on the ground to 50 t/sqmForms shall be tight enough to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete and to produce dense,homogenous and uniformly coloured concrete completely free from honeycombing or surface roughness.Joints in formwork shall be designed to prevent leakage, not only between individual elements formingthe panels but also from the horizontal and vertical junction between the panels themselves.If form work is held together by bolts or wires, those shall be so fixed that no reinforcement bar isexposed on surface against which concrete is to be laid. The Consultant may at his discretion allow thecontractor to use tie bolts running through the concrete at his own cost.Hole left in the concrete by these tie-bolts shall be filled as specified by him at the Contractor’s expense.Formwork shall be constructed so as to facilitate loosening and permit removal without jarring theconcrete Wedges, clamps and bolts shall be used wherever practicable instead of nails.All formwork erected shall be approved by the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge before concreting is started.5.6 CLEANING AND OILING OF FORMSAt the time concrete is placed in the forms, the surface of the forms in contact with the concrete shall befree from encrustations of mortar, grout or other foreign materials. Temporary openings shall be left at thebottom of formwork to enable, sawdust, shavings, wire cuttings and other foreign material to be workedout form the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed.The surface of the forms to be in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an approved coating thatwill effectively prevent sticking and will not stain the concrete surfaces. After each use the surfaces offorms in contact with concrete shall be cleaned, well settled and treated with form oil approved by theConsultant Engineer-in-charge. Lubricating (machine) oils shall not be used.

40Oiling shall be done before reinforcement has been placed and care shall be taken that no oil comes incontact with the reinforcement while it is being placed in positions.Immediately before concreting is commenced the formworks shall be carefully examined to see that alldirt, shavings, sawdust and other refuse have been removed and the formwork shall be wetted thoroughlyto prevent absorption of water from concrete. The formwork shall be kept wet during concreting and forthe whole time that it is left in place.5.7 REMOVAL OF FORM WORKForm works shall be removed carefully so as to prevent damage too the concrete. Wooden wedge onlyshall be used between the concrete surface and the form where force is necessary to separate the formfrom the concrete. Metal wedge, bars or tools shall not be used for this purpose. Any concrete damaged inthe process of removing the forms shall be repaired in accordance with the provision of concretespecifications.Unless otherwise permitted by the Consultant, the forms shall not be stripped in less than the minimumperiods specified in IS: 456. However the Consultant may increase the above period if the considers ifnecessary for structural stabilityAll non-supporting forms shall be loosened and removed during regular working hours, and as soon as theconcrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage from the removal of the forms All false work andforms supporting concrete beam and slabs, or other members subject to direct bending stress, shall not beremoved or released until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to ensure structural stability and tocarry both the dead and live loads including any construction loads which may be placed upon it.No construction loads exceeding the combination of superimposed dead load plus specified live load shallbe supported on any unshared portion of the structure under construction, unless analysis indicatesadequate strength to support such additional loadsForm work shall be removed in such a manner so as not to impair safety and serviceability of the structureIt shall be removed gradually to prevent sudden application of loads to the concrete All concrete to beexposed shall have sufficient strength to prevent any damage caused by removal of formwork.5.7.1. HACKING:Immediately after removal of forms, the concrete surface intended to be either plastered or finished, shallbe roughened with brush hammer or with chisel and hammer as directed by the construction manager tomake the surface sufficiently coarse and rough to provide a bonding key for plaster.No extra payments shall be made to the Contractor for such work on concrete surface after removal of theform work.No payment shall be made for temporary formwork used in concreting, or for form work required forjoints or bulk-heads, in floor or elsewhere, whether such joints are to be covered later with concrete ormastic or other materials.5.7.2. POCKETS AND OPENINGS:Where boxes, pockets or openings are required (not exceeding 0.1 sqm) to be formed in the concrete. Nodeduction shall be made for the area of box or pockets in measuring the area of concrete surface shuttered.In other words the area of shuttering shall be reckoned as if box of pocket or openings were not present.However, on measuring the concrete quantity, the volume of the box or pocket shall be deducted. If thearea of box or pocket or openings against the shuttered faces exceeds 0.1 sqm. It shall be paid not as a boxor pocket or opening but as formwork at the rates for formwork.No extra payment shall be made for holes to be made in the form work for inserting electrical conduitshooks for fans etc.

415.8 REUSE OF FORMSImmediately after the forms are removed, they shall be cleaned with jet of water and a soft brush beforethey are reused.The contractor shall not be permitted reuse of any forms which in the opinion of the Consultant has wornout and has become unfit for formwork.The Consultant/Engineer-in-charge may in his absolute discretion, order rejection of any forms heconsiders unfit for use in the works, and order their removal from the site.5.9 FORM WORK FOR SLOPED SURFACESForms for sloped surfaces shall be built so that the formwork can be placed board-by-board immediatelyahead of concrete placement so as to enable ready access for placement, vibration, inspection and repair ofthe concrete.The form work shall also be built so that the boards can be removed one by one from the bottom up assoon as the concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Surfaces of construction jointsand finished surfaces with slopes steeper than 4 horizontal: 1 vertical shall be formed as required herein5.10 FORM WORK FOR CURVED SURFACESThe contractor shall interpolate intermediate sections as necessary and shall construct the forms so that thecurvature will be continuous between sections. Where necessary to meet requirements for curvature, theform lumber shall be built up of laminated splines cut to make tight, smooth form surfaces.After the forms have been constructed, all surface imperfections shall be corrected and all surfacesirregularities at matching faces of form material shall be dressed for the specified curvature.5.11 FORM WORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACESWhere it is desired, directed or shown on the drawings to have original fair finish of concrete surfacewithout any rendering or plastering, formwork shall be carried out by using wood planks, plywood orsteel plates of approved quality and as per direction of the Consultant.The Contractor shall use one type of material for all exposed concrete surfaces and the forms shall beconstructed so as to produce a uniform and consistent texture and pattern on the face of the concrete.Patches on forms for these surfaces will not be permitted. The formwork shall be placed so that allhorizontal formworks are continuous across the entire surface If forms are constructed of lumber and arenot paneled the formwork shall be staggered.To achieve finish which shall be free of board marks, the formwork shall be faced with plywood orequivalent material in large sheets The sheets shall be arranged in an approved pattern. Whereverpossible, joints between sheets shall be arra.To achieve a finish which shall give the rough in appearance of concrete cast against swan boards,formwork boards unless otherwise stated shall be in an average be 150 mm wide, securely jointed withtongued and grooved joints if required to prevent grout loss with tie rod positions and direction of boardscarefully controlled Sawn boards shall be set horizontally, vertically or at an inclination as shown in thedrawings. All bolts holes shall be accurately aligned horizontally and vertically and shall be filled withmatching mortar recessed 5 mm back from the surroundings concrete face.Forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed with grade strips (the underside of whichindicates top of pour) at horizontal construction joints, unless the use of groove strips is specified on thedrawings Such forms shall be removed and reset from lift to lift. Sheathing of reset forms shall betightened against the concrete so that the forms will not spread and permit abrupt irregularities or loss ofmortar Supplementary from ties shall be used as necessary to hold the reset forms tight against theconcrete.

42For fair faced concrete, the position of through bolts will be restricted and generally indicated in thedrawings.Chamfer strips shall be paced in the corners of forms for exposed exterior corners so as to produce 20 mmbeveled edges except where otherwise shown in the drawings. Interior corners an edges at formed jointsshall not be beveled unless shown on the drawings. Mouldings for grooves, drip courses and bands shallbe made in the form itself.The wood planks, plywood and steel plates used in formwork for obtaining exposed surfaces shall not beused for more than 3 times in case of wood planks, 6 times for plywoods and 10 times for steel platesrespectively. However no forms will be allowed for reuse, if in the opinion of the Consultant/Engineer-inchargeit is doubtful to produce desired texture or irregularities of exposed concrete.In order to obtain exposed concrete work of uniform color it shall be necessary to ensure that the sandused for all exposed concrete work shall be of approved uniform color. Moreover the cement used in theconcrete for any complete element shall be from single consignment.No exposed concrete surface shall be rendered or painted with cement or otherwise. Plastering ofdefective concrete as a means of achieving the required finish shall not be permitted, except in the case ofminor porosity on the surface, the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge may allow a surface treatment byrubbing down with cement and sand mortar of the same richness and color as for the concrete. Thistreatment shall be made immediately after removing the formwork.The contractor shall also take all precautionary measures to prevent breaking and chipping of corners andedges of completed work until the building is handed over.6 SPECIFICATIONS FOR BRICK MASONRY WORK:-6.1 SCOPE:-The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials, scaffolding operations, equipment and incidentalsnecessary required for the completion of all brickwork called for in the drawings and documents and thatwhich is fairly intended for smooth completion of the work.6.1.1 BRICKS (CLASS 50):-The bricks shall be well burnt locally available from good brick earth and shall be of uniform size (9” x4.5” x 3”) unless otherwise specified They shall be of uniform deep red, cherry or copper colour,thoroughly well burnt without being verified and regular in shapes.6.1.3 MORTARS:-All brick work shall laid with specified mortar of good workable consistency.6.1.4 SOAKING OF BRICKS:-All bricks required for masonry in cement or composite lime mortars shall be thoroughly soaked in cleanwater for at least one hour in advance of sufficient size immediately before use. The cessation of bubbleswhen the bricks are immersed in water is an indication of thorough soaking of bricks.6.1.5 LAYING:-a) Bricks shall be laid in English bond, unless otherwise specified. Half or cut bricks shall not be used exceptwhere necessary to complete the bond. Closers in such cases shall be cut to the required size and usednear the ends of the walls.b) The walls shall be taken up truly plumb. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical jointsjoin shall be truly vertical. Vertical joints in alternate courses shall come directly one over the other. Thethickness of brick courses shall be kept uniform and for this purpose straight edge with graduations

43showing the thickness of each brick course including joint shall be used. Bricks shall be laid with frogsupwards.c) The walls of a structure shall be carried up regularly and nearly at one level and no portion of the workshall be left more than 3 ft. below the rest of the work. Where this is not possible the work shall be rakedback according to bond (and not left toothed) at an angle not exceeding 45°.d) All iron fixtures pipes, outlets of water, holdfasts of doors and windows, etc., which are required to bebuilt in walls, shall be embedded in cement mortar or in cement concrete as specified, in their correctpositions as the work proceeds. Nothing extra shall be paid for such extra cement mortar or of the naturestated above.6.1.6. JOINTS:-Bricks shall be so laid that all joints are quite full of mortar. The thickness of the bed joints shall in nocase exceed 3/8”, unless otherwise specified. The face of joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 0.5”by raking tool daily during the progress of work when the mortar is still green, so as to provide proper keyfor the plaster or pointing to be done. Where plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the jointsshall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. The face of brick work shall be cleaned daily andall mortar droppings removed6.1.7 BRICK-IN-EDGE COPINGThe top course of all plinths, parapets, steps and tops of walls below R C.C. slabs or beams shall be laidwith brick on edge, unless otherwise specified Proper care shall be taken that the bricks forming the topcorners and ends of walls shall be properly radiate and keyed in to position.6.1.8. CURING:-Green Work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering Brick Masonry with cement or compositemortar shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of 7 (Seven) days. In case of fatlime mortar, curing shall commence two days after the laying of masonry and shall continue for 7 (seven)days6.1.9 SCAFFOLDING:Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided The supports shall be sound andstrong Tied together with horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding planks shall be fixed. In buildingup to two stories, single scaffolding shall be allowed In this case, the inner end of the horizontalscaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided in the header course only. Only one header or each pole shallbe left out. The holds left in masonry work for supporting the scaffoldings shall be filled and made good,before plastering. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining sufficiently strongscaffolding so as to withstand all loads likely to come upon it.6.2 HALF BRICK AND THREE INCH THICK MASONRY:-6.2.1. The work shall be done exactly similar to the specification ‘BRICK WORK’ except that all courses shallbe laid with stretchers.6.2.2 Cement Mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 sand) shall be used unless otherwise specified in the description of theitem.6.2.3 The description of the item shall mention whether or not, reinforcement is to be provided, when the brickwork is to be reinforced, hoop iron band 1” x 1/16” (2.5 c.m. x 1.6. mm) shall be embedded in the cementmortar at every fourth course or as described in the description of the item. The hoop iron shall be hooked(given a doubel lap) with minimum of 9” hooks at all angles and junctions. At either end of the wall, 2” (5c.m.) lengths of the hoops shall be bent up or down so as to take a firm grip of the brick work. When hoopiron is not available. The Consultant may allow equivalent reinforcement in the form of mild steel.

446.3 RUBBLE MASONRY:-6.3.1. MATERIAL:-The stones to be used for the masonry shall be hard, sound, free from cracks, flaws etc., and shall be fromapproved quarries. They shall generally be freshly quarried with sharp edges and worn clean face. Theyshall be free from rounded, or weathered surfaces or skin or costing which prevents the adherence ofmortar. Size & shape of stone shall be as per the requirement.The stones to be used as headers, quoins, copings etc., shall comply with the requirements of facing andhearted as may be relevant and shall further comply with the facing stones shall be selected from the massof quarry stones for their greater size, goods beds, close grain and uniform colour. The beds and jointsshall have an average bearing of not less than 2 cm. The quoins shall be of selected stone and shallnormally be 10 cm. x 24 cm. x 39 cm. or as directed by Engineer-m-charge The faces of quoins shall berough tooled with 40 mm. chisel drafts at the corner edges. The beds and tops shall be dressed square tothe face and rough tooled to 10 cm from the face and vertical joints similarly dressed to 4 cm. from theface In the embedded portion the length of side shall not be less than that of exposed side apposite bymore than 8 cm for the longer side and 60 m for the shorter side.One through stone shall be provided per half sq m. of facing evenly distributed in a staggered pattern.They shall be about 0 03 sq m in face area and shall have a tailing of the full width of the masonry whenthe width of the masonry is 60 cm or less If the wall or masonry be over 60 cm. thick a line of headersoverlapping each other be atleast 15 cm. shall be laid right through wall a face to back The length of theinterior headers shall not be less than 45 cm & their average cross section area shall not be less than 0.025sqm. Face header shall be distinctly marked on its face.6.3.2 MORTAR:-Unless otherwise mentioned the mortar for masonry work shall be composed of 1 part of cement and 5parts of coarse approved sand The sand for mortar shall be as per I S, 2116-19656.3.3 SCAFFOLDING:-It shall be single or double as is warranted for the particular work Put log holes shall be made good bybricks to match the face work when put logs are removed after ensuring that the holes behind are solidlyfilled with 1:4:8 cement concretes.6.3.4 CONSTRUCTION:-The masonry shall be laid to lines, levels, curve and shape as shown on the drawings, fixtures, plugs,brames, pipes conducts etc., if any shall be built in at places when on the plans which laying the masonryand not later by removing the stones already laid.I. Stones in the hearting shall be laid on their broadest face which gives better opportunity to fill the spacebetween tones.II.Stratified stones must be laid on their natural beds. All bed joints shall be normal to the pressure uponthem.III.In battered walls, the beds of stone & the plane of course should be at right angles to the better.IV.If masonry is to be laid directly on excavated bed or concrete footing, the bed shall be cleared or all loosematerials, cleaned and wetted just before laying masonry. Bushings shall not project more than 40mm., infaces where joints are to be pointed or struck and 12 mm. in faces proposed to be plastered. Quoins in theunexposed portions shall have the same facing as the rubble stones and shall have uniform chisel drafts of40 mm. in the exposed portions and up to 15 cm. below the finished ground level, quoins shall be roughtolled with 40 mm. chisel drafts at the corner edges.V. The face stones shall be laid without any pinning on the exposed faces. In each course the headers or linesof headers as the case may be, shall kept in position as specified intervals and with specified laps wheresuch laps are required before the masonry of the layer is commenced to ensure that they are being laidproperly and in required numbers and intervals. They shall be embedded in mortar as masonry in that

45VI.VII.VIIIIX.layer progress. Quoins shall be laid stretcher and header wise as seen on each face and shall correspond tothe arrangement of quoins in the same course.The stones shall be wetted before laying in mortar. Each masonry shall be supplied by the contractor witha vessel full of water and tumbler for wetting stones, care being taken not to spill any water on greenmasonry The bed which is to receive the stone shall be cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer freshmortar. All stone shall be laid full in mortar both in bed and vertical joints and settled carefully in placewith a wooden mallet immediately on placement and solidly bedded in mortar before it is. Clean dips andspalls carefully selected to fit in the spaces shall be wedged in to mortar joints and beds wherevernecessary to avoid thick beds or joints and beds necessary to avoid thick beds or joints of mortar Whenthe foundation masonry is laid directly on rock, the face stones of the first course shall be dressed to fitinto the rock snugly when pressed down in the mortar bedding over the rock. No dry or hollow space shallbe left anywhere in the masonry and each stone shall have all the embedded faces completely coveredwith mortar If a portion of masonry is dismantled, every stone must be found with mortar adhering fast toall its embedded surface and there shall be no hollows. This will be one of the tests in deciding if themasonry is good or bed, if need arises, where hollows or other defects are suspected a stone here or theremay be removed for confirmation. If these are confirmed such portions shall be dismantled and rebuilt atthe cost of the contractor.Face work and heating shall be brought up evently but the top of each course shall not be leveled up byuse of flat chips.No face joints shall exceed 16 mm and the same shall be struck while mortar is freshThe face joints should be properly struck while the mortar is fresh When no pointing or is to be done. Butif plastering or pointing is required to be done then joint shall be raked out when mortar is fresh.X. Stones in corners of walls and angles which are to be plastered shall be rounded. The corners shall also berounded in plaster while plastering. The frames of doors, windows, cupboards, etc., shall be housed in tothe masonry while laying the masonry only. Chisel dressing for the width of door and window frame shallbe done to obtain good fit between the frame and masonry.XI.XII.XIII.XIV.Jambs shall be made up of quoins only. Where shown to other than square, the jambs shall be splayed toconform to the drawings or the instructions of Engineer-in-charge and shall be true to the templates.Quoins of the full thickness of the wall shall be provided at the rate of 3 for each side of the door openingand 2 for each side of the window opening when the wall is 40 cm. thick or make up full thickness of thewall with break of joint of not less than 8 cm. with stones above and below.Holes of the required size and shape shall be left in the masonry during construction for fixing pipes,service lines, passage of water etc., and extra hollows loft shall be filled with 1 : 3 cement mortar of 1 : 3 :6 cement concrete and the face shall be finished with matching stones.The top of masonry on which coping, R.C.C. slab or other flooring is to be laid shall be finished level orthe required slope with stones and mortar to give an even bearing. Bed blocks of stone or R.C.C. shall bebuilt-up in the masonry under the beams.The rate of raising uncoursed rubble masonry brought up in uniform levels may be limited to a height of69 cm. per day in case of cement mortar and 45 cm. in case of lime mortar.AII masonry work shall be kept well watered for 14 days after laying.7. SPECIFICATION FOR DOORS & WINDOWS (WOOD WORK)7.1 MATERIAL7.1.1 TIMBER7.1.1.1 TEAK WOODTeakwood shall be second class Indian Teakwood conforming to IS: 4021 of good quality, well seasonedand free from defects such as cracks, dead knots, sapwood etc. No individual and sound knot shall bemore than 15 sq.cm in size and the aggregate area of such knots shall not exceed 2% of the areas of thepiece. The timber shall be fairly close grained having not less than 2 growth rings per cm. Width in cross– section.

467.1.1.2 Hard Wood:Hard wood shall be first class conforming to IS 4021 of good quality, well seasoned and free from defectssuch as dead knots, cracks, sapwood etc. No individual hard and sound knot shall exceed 6 sq.cm in sizewith no dimension more than 50 mm and the aggregate area of such knots shall not be more than 1% ofthe area of the piece. There shall not be less than 5 growth rings per cm. Width in cross-section.7.1.1.3 Moisture content in timberThe maximum permissible percentage of moisture content for well seasoned timber shall be as per IS 287.7.1.1.4 Workmanship of wood workWorkmanship for wood and joinery shall be as per IS 1200 and IS 4021.7.1.1.5 Painting / Polishing of wood workPainting / polishing of wood work shall be in accordance with clause Nos. of specification No.6.9.2 to6.11.3.7.2 WOODEN DOOR / WINDOW FRAMEWooden door / window frame shall be made of specified wood as per item description and shall be inaccordance with detailed drawings.The wooden members of the frame shall be planed smooth and accurate to the full dimensions. Rebats,rounding, moulding etc., shall be done before the members are jointed into frames.Joints in the frame work shall be perfect with square edges and shall be pinned with hard wood / bamboopins of 10 to 15 mm dia.Wood work shall be painted / polished or otherwise treated as specified. All exposed portions shall becoated with wood primer and concealed surface by bituminous paints as per clause No. 6Before any surface treatment is applied, the wood work shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-charge.The frames shall be fixed only after acceptance by the Engineer-in-charge. The frames shall be fixed tothe masonry by 300 mm x 25 mm x 6mm MS hold fasts embedded in M-15 grade concrete block of 350mm x 100mm x 100 mm in the hole of the masonry. In case of concrete, frames shall be fixed by 96mmlong 12 mm dia metallic dash fasteners.7.3 SHUTTERS:7.3.1. Particle Board flush shutter:Particle board flush shutter shall in general conform to IS: 22027.3.1.1 Materials7.3.1.1.1 Particle BoardParticle board shall conform to IS 3097 and shall be three layer flat pressed teak wood based andof exterior grade (Grade –1), type – 1, BWP type, bonded with phenol Formaldehyde syntheticresin conforming to IS: 848.7.3.1.1.2 VeneersVeneers shall conform to class – 1 of IS 303 and (BS 476 Part – 7)7.3.1.1.3 Teak woodSpecification of Teak wood shall same as specified in clause 9.1.1.17.3.1.1.4 Hinges

477.3.1.2 WorkmanshipHinges shall be of brass and butt type conforming to IS: 205. Size of hinges shall be inaccordance with shutter width and as per IS: 205.The particle board of required size and thickness shall be lipped on all the edges with T-type,teak wood lipping. The overall board lipping composition shall be uniform and specifiedthickness and shall be properly sized in view of the operation of shutter.All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warpin its plane. In case of double leaf shutters, the meeting of the stiles shall be rebated by one thirdthe thickness of shutter. The rebating shall be splayed.The shutter then shall be veneered on both faces by gluing approved shade and texturedcommercial type 0.5 mm thick veneering conforming to class 1 of IS 303.The veneering shall be done by gluing the veneer with BWP type, phenol formal dehydesynthetic resin conforming to IS 848 by not press process on the shutter. Workmanship and finishof the veneering shall conform to IS 303.The exposed surfaces of the lipping of the edges, shall be french polished in accordance withclause No. 6.9.2.4.2 of specification No.6.The shutter shall be fixed to the door frame, by means of hinges @ minimum 3 hinges per leaf,maximum spacing of hinges being 600 mm or as per drawing with suitable sized screws.The shutter when fitted to the frame shall satisfy all operational aspects of the door like smoothmovement, proper closing against the door frame etc.7.3.2 Glazed Wooden Door shutter7.3.2.1 Materials7.3.2.1.1 WoodTeakwood for various members like stiles, rails etc., shall be as specified in clause No.9.1.1.1.7.3.2.1.1 GLAZINGGlass sheets for glazing shall bei. 4 mm thick plain glass (wt. 7.2 kg/m2) conforming IS : 2835, orii. 5.5 mm thick wired glass conforming to IS: 5437 oriii. 6.3 mm thick laminated glass conforming to IS: 2553 as case may be as per item description oriv. 5.5 mm thick toughened glass.Glass sheets shall be free from flaws, scratches, cracks, bubbles etc.7.3.2.1.3 WORKMANSHIPTeakwood stiles and rails of size as specified in item description shall be cut accurately and plannedsmoothly to required dimensions as per drawings. The stiles and rails shall be provided with rebates forfixing the glazing and shall be jointed together to form the profile of the shutter as per drawings. Thejoinery work shall be as approved by Engineer-in-charge. Only after such approval, the joints shall becoated with white lead, pressed and secured by hardwood pins of about 6 mm dia. All the four edges ofthe shutter shall be square. In case of double leaf doors, rebates shall be provided at the meeting of stiles.Rebates shall be splayed type and one third the thickness of the stiles.

48The glass sheets for glazing shall be fixed by teak wood beading having mitred joints as per drawings andshall be fixed by means of approved neoprene based adhesive and nailing, the spacing between the nailsbeing no more than 300 mm.All wooden surfaces shall be coated with 2 coats of approved make polyurethane with stainer mixed toachieve desired shade.The shutter shall be fixed to the door frame, by means of hinge @ minimum 3 hinges per leaf, maximumspacing of hinges being 600 mm or as per drawing with suitable sized screws.The shutter when fitted to the frame shall satisfy all operational aspects of the door like smoothmovement, proper closing against the door frame etc.7.4 SPECIFICAITON FOR STEEL / ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS & VENTILATORS7.4.1 Steel windows & VentilatorsSteel windows, ventilators shall in general conform to IS 1081, IS 1038, IS 7452.7.4.2 Materials7.4.2.1 Rolled Steel SectionsRolled steel sections for the fabrication of steel windows, ventilators shall conform to IS 7452.7.4.2.2 Glass panesGlass panes for glazing purpose shall be as specified in item description. All glass panes shall haveproperly squared corners and straight edges. Glass panes shall be of following types in accordance withitem description.i. 4mm thick transparent sheet glass conforming to IS 2835 (wt. 7.2 kg / m)ii. 5.5 mm thick wired glass conforming to IS 5437.iii. 6.3 mm thick laminated safety glass conforming to IS 2553.7.4.2.3 WorkmanshipThe profile and type of windows, Ventilators (glazed, partly glazed / louvered, side hung / top hung /fixed shutter, composite) shall be as per drawings.The frames shall be constructed of sections cut of size and mitred. Corners shall be welded to form afused welded joint. Process of welding shall be flash butt welding. The welded joints shall be grinded tosquare and flat edges.Where larger units are to be formed by coupling individual units, the mullions, transforms shall be beddedin mastic to ensure weather tightness. Mastic shall be applied liberally to the channels of the outside framesections before assembly, and the two units being coupled shall be drawn together tight with clamps, themastic being squeezed out and cut off neatly when the units shall be screwed together tight.Where fixed glazing units are placed over openable units a push fit weather bar shall be provided.Before glazing, all opening parts shall be checked for their operational smoothness. The frame shall becompletely cleaned and bedding putty shall be placed in the rebate before glazing. Glass then shall becushioned into the bedding and shall be fronted with front putty in a manner so as to enable the painting tobe done upto the sight line. The back putty oozing out over the glazing rebate shall be cut off square andsmoothed down.For panes exceeding 600 x 300mm in size, glass shall be secured by special glazing clips inserted in holesalready provided in the steel sections, before applying the front putty.

49For glazing of very large areas, rust proof steel beading with mitres corners shall be provided with screws@ 10 cm. from each corner and @ 20 cm, apart from each other. Putty shall be provided to the face of thebead in contact with glass, in addition to back putty.Side hung shutters shall be connected to the frame by means of friction hinges. The handle for side hungshutters shall be of pressed brass mounted on a steel handle plate welded to the opening shutter frame andshall not be removable easily after glazing. The handle shall have a two point nose which shall engagewith a brass striking plate on the fixed frame in a slightly open as well as in a fixed position.Top hung shutters shall be provided with steel butt hinges welded to the fixed frame after cutting a slot init. Top hung casements shall be provided with peg stay of 3 holes of pressed brass, 300 mm long whichwhen closed shall be held tightly by the locking bracket fitted to the fixed frame or to the window.Before fixing the frames, the size of the opening shall first be checked and cleaned of all obstructions. Thepositions of the unit in the reveal shall be taken off the drawings and shall be marked on the reveal at thejambs using a plumb line. In case of fixing with masonry, holes for fixing the lugs / hold fasts shall be cutat required locations. In case of concrete or stone, the frames shall be fixed by means of dash fastners. Incase of masonry, the lugs shall grouted in the holed with cement concrete, M-15 Grade when fixing tosteel work, mastic shall be applied to the sill of the opening and the unit shall be placed on it with the jamsand head buttered with mastic and the unit shall be fixed with special fixing clips or with nuts and bolts.The windows / ventilators shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and plumb.All the steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned free of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil etc., by sand and shortblasting and then finished with painting by priming with red oxide zinc chromate primer confirming to IS2074 and painting conforming to IS 1477 (Part II) or by hot dipped galvanizing conforming to IS 1477Part (I). Putty shall also be provided with painting in a manner so as to seal the putty glass junction.Surface not meant for painting shall be cleaned of any strains of paint.7.5 Aluminium Glazed Doors / Windows / Ventilators7.5.1 GeneralAluminium glazed doors / windows / ventilators shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profileas per drawings.7.5.2 MaterialsAll Aluminium sections shall be extruded sections of INDAL aluminium alloy as per IS:733 and IS:1285.Aluminium sections shall be anodized as per IS: 7088 to min, 25 microns.Glass used for glazing shall be of following type in accordance with item description.i. 5.5 mm thick wired glass conforming to IS 5437.ii. 6.3 mm thick laminated safety glass conforming to IS 2553.iii. 5.5 mm thick transparent sheet glass conforming to IS: 2853 (Wt. 7.2 kg/sq.m).7.5.3 WorkmanshipFrames shall be square and flat, the corner of the frame being fabricated to true right angles. Details ofconstruction of frames, shutters etc., shall be as per drawings.Side hung window shutters shall either be fixed to the frame with pivots, or aluminium alloy hinges. Forfixing the hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frames and the hinges inserted inside may be riveted to theframe. The hinges shall normally be of the projecting type conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS –617, IS 733. In which case peg stay of 300 mm long complete with locking bracket and conforming to IScodes same as for hinges shall be provided. Friction hinges may also be provided in which case peg staysare not required.The handles for side hung shutters shall be of cast aluminium conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS617 and shall be mounted on a handle plate riveted to the opening frames. The handle shall have anodized

50finish with minimum anodic film thickness of 25 micron of Electro colour finish. The handle shall have atwo point nose which shall engage with an aluminium striking plate on the fixed frame. The striking plateshall be finished in the same manner as for the handle.In case of top hung shutters, aluminium alloy cast hinges and peg stays (same as per side hung shutters)shall be provided.Center hung shutters shall be hung on the two pairs of cup pivots of aluminium alloy of IS designation NS– 4 of IS 737 and IS designation A-5-M of IS 617 or chromium / cadmium plated brass / bronze cuppivots riveted to the outer and inner frames to permit to swing through an angle of 850. Cast aluminium(conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS 617) or chromium / cadmium plated bronze spring catchesshall be fitted in the centre of the top bar of the shutter. The spring catch shall be secured to the frame byscrewing / riveting to the frame and shall close into and aluminium catch plate riveted / welded to theoutside of the outer shutter frame bar. Aluminium or cadmium plated brass chord pulley wheel in analuminium bracket shall be fitted at the sill of the shutter with Aluminium or galvanized / cadmium platedsteel screws.The door shutters shall be fitted with pivots as specified. The handle for doors shall be of aluminium andas per design. The door shutters shall be provided with locking device, floor spring, O/H door closer andany other hardwares, specified in item.In case of composite Door / window / ventilator units shall be coupled as per drawing. Weather bar shallbe provided whenever a coupling member is fitted over an external opening shutter.Glazing shall be fixed to the extruded sections by means of extruded aluminium beading. Glass panesshall be provided with rubber lining before fixing.The aluminium frames shall be fixed to the masonry by means of aluminium lugs fixed to the frame (bycounter sunk galvanized machine screws) and grouted with M-15 grade concrete in the hole in themasonry as per drawing. In case of concrete wall, the frames shall be fixed by 96 mm long, 12 mm diametallic dash fastners. Any steel material coming in contact with aluminium shall be galvanized.The windows / ventilators / doors shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and plumb.8. SPECIFICATION FOR FLOORING & PAVING8.1 SCOPEThe Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, machinery operations and relateditems necessary and required for the full performance of the contract under this section, as shown on thedrawings or as specified or reasonably implied or incidental to the construction.8.2 GENERALThe flooring shall be laid to the level except where slopes are called for on the drawings, in which casethe slopes shall be uniform and arranged to drain into the indicated outlets. Particular care shall beexercised to ensure that all flooring, skirting etc., is perfectly matched for color and finish. The Contractorshall pave the areas indicated on the plans and schedule of finishes with materials therein called for. Allwork shall be laid to the best practice known to the trade.The Contractor shall furnish for approval by the Consultant, samples of each type of floor, paving etc., thesamples shall be of sizes and thickness as specified.8.3 DELETED8.4 POLISHED GRANITE STONE SLABS FOR FLOORING, STEPS, STAIRS, CLADDING ONPANTRY AND WASH BASIN COUNTERS

51Providing & fixing granite of approved quality and colour of required size mm double polished M/C cutof 20mm thick over floor surface in proper line. Level in CM 1:4 including finishing the joint withmatching colour cement, polishing the top surface etc., complete as per instruction of EIC/ Consultant.Granite stone shall be of best quality machine polished, Machine Cut and of approved colour, dense andhomogenous in texture free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. The stone shall be of required sizeand shall be 20 mm thick. The material shall have to be approved by Consultant before and afterprocurement. Before laying flooring, the surface shall be paved and thoroughly hacked, cleaned off allmortar scales, loose materials etc., unless and until the surface is approved by Consultant / Engineer-incharge,the laying shall not be done. The bedding with CM 1:4 proportion as directed by Consultant /Engineer-in-charge with minimum thickness of 30 mm layer shall be laid evenly and to the required slope.The granite shall be truly and evenly set in thin paste of next cement apply to the bottom and to theprepared base. The stone then shall be temped down with wooden mallet until they are exactly in trueplane and in line with adjacent stone.The stone shall be closed jointed and filled with matching cement. The entire surface of flooring shall bepolished with machine upto to mirror polish achieved including necessary use of antimony trioxideanxilix acid etc., as directed by Consultant / Engineer-in-charge.8.4.1 FINISHINGThe finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the cessation of beating. The surface shall beleft for sometime, till moisture gets dried from its joints or top, Excessive trowel ling shall be avoided.Use of dry cement or cement and sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorbexcessive moisture, shall not be permitted.8.4.2 CURINGThe curing shall be done for a minimum period of ten days. Curing shall not be commenced until the toplayer has hardened. Covering with empty cement gunnies shall be avoided as the color is likely to bebleached with the remanents of cement matter from the bags.9. DELETED10 CERAMIC TILES GLAZED AND MATT FINISHCeramic tiles in toilets and other areas where called for shall be non-slip ceramic tiles of approved makeand shade. The tiles shall be laid to the pattern as approved by the Consultant. The tiles shall be ofuniform color, true to size and shape and free from cracks, twists, uneven edges, crazing and otherdefects. The size and thickness of the tiles shall be as specified.The tiles shall be laid as per the pattern shown in the drawings over a bed of specified thickness of cementmortar leveled to a true surface. The surface of the bedding mortar shall be left rough to provide bond forthe tiles. A floating coat of thick cement slurry shall be laid over the screed to proper levels and the tilesset over the same firmly to correct line and levels.The joints shall be filled and finished neat with cement paste pigmented to the shade of the tile. The jointsshall be finished neat as directed and shall be straight, regular and uniform.On completion, the surface shall be washed with water, rubbed with fine saw dust and left clean.The finished floor surface shall be true to required levels.10.1 VTRIFIED TILES IN FLOORING AND SKIRTING10.1.1. VITRIFIED TILES

52The tiles shall generally conform to latest IS standards shall be procured by the contractor. They shall beflat, true to shape and free from cracks, crazing spots, chipped edges and corners. The glazing shall be ofuniform shade and color shall be as shown in the drawings.The tiles shall be of specified size and thickness as per drawing. The tolerance on facial dimension valueshall be +/- 1.0mm and +/- 0.5 mm in thickness.The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. The glazed shall be either glossy or matt as specified. Theunderside of the tiles shall be completely free glazed in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base.Type edges of the tiles shall be preferably free form glaze, however, and glazed if unavoidable, shall bepermissible on any one edge of the tile.10.1.2. LAYINGThe Vitrified tiles shall be laid over ferrow cement slab & it shall be cleaned, wetted Mortar of specifiedmix shall be spread to required thickness over a small area. The slab, washed clean, shall be laid on themortar, pissed tapped, with a wooden mallet, and brought to required level The tiles shall be laid as perthe pattern shown on the drawings or as approved by Consultant / Engineer-in-charge.It shall then be removed and laid a side. The top of the mortar shall then by corrected by adding freshmortar at hollows. The mortar is then allowed to harden and cement slurry of paste like consistency shallbe spread over the same at the rate of 1 bag per sq mt. area. The edges of the tile already laid shall bebuttered with slurry of cement and pigment to match the shade of slabs. The tile to be laid shall then beplaced back in position, pressed and properly bedded in level with adjoining tiles with as fine a joint aspossible. Other tiles are also laid in similar manner to correct levels with fine joints. The surplus slurry onthe surface shall be cleaned off.The tiles shall be soaked in water, washed clean, and a coat of cement slurry applied liberally at the backof tiles and set in the bedding mortar. The tiles shall be tamped and corrected to proper plans and lines.The tiles shall be set in required pattern and butt jointed. The joints shall be as fine as possible. Where fullsize tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut to the required size and their edges rubbed smooth.10.1.3 CURING AND FINISHINGThe joints shall be cleaned off of the grey cement grout with soft wire brush or trowel to a depth of 2mmto 3mm and all dust and loose mortar removed Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement addedwith pigment if required to match the color of tiles. The surface shall then be kept wet for 7 days.After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished work shall not sound hollowwhen tapped with wooden mallet.11 WATER-PROOFING FOR ROOFThe waterproofing shall be integral cement based water proofing treatmentincluding preparation of surface as required for treatment of roofs, balconies,terraces etc. consisting of following operations:a) Applying and grouting a slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75 kg/sqm.of cement admixed with proprietary water proofing compoundconforming to IS : 2645 over the RCC slab including cleaning the surfacebefore treatment.b) Laying cement concrete using broken bricks/brick bats 25mm to 100mmsize with 50% of cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) admixedwith proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 over20mm thick layer of cement mortar of mix 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand)

53admixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645to required slope and treating similarly the adjoining walls upto 300mmheight including rounding of junctions of walls and slabs.c) After two days of proper curing applying a second coat of cement slurryadmixed with proprietary water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645.d) Finishing the surface with 20mm thick jointless cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1cement: 4 coarse sand) admixed with proprietary water proofing compoundconforming to IS: 2645 and finally finishing the surface with trowel with neatcement slurry and making of 300 x 300mm square.e) The whole terrace so finished shall be flooded with water for aminimum period of two weeks for curing and for final test. All above operationsto be done in order and as directed and specified by the Engineer-in-Charge.With average thickness of 120mm & minimum thickness at khurra as 65mm.11.1 GUARANTEEThe treatment shall carry a guarantee for 10 years against leakage of water, dampness, seating and otherdefects. The treated roof shall be tested by allowing water to stand on the areas to a depth of 150 mm forat least 72 hours.All guarantee shall be furnished in the format approved by the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge duly signedby the contractor and sub contractor.11.2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CURINGThe finished surface shall be cured for at least 7 days11.3 KHURRASThe Khurras shall be constructed before the brick masonry work in parapet wall is taken up, and it shallbe 45 cm x 45 cm and shall be formed of cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stoneaggregate 20 mm nominal size) unless otherwise specified in the drawings.11.4 LAYINGA PVC sheet 1M X 1M X 400 micron shall be laid under the khurras and then cement concrete shall belaid over it to a minimum thickness of 3 cm with its top surface lower than the level of adjoining roofsurface as approved.11.5 FINISHINGThe khurras and sides of the outlet shall then be rendered with cement plaster of mix and thicknessstipulated in the drawings. This shall be done when the concrete is still green and shall be finished with afloating coat of neat cement The sides of the khurras and sizes of finished outlet opening shall be asdirected by the Consultant.12 SPECIFICATION FOR PLASTERING WORK12.1 SCOPEThe Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials scaffolding, equipment, tools, plants and incidentalsnecessary and required for the completion of all plaster work.12.2 GENERAL

54Plaster as herein specified shall be applied to all internal surface where called for All plaster work shall beexecuted by skilled workmen in a workman like manner and shall be of the best workmanship and in strictaccordance with the dimensions on drawings subject to the approval of the Consultant/Engineer-incharge.The primary requirement of plaster work shall be to provide dense, smooth and hard enclosure and devoidof any cracks of the interior and/or exterior.12.3 SCAFFOLDINGDouble scaffolding having two seats of vertical supports shall be provided The supports shall be soundand strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. Thecontractor shall get the scaffolding approved from the Consultant well in advance.12.4 CHASING AND BREAKAGEFixing of door and window frame, shall be completed before any plaster work is commenced on a surface.No chasing or cutting of plaster shall be permitted normally. However, If the same is felt unavoidable atplaces, written permission shall be obtained from the Consultant before cutting any such plaster. Brokencorners shall be obtained from the Consultant before cutting any such plaster, Broken corners shall be cutback out less than 150 mm on sides and patched with cement mortar as directed. All corners shall berounded to a radius of 80 mm or as directed by the Consultant.12.5 PREPARATIONMasonry and concrete surfaces which call for application of plaster shall be clean, free from dust andloose mortar. Efflorescence if any shall be removed by brushing and scrapping. For masonry surfaces thejoints shall be raked out properly, while the concrete surfaces shall be roughed by wire brushing andhacking to provide the key, thereby ensuring proper bond to the satisfaction of the Consultant. The surfaceshall then be thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before plastering is commenced.12.6 CHICKEN WIRE MESHGalvanized chicken mesh (22 gauge, 12 mm size) shall be provided at junctions of brick masonry andconcrete members, to be plastered and other locations as called for, properly stretched and nailed withgalvanized wire nails, ensuring equal thickness of plaster on both sides of the mesh. The width of themesh shall be as approved by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge. The chicken mesh wherever. Specified,shall be fixed in place before plastering.12.7 Samples of each type of plaster shall be prepared well in advance of undertaking the work for theapproval of the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge12.8 MORTARThe mortar of the specified mix shall be used Mortar shall be prepared as specified under” Brick Work”.It shall be made in small quantities, as required, and applied within 15 minutes of adding water to theplaster mix12.8.1 CEMENT:Cement shall be as per specifications under “Concrete Work”12.8.2 WATER:12.8.3 SANDWater shall be as per specifications under “Concrete Work”For plaster work normally clean fine river sand shall be used. However, if specified in the drawing orschedule of finishes, coarse sand conforming to the specifications under Concrete work” shall be mixedwith fine river sand in proportion specified or directed by the Consultant.

5512.8.4 WATER PROOFING COMPOUNDFOSROC, ROFFE Chemicals or approved equivalent as approved by Consultant / Engineer-in-chargewherever specified.12.9. CEILING PLASTER6mm thick Ceiling plaster shall be completed before commencement of wall plaster.Plastering shall be started from the top and worked down towards the floor. To ensure even thickness andtrue surface, plaster about 15 x 15 cm shall be first applied, horizontally and vertically, at not more than 2meters intervals over the entire surface to the plaster to serve as gauges. The surface of these gauged areasshall be truly in place of the finished plaster surface. The mortar shall be laid between the gauges with atrowel ensuring through filling of joints. The mortar shall be applied in a uniform surface slightly morethan the specified thickness and then brought to a true surface, by working a wooden straight edgereaching across the gauge, with small upward and side movements at a time. Finally the surface shall befinished off true with trowel or wooden float according as a smooth or a sandy granular texture isrequired. Excessive trawling or over working the float shall be avoided.All corners, arises angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be and shall becarefully finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arises, junctions etc. Where required shall be donewithout any extra payment. Such rounding shall be carried out with proper templates to the sizes required.No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up late on. Grooves shall be provided atthe junction of ceiling and wall plaster without any extra costIn suspending work at the end of the day, plaster shall be left, cut clean to line both horizontally andvertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old work shall be scraped, cleaned andwetted with cement slurry before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas, to enable the two to be properlyjoined together. Plastering work shall be closed at the end a of day on the body of the surface and notnearer than 15 cm to any corners or arises. It shall not be closed on the body of the features such aspilasters, bands and cornices. Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also occur on parapet tops andcopings, as these invariably lead to leakages.12.9.1 GROOVESWherever directed all joints between concrete and brick masonry besides other locations as called forshall be expressed by a groove cut in plaster at no extra cost12.9.2 FINISHThe plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of smoothness asrequired The work shall be tested frequently as the work proceeds with a true straight edge not less than2.5 m long and with plumb bobs All horizontal lines and surfaces shall be tested with a level and all jambsand corners with a plumb bob as the work proceeds.12.9.3 CURINGCuring shall be started as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently not to be damaged when watered.The plaster shall be kept wet for a period of atleast 7 days. During this period, it shall be suitablyprotected from all damages12.9.4 PRECAUTIONAny cracks which appear in the surface and all portions, which sound hollow when tapped or are found tobe soft or otherwise defective shall be cut out in rectangular shape and redone as directed by theConsultant

5612.9.5 FLOATING COAT OF NEAT CEMENTWhere finishing with a floating coat of neat cement is specified in the drawings or directed by theConsultant, specification, for this item of work shall be same described above except for the additionalfloating coat which shall be carried out as below. When the plaster has been brought to a true surface withthe wooden straight edge, it shall be uniformly treated over its entire area with a paste of neat cement andrubbed smooth, so that the whole surface is covered with neat cement coating. The quantity of cementapplied for floating coat shall 1 kg. per sq. mt. smooth finishing shall be completed with trowelimmediately and in no case later than half an hour of adding water to the plaster mix.12.10 BEARING PLASTERThis shall be consist of cement plaster 1:3(1 cement : 3 coarse sand ) 20 mm thick finished with a coatneat cement laid on top of walls as bearing for RCC lintels, beams and slabs. When dry, a thick coat oflime wash shall be given.12.11 DOUBLE COAT SAND FACE PLASTER.12.11.1 In case of double coat sand face plaster, the surface shall be prepared in same manner as item no. 1. Thefirst thin coat of c.m. 1:4 having 12mm thickness shall be applied with level and finishing and wateredatleast 3 days. Then second coat of cement mortar 1:3 having 6mm thickness shall be applied withaverage thickness of 18 mm and leveled horizontally and vertically with aluminium tube. Top surfaceshall be rubbed hard with steel plate without any lean finishing coat. The edges shall be finished partlysharp and mildly rounded. When finished the entire surface shall be in line, level and plumb, reasonablysmooth to touch and all corners perfect right angles. The surface shall be sponged to have grains.13. SPECIFICATION FOR PAINTING WORK13.1 WHITEWASHING13.1.1 SCAFFOLDINGWherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports ties together by horizontalpieces, over which scaffolding planks will be fixed No ballies, bamboos or planks shall rest on or touchthe surface which is being white washedWhere ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid damage or scratchesto walls.13.1.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACEBefore new work is white washed, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar dropping andforeign matter.13.1.3 PREPARATION OF LIME WASHThe wash shall be prepared from stone white lime. The lime shall be thoroughly slacked on the spot,mixed and stirred with sufficient water (approx. 5 kg of water to one kg of lime) to make a thin cream.This shall be allowed to stand for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarsecloth. 4 kg of gum dissolved in hot water, shall be added to each cum of the cream. Indigo (Neel) up to 3gm per kg of lime dissolved in water, shall then be added and washed stirred well. Water shall then beadded at the rate of about 5 liters per kg of lime to produce a milky solution.13.1.4 APPLICATIONThe washing on ceiling should be done prior to that of walls. The white wash shall be applied with moonbrushes to the specified number of coats. The operation for each coat shall consist of a stroke of the brushgiven from the top downwards, another from the bottom upwards over the first stroke, and similarly onestroke horizontally from the right and another from the left before it dries.

57Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next one is applied. Further each coat shall be inspected andapproved by the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge before the subsequent coat is applied No portion of thesurface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.For new work, three or more coats shall be applied till the surface presents a smooth and uniform finishthrough which the plaster does not show The finished dry surface shall not show any sings of crackingand peeling not shall it come off readily on the hand when rubbed.13.1.5 PROTECTIVE MEASURESDoors windows floors, articles of furniture etc and such other parts of the building not to be white washedshall be protected for being splashed upon Splashing and droppings, if any, shall be removed by thecontractor at his own cost and the surfaces cleaned Damages if any to furniture or fittings and fixturesshall be recoverable from the contractor.13.1.aColour washing with lime:13.1.a1 Materials:Clear-colle : This shall be made from glue and boiling water by mixing 1 kg Of glue to every 15 litres ofwater. The mixing shall be suitably tinted to match with colour of colour washing as directed. Glue shallconform to I. S 852-1969Lime: Lime used shall be freshly brunt class ‘C1 lime ( flat lime and white in colour conforming to I.S.712-1973.Water: Water shall conform to M-1.Gum: Best quality of gum shall be used in the preparation of white or colour not affected by liem shallbe used in preparing in the colour washThe relevant specifications for the materials and workmanship of item No 1 shall be followed except thatit shall be for colour wash13.1.a2 Workmanship:Sufficient quantity of colour wash enough for the complete job shall be prepared in one operation to avoidany deference in shade. The basic white wash solution shall be prepared in accordance with item 1.Mineral colours not affected by lime shall be added to the white wash solution. No colour wash shall bedone until a sample of colour has been approved. It shall be noted that small samples of colour appearslighter in shade than when the same shades are applied precisely to large surface The colour shall be ofevent tint, over the whole surface. It is patchy or otherwise badly applied, it shall be rejected &preparation of colour wash with pigment shall be as under:(a) With Yellow and Red Ocher.Solid lumps if any in the powder shall be crushed to powder and solution in water prepared and thenadded to white wash sieving it through a coarse cloth, mixed evenly and thoroughly to the white wash insmall quantities till the required shade is obtained.(b) With Blue Vitriol:Fresh crystals of hydrous copper sulphates (i e blue vitriol) shall be ground to fine powder and dissolvedin small quantity of water Sufficient quality of solution enough to produce the colour wash of requiredshade shall be strained through a clean cloth, the filtrate being mixed even and thoroughly to the whitewash.Colour wash from other pigment shall be prepared in accordance with the instructions of the manufacture

5813.1.a3 Preparation of Surface:The surface shall be prepared by removing mortar dropping and foreign matter and thoroughly cleanedwith wire or fiber brush or any other suitable means as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge or Consultants.All loose pieces and scales shall be scrapped off and holes filled with mortar.For scaffolding and application of colour wash, relevant specification of item No. 1 shall be followed. Thecolour wash shall be applied as under.The colour wash shall be applied in accordance with the procedure given in item No 1 after the surfacehas been prepared The first primary coat shall be of white wash and subsequent coats (minimum two) willbe colour wash and the entire surface shall represent a smooth and uniform finish To start with, patch of0.1 sq mt on prepared surface shall be colour washed with first coat of white wash ad subsequent coats ofcolour wash solution in full numbers o coats as described in the item and the sheade is applied to thelarger surface.After the surface has been prepared a coat of white wash shall be applied for the patches and repairs. Thenone coat or more o colour wash shall be applied over the entire surface such that the colour washedsurface shall present a uniform colour shade. No primary coat is needed for a decorated surface bearingcolour of same shade on surface requiring change o colour after the surface has been prepared asdescribed above. Two coats of white washes shall be applied before application of specified number(minimum two) coats of colour wash of the new shade.13.1.a4 Protective measure:The surface off doors, windows, floors of furniture etc. And such other parts of the building not to bewhite washed shall be protected from being splashed upon. Such surfaces shall be cleaned of white washsplashed if any13.2 OIL BOUND DISTEMPER13.2.1 MATERIALSOil emulsion (Oil Bound) washable distemper (IS : 428) of approved brand and manufacture shall beused. The primer shall be of the same manufacture as distemper shall be diluted with water of any otherprescribed thinner in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of distemperrequired for day’s work shall be prepared.The distemper and primer shall be brought by the contractor in sealed tins in sufficient quantities at a timeto suffice for a fortnight’s work, and the same shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and theEngineer-in-Charge. The empty tins shall not be removed from the site of work, till this item of work hasbeen completed and passed by the Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge.13.2.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACEThe surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust. Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty,made of plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the undulations andthen sand papering the same after it is dry.Pitting in plaster shall be made good with plaster of Paris mixed with the colour to be used. The surfaceshall then be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat of the distempershall be applied over the patches. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before theregular coat of distemper is applied13.2.3 APPLICATION15 cm double bristled distemper brushes shall be used. After each days work, brushes shall be thoroughlywashed in hot water with soap solution ands hung down to dry. Old brushes which are dirty and cakedwith distemper shall not be used on the work.

5913.2.4 SCAFFOLDINGThe specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures shall be as described under whitewashing.13.3 WATER PROOF CEMENT PAINT13.3.1 MATERIALCement paint of required colour and of approved brand and manufacture conforming to IS : 5410 shall beused. Before application of the cement paint the shade shall be got approved from the Consultant. Cementpaint shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage shall comprise of 2 parts of cement paint andone part of water stirred thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall comprise of addingfurther one part of water to mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a liquid of workable and uniformconsistency. In all cases the manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed meticulously.Cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within a hour of its mixing as otherwisethe mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish.The lids of cement paint shall be kept tightly closed when not in use, as by exposure to atmosphere thecement paint rapidly become air set due to its hygroscopic qualities.13.3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACEFor new work, the surface shall thoroughly be cleaned of all mortar dropping, dirt, dust, algae, grease andother foreign matter by brushing and washing. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted with clean waterbefore the cement paint is applied.13.3.3 APPLICATIONFor new work, the treatment shall consist of a priming coat of cement paint following by the applicationof two or more coats of cement paint till the surface shows on even colour. For each coat, the entiresurface shall be coated with the mixture, uniformly, with proper cement paint brushes in horizontalstrokes followed immediately by vertical ones which together shall constitute one coat.The subsequent coats shall be applied only after the previous coat has dried The finished surface shall beeven and uniform and shall show no brush marks.Enough cement paint shall be mixed to finish one room at a time The application of a coat in each roomshall be finished in one operation and no work shall be started in any room, which cannot be completedthe same day After each days work, the brushes shall be washed in hot water and hung down to dry Oldbrushes which are dirty or caked with painting shall not be used.13.3.4 SCAFFOLDINGThe specifications in respect to 13.1.1 scaffolding protective measures shall be as described above underwhite washing.14. SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINTING:14.1 Workmanship:14.1.1 Scaffolding:Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports ties together by horizontalpieces, over which scaffolding planks will be fixed No ballies, bamboos or planks shall rest on or touchthe surface which is being white washedWhere ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid damage or scratchesto walls.

6014.1.2 Preparation of surface:Preparation of surface shall in general be in accordance with, except that any uneveness shall be madegood by applying putty (white cement based) mixed with water including up the undulation and then sandpapering the same after it is dry.14.1.3 Preparation of paintThe paint mix, shall be continuously stirred while applying for maintaining uniform consistency. Numberof coats shall be as per item description. The painting shall be laid evenly and smoothly by means ofcrossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area with paint, brushing thesurface hard at first, then brushing alternatively in opposite direction 2/3 times and then finally brushinglightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks, no hair marks noclogging of paint puddles shall be permitted. The full process of crossing and laying off with constituteone coat.The paint shall be applied by means of brush or roller.Before starting painting with plastic emulsion paint, the prepared surface shall be reacted with two coatsof primer consisting of cement primer whiting and plastic emulsion paint shall start only after thepreceding coat has become sufficiently hard to resist brush marking. Subsequent coats of plastic emulsionpaint shall also be started after the preceding coat is dried by evaporation of water content.The surface of finishing shall present a flat, velvets smooth finish, even and uniform shade withoutpatches, marks, paint drops etc.14.1.4 Precautions:i. Brushes shall be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept immersed in waterduring break periods to prevent the paint from hardening on the brush. Old brushes, if used shallbe completely dried of turpentine / oil paints by washing in warm soap water.ii. No oil base puttied shall be used in filling cracks / holes.iii. Washing of painted surface shall not be done within 3-4 weeks of application.14.1.5 Protective measuresSurface of distempering over existing distempered surface, the existing distempering shall be scrapped bysteel scrapers leaving a clean surface.All nails shall be removed. Pitting in plaster shall be made good with plaster of paris mixed with drydistemper of colour to be used. The surface then shall be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand paperand made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be applied over the patches. The surface shall be allowed todry thoroughly before the regular coat of distemper is allowed.The surface affected by moss, fungus, algae efflorescence shall be treated in accordance with IS 2395.14.2 ACRYLIC COPOLYMER AGGREGATE FINISH14.2.1 MaterialIt shall be an acrylic based textured wall coating consisting of quartz and silica aggregate, inorganicpigments and other additives to form a crack free, flexible, tough, water proof coating.14.2.2 Preparation of SurfaceThe surface to be coated shall be cleaned and all dirt, dust, grease and loose particles shall be removed.Any old textures surface shall be removed with removing agent as per manufacturer’s instructions.

6114.2.3 ApplicationBonding agent and water shall be mixed first. Then the flakes / granules shall be added and mixedthoroughly and kneaded till no lumps are found. The dough shall be left for 20-30 minutes before startingapplication. The bonding agent, flakes / granules and water shall be mixed in different ratios for differentfinishes as per manufacturer’s specifications.The first application shall be by steel trowel. It shall be smoothened, if the specified finish required, by aplastic trowel.14.3. VarnishingVarnishing of wood and wood based material shall be in accordance with IS 2338 (Part – II).Surface to be Varnished shall be prepared to produce a smooth, dry and matt surface and all dust and dirtshall be removed from the surface.The varnish shall be applied liberally with a bush and spread evenly over a portion of the surface withshort light strokes to avoid fronting. It shall be allowed to flow out while the next section is being laid in.Excess, varnish shall be scraped out of the brush and then the first section be crossed, re crossed and laidoff lightly. The varnish, once it has begun to set, shall not be retouched. In case of any mistake, theVarnish shall be removed and the work shall be started afresh.Where two coats of varnish are applied, the first coat shall be hard drying under coating or flatting varnishwhich shall be allowed to dry hard and then be flatted down before applying the finishing coat. Sufficienttime shall be allowed in between two coats.When flat varnishing is used for finishing, a preparatory coat of hard drying under coating of flattingvarnish shall first be applied and shall be allowed to harden thoroughly. It shall then be lightly rubbeddown before the flat varnish is applied.On larger areas, the flat varnish shall be applied rapidly, and the edges of each patch applied shall not beallowed to set, but shall be followed up whilst in free working conditions.14.3.1 French polishFrench polish shall conform to IS: 348. Suitable pigments shall be added to get the required colour.The surface to be French polished shall be rubbed down to smoothness with sand paper and shall be welldusted. Pores in the surface shall be filled up with fillers.A pad of woolen cloth covered by a fine clothshall be used to apply the finish. The pad shall be moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the surface ina series of over lapping circles applying the polish sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to give aneven surface. A trace of linseed oil may be used on the face of the pad for the purpose. The surface shallbe allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the same way. To finish off, the pad shall be coveredwith a fresh piece of clean fine cloth, slightly damped with methylated spirit and rubbed lightly andquickly with circular motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform texture and high gloss.14.4 PAINTING OF STEEL AND OTHER METAL SURFACES14.4.1 GENERALReference shall be made to the following Indian Standards: IS 2524, IS 1447.14.4.2 Preparation of surfaceThe surface, before painting, shall be cleaned of all rust, scale, dirt and other foreign matter with wirebrushes, steel wool, scrappers, sand paper etc. The surface shall then be wiped finally with mineralturpentine which shall then be removed of grease etc. The surface then shall be allowed to dry. In case ofGI surface so prepared shall be treated with Mordant solution (5 liters for about 100 sq.m) by rubbing the

62solution generously with brush. After about half an hour, the surface if required shall be retouched andwashed down thoroughly with clean cold water & allowed to dry.14.4.3 Application of priming and paintsApproved quality primer and paint in specified no. of coats shall be applied as per manufacturer’srecommendations either by brushing or spraying. Each subsequent coat shall be applied only after thepreceding coat is dried.14.5 SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT TO WOOD WORK14.5.1 Synthetic enamel paint of approved brand and manufacture and of the required colour shall be used for thetop coat and an under coat of shade to match the top coat as recommended by the manufacture shall beused.14.5.2 One coat of specified paint of shade suited to the shade of the top coat shall be applied after rubbing withthe finest grade of wet abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and allloose particles dust off.14.5.3 Top coats of specified paint of required shade shall be applied after the first coat is thoroughly dry.Additional finishing coats shall be applied if found necessary to ensure properly uniform glossy surface.15. SPECIFICATION FOR FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING, UNDERDECKINSULATION & PARTITIONS1. FALSE CEILING GRID SYSTEMS1.1 Steel snap Grid System1.1.1 MaterialSteel snap grid system shall be erected for the purpose of supporting the false ceiling tiles.a. Main runner shall be of 24 SWG, Spring grade, Vinyl coated steel member. Main runner shall be Tshaped and of 34.925 mm x 25.4 mm size. Main runner shall be slotted @ 300 mm C/C at the Web forSnapping in the cross tees and punched @ 100 mm C/C for fixing GI hangers. Both ends of the membershall be formed and die-cut identically for self splicing rigid perfect joint with another continuation mainrunner.b. Cross - RunnerCross Runner shall be same as Main runner specified in clause No. 1.1.1.2 but without any slotting andpunching.cWall ChannelWall channel shall be of 26 SWG spring grade and Vinyl coated steel member of 25.4 mm x 34.925 mm x25.4 mm size.1.1.1.2 ERECTIONAt first, desired level of false ceiling tiles shall be marked on the walls. Wall channels then shall be fixedto peripheral walls with raw plugs/dash fastners @ 450mm C/C accordingly so that the false ceiling tilesare at desired level.Main Runners shall be placed at the spacing of max. 600 mm C/C and shall be fixed by 12 Gaugestraightened GI wire fixed to the punches in the main runner @ max. 1200 mm and to the ceiling hooks.The ceiling hooks shall be fixed to the ceiling by raw plugs / dash fasteners. The ends of the main runner

63shall be snapped into the peripheral wall channels. Cross runners shall be snapped in with the main runner@ max. 600mm. C/C.The overall snap grid system shall be rigid by self locking joints, in accordance with false ceiling patterns,perfectly levelled and aligned at desirable height as per drawings.1.1.2 ALUMINIUM GRID SYSTEMAluminium grid system for supporting false ceiling tiles shall be of approved made and shall be perfectlylevelled aligned at desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as per drawings.1.1.2.1 MATERIALa. Main Runner shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium Tee sections of 25mm x 35mm size(approved make), 2.5 mm thick.1.1.2.2 ERECTIONThe grid system shall be assembled by interlocking the main and cross runners @ 600 mm c/c max. onbothways by means of aluminium angle cleats. The main runners shall be suspended from the ceiling bymeans of 3 mm thick MS flat clamp fixed to main runners @ 1200 mm max. and fixed to 6 mm dia MShook which again is fixed to the ceiling. 3 mm thick MS flat clamp shall be connected to main runner with25 mm long MS clamp with leveling nut and @ 1200 mm maximum. The MS hooks shall be suspendedfrom the ceiling by means of slotting in 25mm x 3mm thick MS flat, `L’ shaped, fixed to the slab by 12mm dia Dash fasteners @ 1200 mm C/C.The overall grid system shall be rigid, in accordance with false ceiling pattern, perfectly leveled andaligned at desirable height.1.1.3 GI GRID SYSTEMGI grid system for supporting false ceiling tiles shall be perfectly leveled, aligned at desired height inaccordance with false ceiling pattern.1.1.3.1 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIPa. Wall ChannelsWall channels shall be made 0.5 mm thick GI of size 27 mm, one flange 20 mm and other 30 mm. Wallchannels shall be fixed to peripheral walls by raw plugs / dash fasteners @ 450 mm C/C.b. Intermediate Channels (main runners)GI intermediate channels shall be 0.9 mm thick, of size 45 mm and with two flanges of 15 mm each. Theintermediate channels shall be suspended from the soft @ 1200 mm with 25 mm x 0.5 mm GI hangerbolted to the channel and fixed to the ceiling (by means of bolting to GI cleat fixed to the ceiling withdash fasteners).c. Ceiling Sections (Cross runners)GI channel shaped ceiling sections shall be 0.5 mm thick having a knurled Web of 51.1 mm and twoflanges of 26 mm each with lips of 10.5 mm. The ceiling sections shall be fixed to the intermediatechannels in perpendicular direction at 450 mm C/C with the help of connecting clips.1.2 GYPSUM BOARD TILES:Gypsum board shall conform to IS: 2095

64The Gypsum boards used for false ceiling shall have following properties.iiiThermal Conductivity – 0 16 W / mkThermal Resistancea. For 9.5 mm thick board – 0.06 m2 K/Wb. For 12.5 mm thick board – 0.08 m2 K/Wc. For 15 mm thick board – 0.09 m2 K/WiiiFire Propagationa. Fire PropagationIndex of performance not exceeding 12 and a sub index not exceeding 6 (when each side is testedseparately to BS 476 Part – 6).b. Surface spread of flame Class 1 (both sides) as / test to BS 476 Part – 7).Gypsum boards shall be specified thickness, and of specified finish (painted / prelaminated). The Gypsumboards shall be screw fixed to the under side of false ceiling grid system with 12.5 mm dry wall screw @230 mm C/C by drilling machine. Joint in the board shall be finished flush with fillers, finisher and primeras per manufacturer’s recommendation to givea seamless finish.Necessary cut-outs for Electrical / AC and other fixtures shall be provided with a framing of wallchannels.In case of fixing on modular grid system, the boards shall be cut to required size and fixed in the samemanner as in clause 11.2.1.The finished false ceiling shall be perfectly levelled and aligned, at desired height as per drawings.1.3 PARTITION FRAME WORK:1.3.1 G.I.GI partition frame work shall consist of 0.9 mm tk, 15 x 45 x 15 mm GI channel shaped horizontalmembers and 0.5 mm th, 20 x 27 x 30 mm GI channel shaped vertical studs screwed to each other. Thechannel sections shall have 10 mm lips. Screws used shall be drywall type. Horizontal and verticalspacing shall be maximum 610mm. The perimeter of the frame work shall be bound y continuouschannel. The floor and ceiling channel shall be fixed to floor and ceiling by nylon raw plug and metallicdash fasteners respectively.In case of low height partitions, the channels shall be boxed together.The frame work arrangement shall be in accordance with the pattern for partition facing, glazing inpartition etc.1.3.2 GYPSUM PARTITION BOARDGypsum boards for partition shall be same as specified in clause No.11.2.4 and shall be fixed and finishedin the same manner as specified in clause No.11.2.4.Number of Gypsum board layers shall be as specified and with finishing (painting or pre-lamination) asspecified in the item description.

65In case of Low height partitions, exposed frame work along the edges shall also be concealed withpartition boards.Necessary cut-outs door electrical, AC, return Air etc., and other fixtures shall be provided in the boards.Glazing if any shall be fixed with putty and wooden bidding.16. SPECIFICATION FOR CHAIN LINK FENCING1.1 SCOPEThis specification specifies the requirements of chain line fence for security purposes.1.2 CHAIN LINK FENCING1.2.1 MATERIALS1.2.2 CHAIN LINK FENCINGThe material requirement shall conform to IS: 2721 latest edition. The chain link fencing shall be wovenfrom 3.55 mm dia wire with mesh size of 50 x 50 mm (2” x 2”). The mesh wire shall not vary thespecified dia by more +0.05 mm.1.2.3 GALVANISED WIRES1.2.3.1 All steel wires shall be hot dipped galvanized wire and dia of the wire shall be 3.5mm. over thegalvanized coating.1.2.3.2 The line wire shall be 4mm dia mild steel.1.2.3.3 The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the concrete intermediate posts shall be 2.5mm diametermild steel.1.2.3.4 The tying wire for securing the chain link fencing to the line wire shall be 1.6mm diameter mild steel.1.2.3.5 Hair pin staples for fastening down the bottom of galvanized chain link fencing to the concrete sill shallbe of 3.55mm wire. The ends shall be bent outwards to secure anchorage.1.2.3.6 Cleats for eye bolts shall be of uniform size and shall consists of mild steel angle of 75 x 50 x 6 mm.1.3. Eye Bolt Strainers1.3.1 The eye bolt strainer shall consists of bolts with welded eye sufficiently threaded and fitting with a nutand waster.1.3.2 Two-way eye bolt strainer shall have suitable ring nuts, fitted after wires have been strained on one side.1.3.3 Stretcher bar shall consist of mild steel flats 25mm x 4.75mm. They shall be secured to the clears by steelbolts.1.3.4 Droppers for barbed wire shall be MS not less than 25mm x 4.75mm thick with 38mm x 4.85mm halfround staples for fastening the barbed wire to them.1.4 ERECTION

661.4.1 Straining posts shall be provided at all ends and comers of fences, at changes in direction or acutevariations in level and at intervals not exceeding 66mm on straight lengths of fence. Intermediate postsshall be spaced at regular intervals not exceeding 3m.1.4.2 Struts shall be fitted to all straining posts behind the chain link fabric in the direction of the line of fence.1.5 FIXING CHAIN LINK FENCING1.5.1 There shall be four evenly spaced rows of the line wire. The top wire shall be doubled, making five linewires in all. The bottom wire shall be close to the ground.1.5.2 Each line wire shall be strained tightly by means of eyebolt strainers or winders at each straining point.1.5.3 Each line wire shall be secured to each intermediate post by a wire stirrup passed through a holein the posts and secured to the line wire by three complete runs on each side of the post.1.5.4 The chain link fencing shall be strained between each pair of straining posts and secured to each strainingpost by means of stretcher bar. One of the top line wires shall be threaded through the appropriateadjacent rows of mesh, care being taken that no meshes in the rows are by passed by the line wire exceptwhere deviation is necessary at the straining posts. The second top line wire shall be strained in front ofthe fencing. The fencing shall be attached to the top and bottom line wires by wire ties spaced 450mmapart.

6717. LIST OF APPROVED MAKES/AGENCY OF MATERIALS(FOR CIVIL WORK)The following guidelines are to be noted with regard to use of materials in the work.1 As far as possible, materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" from Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS) shallbe used in the work, unless make is specifically mentioned in Schedule of rate/ scope.2 Wherever, material bearing Standard Mark (ISI) are used the work, the following shall be ensured.a) The supplier has a valid license from BIS during the period the material is being used in the work.b) The Contractor should furnish necessary documents and proof of payments made for the procurementof materials bearing Standard Mark (ISI).3. Due to non-availability of materials bearing ISI mark as detailed in para-2 above, the materials as perthe list of approved makes of materials shall be used in the work and the Contractor can use any ofmakes given in the attached list.4. In case it is established that Standard material (bearing ISI mark) as well as the materials indicated inthe list (as mentioned in the above para) are not available in the market, then approved equivalentmaterials may be used in the work subject to approval from the consultant and Engineer-in-Charge.5. For materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" ordinarily no testing is to be done. However, in case ofdoubt or with a view to check the quality of materials, Engineer-in-Charge may send samples forrandom testing.6. For use of materials other than materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" Mandatory tests shall beconducted at the frequency specified in the contract. In case frequency of testing is not stipulated in thecontract then standard specification (CPWD, ISI etc.) may be considered for frequency at whichmaterials are to be tested.7. Before bulk purchase of quantities of materials, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to getthe samples of materials approved from consultant and Engineer-in-ChargeSr.NoMATERIALSAPPROVED MAKE/APPROVED AGENCYHoechest, NOCIL,CYRAMID INDIA1 Antitermite emulsifiable concentrate As per CPWD specifications and ISI marked.2 Damp proof materials / water Impermo, Duraseals, Acco-proof, CICO etc.,proofing compoundDuraseed, STP, GE Silicon, Pidilite. Fosroc3 Reinforcement steel Tata, SAIL, Vizag Steel4 Structural steel section Tata, SAIL, Vizag Steel5 Ordinary portland cement 53 Ambuja, Ultra Tech, ACC, KCP, Raasi, Ramco,6 White cementMaha CementJK white, Birla white

687 Aluminum glazing section Hindalco . Indal, Jindal8 Al. Glazing fabrication As approved by GAIL/Consultant9 Anodised aluminum hard ware fittings Everite , Sigma, Opel, NU-LITE, Jyothi10 Locks Godrej, Harrison11 Door closers Dorma12 Float glass Asahi float, Modi float, Hindustan GlassCompany, Saint Gobain.13 Wire mesh Sterling Enterprises, Trimurty welded mesh14 Distemper J&N. Berger, Shalimar, Asian, Nerolac15 Synthetic enamel paint J & N, Berger, Shalimar, Asian, Nerolac, ICI.16 Plastic emulsion paint Asian , Berger , Nerolac, ICI, J&N, Shalimar17 Water proof cement paint Snowcem, Asian, Nerolac, Berger.18 Glazed ceramic tiles Johnson, Somany, Kajaria, Spartek19 Unglazed ceramic tiles Spartek, Bell, Kajaria, NITCO, Somany,Johnson.20 Ceramic border tiles 3” wide Johnson, Somany, Kajaria, Spartek21 Cement concrete tiles Eurocon, Pavit, Duracrete22 Vitrified granamite tiles Johnson, Bell Granito, Navin Ceramics, NITCO23 Floor spring for Alu. Door & DormaDoor closer24 Bitumen Indian oil, Hindustan petroleum, Bharat Petroleum25 Chemical Impregnated Water Overseas Water Proofing Co., Hindustan waterProofing / Brickcoba Water Proofing, Indian Water Proofing, NationalProofing AgenciesWater Proofing, Hammer & Fort26 Flush doors Anchor, Jwala, Delhi Doors, Kitply, GoyalIndustrial Corporation, Woodcraft, Jain WoodIndustries, Alpro, Genda-Northern Doors, WoodAnd Paper Industries Baroda, Shri Giriraj Plyn-BoardIndustries Limited27. Laminates Decolam, Greenlam, Formica, NationalLaminart, Royal Touch28 Mirror Modi, Saint Gobain, Atul29 Copolymer Acrylic aggregate Heritage or equivalentPaints30 Wooden flooring NOVO floor, COSMO floor, PERGO floor31 Electronic automatic door Dorma or equivalent

6918. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSOFSANITARY AND PLUMBING WORKS

70SPECIFICATIONSPLUMBING AND SANITARY WORKSCONTENTS- General- Scope of Work- Samples Material DrawingsWATER SUPPLY- Scope of Work- Materials- Cutting, Laying & Jointing of Pipes & Fittings- Clamps & Holder Bats- Testing- Internal Work- Water Supply fittings- Scope of Sewerage Disposal and DrainageSANITARY INSTALLATION- General Requirements- Sanitary Wares- Toilet Requisites- PVC Pipes and FittingsEXTERNAL SEWARAGEEXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY

711. GENERALSPECIFICATION OF PLUMBING AND SANITARY INSTALLATION1.1 The works include installation of sanitary ware, internal water supply distribution, cold water supply,rainwater disposal from the terrace, soil and waste disposal from various fixtures.1.2 The contractor shall also guarantee the perfect operation of the installation and accessories supplied andinstalled by him. All these items shall be compulsorily of first quality and best choice.1.3 The contractor shall ensure that all the fixtures are fed with the supply distribution system to deliveradequate pressure and flow taking into consideration the simultaneous demand.1.4 The works shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the latest BIS specifications.1.5 The mock-up toilets for each design shall be completed, got approved from the Engineer-in-charge /Consultant for all the materials to be used before bulk procurement is done by the contractor.1.6 All the materials not approved by the Engineer-in-charge/Consultant and not conforming to the approvedbrands listed in the schedule are liable to be rejected. The contractor shall have to remove all such rejectedmaterials and substitute it with the approved materials as required by the Engineer-in-charge/Consultant.No extra payment shall be admissible to the contractor on this account.1.7 The contract is lump sum for the internal and external works. All the soil and waste shall be connected tothe manhole.1.8 All the Pipes to be used in the works shall be tested at site before incorporating it in works pertaining tosolid and waste lines. Nothing extra shall payable to the contractor on this account.1.9 The work shall be executed according to the drawings and specifications and as per the contractdocuments. Any missing details in the drawings or specifications but which are fairly intended forsuccessful functioning shall have to be supplemented by the standard BIS code or CPWD specifications.2. SCOPE OF WORK2.1 The scope of work under this contract shall comprise of providing and installation of all material,equipment and labour as described in detail under various heads of specification and as shown ondrawings.2.2 The contractor’s work shall include all materials, tools and plants, scaffolding and everything necessaryfor the completion of the work to the satisfaction of Consultant/Engineer-in-charge. All materials andworkmanship used in the execution of the work shall be the first quality unless otherwise stated. Allmaterials and workmanship used in the execution of the work shall be the first quality unless otherwisestated. All materials used in the work shall conform to the current CPWD specifications whether or notspecific mention is made thereof. The contractor shall be responsible for and shall replace or make goodat this own expense, any materials lost or damaged or of quality not approved.2.3 Excavation in all types of soil refilling and carting away surplus materials to contractors own dump or asdirected, for manholes, inspection chambers, gully traps water supply.2.4 Two coats of approved ready mixed paint over red oxide primer to all exposed iron or woodworkincluding C.I brackets, G.I. Pipes and C.I. Pipes. All G.I. Pipes whether laid in ground or concealed inwalls or floors shall be coated with bitumen.2.5 Work shall be inclusive of making holes through concrete / masonry, making good the work and redoingand re-plastering the same to match the surroundings.

722.6 For all pipes, work shall be inclusive of all fittings and specials such as coupling, bends, unions, cleaningeyes, tees, plugs, reducer etc., and making joints and connection to valves, tanks, pumps and existing pipelines etc as required.2.7 Cutting chase for concealing pipes in walls and floors and making good with cement plaster 1:3.2.8 Work quoted shall include for hoisting to and work at all levels and list of materials shall not form anycriterion for any extra claims.2.9 All work shall conform to the description given for each item in addition to the Bylaws ofMunicipality/Public Health Authority within whose jurisdiction the items are to be executed. Contractorshall obtain approval to drainage and water supply work and work shall be considered as completed onlywhen the contractor produces. “No objection and completion certificate” from the Municipal/publicHealth Authority. Nothing shall be paid to the contractor on account of this.3. SAMPLES3.1 Before commencement of the work the contractor shall furnish the samples of material of workmanship atthe first opportunity that may be called for by the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge for their approval andany further samples in case of rejection until such samples are approved. Nothing extra shall be paid to thecontractor for the same. Work shall be executed in accordance with the approved samples.4. MATERIAL4.1 All the materials to be used in the work shall be of approved make/brand as given in the statement or asdirected by the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.5. DRAWINGS5.1 All water supply, sanitary and drainage drawings are to be used as guide lines and to be followed as closeas possible.5.2 The contractor shall submit to the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge the shop drawings to suit the watersupply sanitary and drainage layouts.5.3 No dimensions to be measured on drawings and only written dimensions are to be followed.5.4 Contractor shall refer for further details, dimensions to the Constructional and structural detaileddrawings.5.5 Discrepancies, variations changes in drawings should be brought to the notice of the Consultant /Engineer-in-charge and written approval should be obtained by the contractor before starting the work.6. AS BUILT DRAWINGS6.1 Contractor shall submit as built drawings on completion of work, one complete set of originalreproducible tracings and three prints to the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge for-6.1.1 A run of all open/concealed piping, with diameters from terrace to tapping points with variouscontrols for water supply, clean outs access panels, soils waste, vent, rain water piping at all levels.6.1.2 Drainage water supply layout, location of inspection chambers, diameter of drainage pipes, fromWC to chamber, from Gully trap to chamber, and between two chambers with ground levels of drainagepipes in chambersWATER SUPPLY (GI PIPE CLASS `B’):Scope of internal water supply will include the following.

73a) All GI pipes fittings and valves of rising main from finished Ground level to over head tanks as indicatedin the drawings.b) All GI pipes with fittings and valves from over head tank to all taps, wash basins, cisterns, sinks.2. MATERIALS2.1. Galvanized Iron Pipes and Fittings:2.1.1. The pipes shall be galvanized mild steel tubes medium grade conforming to BIS 1239. All pipes shall beelectric resistance welded screwed with taper, threads and sockets with paralleled threads, Threads shallconform to BIS 554-1964 The pipes and sockets shall be clearly finished, well galvanized in and out andfree from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects All screws threads shall be clean and wellcut The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with axis of the tube2.1.2. The fittings shall be malleable iron and comply with all the requirements that of pipes. The fittings shallbe designed by the respective nominal bores of the pipes for which they are intended,2.1.3 The standard weight and thickness of pipes shall be as shown in the following tables.Nominal of Boretubes mmClassWall thick- ness inmmNominal weightblack Tube kg/mNominal weightGalvanised kg/m15 M 2.65 1.22 1.274H 3.25 1.45 1.50420 M 2.65 1.58 1.642H 3.25 1.90 1.95325 M 3.25 2.44 2.525H 4.05 2.97 3. 0532 M 3.25 3.14 3.247H 4.05 3.84 3.93740 M 3.25 3.61 3.731H 4.05 4.43 4.545NOTE :M = Medium, H- Heavy3. CUTTING, LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPES AND FITTINGS3.1 Where pipes have to be cut or re-threaded, ends, shall be carefully filed out so that no obstruction to boreis offered. The ends of the pipes shall then be threaded conforming to requirements of BIS 554-1964 withpipe dies and tapes carefully in such a manner as will into result in slackness of joints when two pieces arescrewed together. The pipe shall be clean and cleared of all foreign matters before being laid. All pipesand fittings shall be properly jointed to make the joints completely water tight and all pipes kept free fromdust during fixing. Burr shall be removed from the joints after screwing.3.2 All GI pipes below ground shall be laid in trenches and shall have a minimum cover of 600 mm, paintedwith two coats anticorrosive bitumastic paint, filling 150 mm thick sand all round the G.I. pipes.3.3 The runs of the pipe shall be truly vertical and horizontal. Proper bends, elbows, tees atturning/corners shall be used.3.4 All GI pipes with necessary fittings wherever they are laid on internal faces of the walls shall beconcealed in chase, sand painted with two coats of anticorrosive bitumastic paint. On external faces theywill be laid on walls fixed with GI clamps.3.5 In the concealed portion of the piping no joint shall be provided in the pipe lines except in the fittings i.e.bend, elbows, tees and nipples where required.

743.6 As far as possible no GI pipes shall be laid under floors of the toilet/kitchen.3.7 No GI pipe shall be laid in lime concrete, where required shall be embedded in PCC of 1:3:6 minimum 75mm all around or as directed by the Consultant.3.8 Sizes of the rising main, branch pipes from the rising main, down corners from the over head tank andbranch from down corners shall be of size as shown in drawings.4. CLAMPS & HOLDER BATS4.1 All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal unless unavoidable. The pipes shall befixed to walls with standard pattern holder bat clamps of required shape and size so as to fit tightly on thepipes when tightened with screwed bolts. The clamps shall be embedded in brick work in cement mortar1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) and shall be spaced at regular intervals in straight lengths as shown in thetable given below :-lengthsSize of pipe mm…………………………………………………………………………Horizontal runs (m)Vertical runs (m)___________________________________________________________________________15 2.00 2.5020 to 32 2.50 3.0040 to 50 3.00 3.5065 to 100 3.50 5.00The clamps shall be fixed at shorter lengths near the fittings as directed by the Consultant / Engineer-incharge.4.2 All pipes shall be provided with unions at the location of fixing valves, pumps or any other fixedequipment so as to have easy detachment.5. TESTING5.1 After laying and jointing the pipes and fittings shall be inspected under working conditions of pressureand flow. Any joint found leaking shall be redone and all leaking pipes removed and replaced withoutextra cost. The pipe shall be slowly and carefully charged with water so that all air is expelled from thelines. The draw of taps and stop cocks shall then be plugged and hydraulic pressure of 6 kg/sq.cm. shallbe applied, gradually. Pressure gauge shall be accurate and recalibrated before the test. The test pumphaving been stopped, the pressure shall maintain itself without measurable loss for atleast half an hour.6. CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF SUPPLY SYSTEM6.1 All water lines shall be thoroughly and efficiently disinfected before being taken into use and also afterevery major repair. The method of dis-infection shall be subject to the approval of theConsultant/Engineer-in-charge.7. INTERNAL WORK:7.1 The internal work shall include the cost of labour and material involved in all the operations describedabove. It shall include the cost of cutting holes in walls, floors and making good the same.7.2 This shall also include, concealed pipe work in which case cutting of chase and making good the same orpainting of pipes.8. CUTTING CHASES IN MASONRY WALL8.1 The chases up to 7.5 x 7.5 cm shall be made in the walls for housing GI pipes etc. These shall be providedin correct position as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Consultant. Chases shall be made by the

75chiseling out the masonry to proper line and depth. After GI pipes etc., are fixed in chases, the chases,shall be filled with cement with cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand: 6 graded stone aggregateof 20 mm nominal size) or cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) as may be specified and madeflush with the masonry surface. The concrete surface shall be roughened with wire brush to provide a keyfor plastering.9. WATER SUPPLY FITTINGS9.1 Unless otherwise specified all gunmetal/brass such as ball valves, non-return valves, full-way valves, stopcocks, bib taps, etc. shall confirm to relevant BIS specifications and shall be of heavy quality.10. PAINTING10.1 All vertical / horizontal pipes shall suitably painted with two coats anticorrosive paint of approved qualityover a coat of primer.11. SCOPE OF SEWERAGE DISPOSAL AND DRAINAGE11.1 Scope of internal sewerage disposal and drainage system under this Lump Sum contract will include allCI waste pipes connections up to Gully traps and Cl Soil pipe connections up to manholes including ventpipes with vertical stacks manhole including all floor traps, gully traps as shown in the drawings.11.2 Scope of internal drainage i.e. Rain water system under this lump sum contract will include all PVC rainwater pipes connecting from terrace/balcony 2.50 including PVC bends upto storm water drainage line,gully chamber and including storm water Drainage system as shown in the drawings.IISANITARY INSTALLATIONGENERAL REQUIREMENTSa. All sanitary appliances including Sanitary fittings, fixtures, toilet requisites, shall be of size, make anddesign of first quality as per sample approved by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charges as shown in thedrawings. The rates shall be for center fittings only.b. All exposed and visible G.I. pipe and fittings shall be painted with approved quality of two coats ofsynthetic enamel paint over a coat of primer of approved shade as approved.c. All necessary and plumbing work shall be carried out through licensed plumbers.d. All sanitary fittings such as water closet pans (pedestal or squatting patterns), flush pipes, brackets, washbasins, baths, sinks, soil and vent pipes etc. and fittings holders for toilet paper, glass shelves and otherfittings together with the fixing of the same shall be complete in all respects and fit for proper functioning.e. All damage done to floors, walls, R.C.C. work etc. during process of execution, fixing or installation ofsanitary fittings, pipes, internal water supply and house drainage etc., shall be restored to its originalcondition and the cost of the same is included in the rates.1. SANITATRY WARES1.1. EUROPEAN TYPE W.C. PAN WITH LOW LEVEL FLUSHING CISTERNEuropean type W.C. pan shall be of white vitreous china first quality water closet ‘P’ or ‘S’ trap coupledwith fittings, brackets, complete in all respects. The W.C. pan shall be free from cracks, crazes, blisters,and shall have smooth surface.1.2 FIXINGW.C. pan shall be fixed to floor walls with C P. brass screws or by means of 75 mm long 6.5 mm countersunk bolts and nuts embedded in floor concrete. The base of the pedestal of the pan shall squarely rest onthe finished floor Any gap between the finished floor and the pedestal shall be filled with white masticmixed with pigment to match the shade of floor or as directed by the Consultants / Engineer-in-charge.

76Following measures shall be adopted for fixing the W.C. pana) The central axis of the pan shall be perpendicular to the finished face of wall.b) The outlet of the pan shall be centrally placed in the socket of CI connector pipe with a uniform space allaround for jointing Jointing shall be done with yarn, linseed oil, white lead, cement and water-proofingcompound and shall be made water tight.c) The distance between centre line of outlet of W C pan and finished wall face shall be so adjusted as to restsquare against the finished wall face.1.3 SEAT AND LIDSeat and lid shall be of heavy quality and shall be fitted exactly on the rim of the W.C. pan with CP brasshinges rubber buffers and CP brass nuts. It should be fixed in such a way that it is easily workable.1.4 STOPCOCKAngle Stop cock shall be of CP brass/brass as specified in the drawing.1.5 PAINTINGBrackets shall be painted with two coats of white synthetic enamel paint of approved manufacturer over apriming coat.1.6 ANGLE VALVEAngle valve shall be of 15mm dia CP brass with 15mm dia GI supply pipe of required length with nutsand washers.The connection between angle valve and supply line laid in chase shall be made in a manner so that theflange is flush with finished face of the wall and no threaded portion of the angle valve or supply line isvisible.1.7 URINALSHalf stall type / full size urinal shall be conforming to IS:2556 Part VI. Urinals shall be of single piececonstruction with integral flushing box rim. These shall be mounted on walls. The flushing inlet pipe shallbe of CP brass 15mm dia and waste pipe 32 mm dia GI, 750 mm long shall be embedded in wall.Necessary unions and CP bottle trap shall be provided in the waste line.Rawl plugs with CP brass screws shall be used for fixing the urinal. Fixing shall ensure that no liquid isleft over in the pan after flushing.Urinals shall be connected to sensor system as per manufacturers instructions.Rate quoted shall include cost of urinals inlet and outlet pipes, auto censor flushing cistern, breaking andmaking good the walls and flooring, making inlet and outlet connections, painting exposed brackets andGI pipes etc.1.8 HALF ROUND CHANNEL1.8.1 Half round channel shall be plain or with stop end and shall have internal dia of 100mm, approved by theEngineer-in-charge. The jointing work shall be done with white cement slurry. The drains shall beprovided with proper slopes as indicated in drawings or as specified by the Engineer-in-charge. Channelshall be covered with matching tiles leaving provision for cleaning the same.1.9 H.C.I. NAHANI TRAP (FLOOR TRAP)1.9.1 Nahani trap shall be of heavy cast iron as per IS : 3989 with 100 mm inlet and 80/100mm outlet with CPpressed steel grating. It shall of self – cleaning design. (Grating shall be of either hinged or screwed downtype).

77It shall be fixed in cement mortar 1:2 and as directed by Engineer-in-charge / Consultant.1.10. STONEWARE GULLY TRAP CHAMBER1.10.1 The square mouth gully trap shall be of 100mm dia, conforming to IS:651 of specified and / or approvedquality stoneware, complete with cast iron grating, and shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-charge.The size of CI frame and cover shall be 300mm x 300mm. It shall be properly fixed as directed by theEngineer-in-charge.The size of the chamber shall be 300 x 300 x 675mm (internal). It shall be constructed of brick masonrywalls 115mm tk. In 1:4 cement mortar and M-15 concrete foundations. Inside and outside faces of themasonry walls shall be plastered with 1:3 cement mortar. The top of the chamber shall be provided withCI cover and frame.1.11 BRICK MASONRY (MANHOLES / INSPECTION CHAMBER & VALVE CHAMBER)1.11.1 The size of the manholes and valve chambers shall be as specified in the drawings. It shall be constructedof brick masonry (class 50 bricks) walls 230mm thick in CM 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) resting on M-15concrete foundations. The inside and outside face of the masonry wall shall be plastered with 13mm thickplaster of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 sand).The top of the chamber shall be provided with reinforced concrete M-20 grade slab as per drawing anddirections of the Engineer-in-charge.MS rungs made out of 16 mm dia MS bars shall be fixed inside the manhole as shown in the drawing anddirections of the Engineer-in-charge.Valve chambers shall be provided and fixed with a light duty CI cover and frame.The top of chambers shall be provided with reinforced cement concrete M-15 grade as per drawings anddirection of Engineer-in-charge.The CI manhole covers and frames shall conform to IS: 726. The type, size and grade shall be as perdrawing and directions of the Engineer-in-charge.The frame shall be fixed in position during concreting of top slab, inside faces of frame and cover shall begiven tow coats of approved anti-corrosive, paint.The specification for brick masonry, plastering, concreting, excavation and backfilling etc., as given underrelevant clauses shall be applicable for this work also.1.12 WASHBASINWash basins shall be 550 x 400 mm white vitreous china or Oval shape Counter Basin Catalogue No. asshown in drawing of 1st quality with three tap holes, or with single tap hole or the size as given in Scopeof Work. These shall be free from cracks, crazes, blisters and shall have smooth surfaces.1.13 FIXINGThe basins shall be supported on a pair of CI brackets cantilevering from wall face as directed by theConsultants There shall be no gap between top edge of the basin and finished face of wall1.14 PILLAR TAPPillar tap shall be 15mm dia CP brass AOS make with auto censor.

781.15 ANGLE VALVEAngle valve shall be 15mm dia brass with 15mm dia brass inlet tube of required length with union and CPbrass cap for each of the two pillar tapsThe connection between angle valve and supply line laid in chase shall be made in a manner so that theunion is flush with finished face of the wall and so threaded that portion of the angle valve of supply isvisible1.16 WASTEWaste shall be 32mm dia CP brass heavy type with solid rubber plug and bail chain.1.17. BOTTLE TRAP1.18 SINKBottle trap 32mm of approved quality.Sink shall be SS sink with drain bolt and granite platform in sides built in 20mm tk. Polished granite ofBlack color / platform of size specified in schedule with integral over flow and shall have 40mm Diaoutlet and shall be connected to 40 mm Dia. GI waste pipe.1.19 FIXINGThese shall be fixed in stone counter. The joint between the sink & stone shall be filled with Araldite fillerto make it absolutely watertight1.20 C.P.BRASS FITTINGSC.P. Brass fittings shall be CP brass comprising of long body BIB cocks of 15mm, CP brass angle valveswith CP inlet tube and CP brass cap.2. TOILET REQUISITES2.1 MIRROR2.2. FIXINGMirror shall be approved make and of best quality. These shall be free from bubbles, ripples or any otherdefects. The glass shall be uniform silver plated at the back. Size shall be 450 x 600 mm as specified indrawing. These shall have plastic frame all around with keyhole to wall with screw for hanging asdirected by the Consultants / Engineer-in-charge.The mirror shall be fixed on wall face with wooden cleats, with CP brass screws and washers, above thelavatory basins at the height, as directed by the Consultants / Engineer-in-charge.2.3 TOWEL RAILTowel rail shall be of CP brass 600 mm long, 20 mm dia with 2 CP brass brackets or size specified indrawing2.4 FIXINGBrackets shall be fixed to wall by means of CP brass screws to wooden plugs or raw plugs, embedded inthe wall or as directed by the Consultants2.5 BIB COCK – TWO IN ONE HEALTH FAUCITBib cock of two in one shall be of 15mm CP brass with 1 long PVC pipe with health faucit.

793 SOIL, WASTE, RAIN WATER, VENT AND ANTI-SIPHONAGE PIPES & FITTINGS:3 1 All soil, waste and anti-siphonage pipes and fittings used within sunken floor areas or within plumbingshafts vertical run, shall be cast iron socket and spigot type pipe conforming to IS 1729 - 1967 or itssubsequent revision All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be of the best approved Indian make of soilvariety preferably of spun quality and hot dipped in Dr Angus Smith Solution and free from flaws, airbubbles, cracks, sand-holes and other defects, truly cylindrical and uniform in thickness They shall not bebrittle but shall allow for heavy cutting chipping and drilling but shall not be less than 6mm thick and ofthe diameter, mentioned in the schedule of quantities They shall be of the largest length available andshall be fixed against the wall on special ‘U’ clamps - 25mm wide 3mm thick and hot dip galvanized bymeans of round headed flat nail of 75mm long on brick wall. In case of hollow block wall or brickmasonry walls (if so specified) - 50 x 50 x 75 long teak wood bats soaked in bitumen paint should be firstfixed to the wall Pipes shall be fixed against these wooden blocks as above by clamps and nails3.2 Jointing shall be carried out with molten lead. The spigot of the pipe must be forced well home into itssocket and must be entered, so that the joint may be of even thickness all round. Atleast, one complete lapof clean white hemp spun yarn shall be drawn into the socket without being forced through the joint intothe pipe Lead shall then be poured into the joint and caulked tight The joint shall then be run with moltenlead in sufficient quantity so that after being caulked solid, the lead may project 3mm beyond the face ofthe socket against the outside of the spigot but must be flush with the outside edge of the socket.Minimum quantity of lead per joint for 100 and 75mm dia pipes shall be 1.8kg and 1.36 kg respectively.3.3 Clean outs at the head of C.I, S/S horizontal pipes running under the floor shall be of cast brass screwed intype. Floor and wall clean outs shall be of cast brass screwed type. The connecting pieces shall be of G.Ithreaded coupling to suit the clean out with lead caulked joint.3.4 Inspection chambers, gully traps, etc within the building i.e. for diversion of pipes at upper flows or onservice floor shall be cast iron chambers with bolts, nuts to close the cover, all to be fabricated as peractual requirement3.5 Supports, pedestal and base for inspection chambers, gully traps and pipes when provided as per aboveshall be in 1:2:4 cement concrete mix3.6 Pipe sleeves and inserts, etc. through RCC walls of buildings either external or internal or for water tanksshall be of C.I. or M.S. provided with water bar flange.3.7 During installation open ends of pipes shall be closed with a plug made of wood, cut in to required shapeand covered with gunny bags to prevent access to dirt in to the pipe3.8 G.I. Waste pipes and fittings shall be ‘C’ class with G.I. unions, tail piece reducers and connections to beprovided between joints to either lead or C.I. Pipes.3.9 W.C. pan connectors shall be to suit the requirements as per drawing, with 40 dia vent horn for connectionto the anti-siphonage pipe Pan connector shall be of C.I. or lead3.10 Connection to the sewer or storm water collection sumps to be perfectly water tight and as specified in thedrawing3.11 Rainwater flashing shall be of 150 X 100 or 230 X 150 fitted on to the bell mouth of rainwater pipes inletand then covered with cast iron grating and extension piece3.12 All rainwater pipes and fittings shall be UPVC type variety conforming to latest IS code.3.13 The floor traps for toilet blocks shall be cast iron with CP brass grating, bolted down design. The trapsshall be provided with minimum water seals of 40 to 50 mm.3.14 Where toilet slabs are sunk, the floor trap shall be of 100 x 75 heavy duty type C.I ‘P’ trap, with C PBrass grating, bolted down design3.15 Bathroom CP grating shall be of bolted down design out of heavy cast brass with chromium plating of thebest approved standard

803.16 Cast iron gratings shall be flat with perfect edge and of the best quality procurable of the specified widthand thickness and in the available lengths3.17 FLOOR TRAPS3.18 FIXINGFloor traps shall be deep seal, ‘P’ or ‘S’ type of approved make with CP brass gratings.The traps shall be placed in position and encased all around with 150 mm thick concrete 1:2:4 whenevernecessary vertical pieces with sockets shall be joined to traps to accommodate CP brass gratings.3.19 BALL VALVEThese shall be brass heavy quality with plastic floats of size that of the inlet pipe to the over head tank.4. EXTERNAL SEWERAGEThe work under this section shall consists of furnishing all labour, material, equipments and appliancesnecessary and required to completing install the sewerage system as specified hereinafter shown in thedrawings.4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSa) All materials shall be new and of the best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the approvalof the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.b) Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and profiles.c) All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local municipal bye laws.d) The contractor shall take necessary permissions from the local traffic police, and civic and othercompetent local authorities for cutting the main/municipal roads, closing and road/street to vehiculartraffic for laying his services. The contractor shall not be liable for any extra payment on this account.e) Location of all manholes, catch basins etc., shall be got confirmed from the Consultant / Engineer-inchargebefore the actual execution of work at site.f) All works shall be executed as per approved drawings, working drawings or as directed by the Consultant/ Engineer-in-charge.4.1.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADIENT.The sewer drainage pipes shall be laid to alignment and gradient shown on the drawings but subject tosuch modifications as shall be ordered by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge from time to time to meetthe requirements of the works. No deviation from the lines, depth of cutting or gradients of sewers shownon the plans and sections shall be permitted except by the express direction in writing of theConsultant/Engineer-in-charge.4.1.2 EXCAVATIONThe excavation for sewer works shall be open cutting unless the permission of the Consultant / Engineerin-chargefor the ground to be tunneled is obtained in writing Where sewers have to be constructed alongnarrow passages, the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge may order the excavation to be made partly intunnel and in such cases the excavated soil shall be brought back later on for refilling the trenches ortunnel4.1.3 OBSTRUCTION OF ROADSThe contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the width of any roador street and sufficient space shall be then left (or public and private transit, and he shall remove thematerials excavated and bring them back again when the trench is required to be refilled. The contractorshall obtain the consent of the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge in writing before closing any road tovehicular traffic and the foot walks must be clear at all times.

814.1.4 EXCAVATION TO BE TAKEN TO PROPER DEPTHThe trenches shall be excavated to such a depth that the sewer shall rest on concrete as described in theseveral clauses relating there to and so that the inverts may be at the levels given in the sections In badground, the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge may order the contractor to excavate to a greater depth thanthat shown on the drawings and to fill up excavation to the level of the sewers with the concrete, brokenstone gravel or other materials4.1.5 REFILLINGAfter the sewer or other works has been laid and proved to be water tight, the trench or other excavationshall be refilled Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no damage shall be caused to the sewerand other permanent work. The filling in the haunches and up to 75 cms. above the crown of the sewershall consist of the finest selected materials placed carefully in 15 cms. Layers and consolidated. Afterthis has been laid, the trench and other excavation shall be refilled in 15 cms. Layers with materials taken-from the excavation, each layer being watered to assist in the consolidation, unless the Consultant /Engineer-in-charge shall otherwise direct.4.1.6 CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGESThe contractor shall at his own costs and charges make good promptly during the whole period for theworks in hand any settlement that any occur in the surfaces of roads, berms, footpaths, open spaces etc.whether public or private caused by his trenches or by his other excavations and he shall be liable for anyaccident caused thereby. He shall also, at his own expense and charges, repair and make good any damagedone to building and other property. If in the opinion of the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge, he fails tomake good such works with all practicable despatch, the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge shall be at hisliberty to get the work done by other means and the expenses thereof shall be paid by the contractor ordeducted from any money that may be or become due to him or recovered from in any other manneraccording to the law of land4.1.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS SOILThe contractor shall at his own cost shall provide places inclusive of transportation for disposal of allsurplus materials not required to be used in the works. As each trench is refilled the surplus soil shall beimmediately removed and the surface properly restored the roadways and sides shall be left clear.4.1.8 TIMBERING OF SEWERS AND TRENCHESa) The contractor shall at all times support efficiently and effectively the sides of the sewer trenches andother excavations by suitable timbering, piling and sheeting and they shall be closed, timbered in loose orsandy strata and below the surface of the sub soil water levelb) All timbering sheeting and piling with their wallings and supports shall be of adequate dimension andstrength and fully braced and strutted so that no risk of collapse of subsidence of the wall of the trenchshall take placec) The contractor shall he held responsible and will be accountable for the insufficiency of all timberingsheeting and pilling used as also for all damage to persons and property resulting form improper quality,strength, maintaining or removing of the same4.1.9 SHORING OF BUILDINGSThe contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other structures, the stability of which is liable to beendangered by the work and shall be fully responsible for all damages to persons or property resultingfrom any accidents4.1.10 REMOVAL OF WATER FROM SEWERS AND TRENCHES

82a) The contractor shall at all times during the progress of the work keep the trenches and excavations freefrom water which shall be disposed of by him in the manner as will neither cause injury to the publichealth nor to the public or private property nor the work completed or in progress nor to the surface of anyroads or streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by the public.b) if any excavation is carried out at any point or points to a greater width than specified cross section ofthe sewer with its envelope, the full width of the trench shall be filled with concrete by the contractor athis own expense and charges to the requirements of the Consultant4.1.11 WIDTH OF TRENCHESThe Consultant shall have power by giving an order in writing to the contractor to increase the maximumwidth in respect of which payment will be allowed for excavation in trenches for various classes of sewer,manholes and other works in certain lengths to be specifically laid down by him where on account of badground or other unusual conditions, he considers that such increased widths are necessary in view of thesite conditions.4.1.12 RECOMMENDED WIDTH OF TRENCHES at the bottom of the trench are as follows:-100 mm dia pipe 55 cms150 mm dia pipe 55 cms225 - 250 mm dia pipe 60 cms300 mm dia pipe 75 cmsMaximum width of the bed concrete shall also be as above. No additional payment is admissible forwidths greater than specified.4.2 SALT GLAZED STONEWARE PIPESStoneware pipes shall be of first class quality salt glazed and free from rough texture inside and outsideand straight. All pipes shall have the manufacturers names marked on it and shall comply to IS : 651 -1971.I) LAYING AND JOINTING OF STONEWARE SALT GLAZED PIPESa) Pipes are liable to be damaged in transit and not with standing tests that may have been made beforedispatching pipe shall be examined carefully on arrival at site. Each pipe shall be rung with a woodenhammer or mallet and those that did not ring true and clear shall be rejected. Sound pipes shall becarefully stacked to prevent damage.b) The pipes shall be laid down with sockets leading uphill and should rest on solid and even foundations forthe full length of the barrel. Socket holes shall be formed in the foundation sufficiently deep to allow thepipe jointer room to work right round the pipe and as short as practicable to admit the socket and allowthe joints to be made.c) Where pipes are not bedded in concrete the trench bottom shall be left slightly high and carefullybottomed up as pipe laying process, so that the pipe barrels rest on firm ground If excavation has beencarried too low it shall be made up with cement concrete at the contractor’s cost and chargesd) If the bottom of the trench consists of rock of very hard ground that cannot be easily excavated to asmooth surface the pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed to ensure even bearingII) JOINTING OF PIPESa) Tarred gaskin shall first be wrapped round the spigot of each pipe and the spigot shall then be placed intothe socket of the pipe previously laid, the pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in its correct positions andthe gasking caulked tightly home so as to fill not more than on quarter of the total length of the socketb) The remainder of the socket shall be filled with stiff mix of cement mortar (1 cement: 1 clear sharpwashed sand) When the socket is filled, a fillet should be formed round the joint with a trowel forming anangle of 45 degrees with the barrel of the pipe. The mortar shall be mixed as needed for immediate useand no mortar shall be beaten up and used after it has begun to set.c) After the joint has been made, any extraneous material shall be removed from inside of the joint with asuitable scraper or badgar. The newly made joints shall be protected until set from the sun, drying winds,rains or dust. Sacking or other materialist which can keep damp shall be used. The joints shall be exposed

83and space left all round the pipes for inspection by the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge. The inside of thesewer must be left absolutely clear in bore and free from cement mortar or other obstructions throughout itentire length, and shall efficiently drain and discharge.III)TESTINGa) All lengths of the sewer drain shall be fully tested for water tightness by means of water pressuremaintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole. All pipesshall be subjected to a test pressure of atleast 1.5 M head of water. The test pressure shall, however, notexceed 6 M head at any point. The pipes shall be plugged preferably with standard design plugs withrubber plugs on both sides. The upper end shall, however, be connected to a pipe for filling with waterand getting the required head poured at one time.b) Sewer lines shall be tested for a straightness by :-i) Inserting a smooth ball 12 mm less than the internal diameter of the pipe.In the absence of obstruction such as yarn or mortar projecting at the joints the ball should roll down theinvert of the pipe and emerge at the lower end.ii)iii)iv)Means of a mirror at one end and a lamp at the other end. If the pipe line is straight the full circle of lightwill be seen otherwise obstructions or deviations will be apparent.The contractor shall give a smoke test to the drain and sewer at his own expense and charges, if directedby the Consultant / Engineer-in-charge.A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by the Contractor, Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.4.3 MASONRY WORKMasonry work for manhole, chambers, specific tanks and such other works as required shall beconstructed from local best quality bricks in cement mortar 1:5 mix (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) or asspecified in the schedule of quantities All joints shall be properly raked to receive plaster.4.4 TESTINGAll pipes shall be tested to a hydraulic test of 1.5 M head for atleast 30 minutes at the highest point in thesection under test. Test shall be carried out similar to those for stoneware pipes given above. The smoketest shall be carried out by the contractor, if directed by the Consultant, at the expense and charges of thecontractor. A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by the contractor. Theworks failing during the test have to be redone by the contractor and nothing extra shall be payable to hison this account. The cement wasted in dismantling and redoing works shall be recovered from thecontractor at double the recovery rates4.5 LEAD CAULKED JOINTS FOR C.I. PIPESThe exterior of the socket and exterior of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried up. The spigotshall be inserted into the socket right up to the back of the socket and carefully centred by 2 or 3 times ofspun yarn well caulked into the back of the socket. No piece of the yarn shall be shorter than thecircumstance of the pipe The depth of pig lead for various diameters of C.I. pipes and specials shall be asfollows:-Normal sizeof pipe in mm100 mm150 mm200 mm250mmDepth of leadjoint in mm45505050

844.5.1 LEADING IN C.I. PIPESThe leading of the pipes shall be made by means of ropes covered with clay. The lead shall be melted soas to be thoroughly fluid and each joint shall be filled in one pouring. After the lead has been run into thejoint, the lead shall be thoroughly caulked. The rope in leading ring shall be removed and any lead outsidethe socket shall be removed with a flat chisel and then the joint caulked around 3 times with caulking tooland hammer.4.5.2 DROP CONNECTIONShall be provided between branch sewer and main sewer on or in the main sewer itself in steep groundwhen the difference in invert level of the two exceeds 45 cms.4.6 S.W. GULLY TRAP4.6.2 Fixing:Gully traps shall conform to IS 65-1965. These shall be sound, free from visible defects such as finecracks or hair cracks. The glaze of the traps shall be free from graze. They shall give a sharp clear notewhen struck with light hammer. There shall be no broken blisters.The size of the gully trap shall be specified along with dimension and shall be installed in a chamber asdescribed hereafterEach gully trap shall have a C.I. grating of square size corresponding to the dimensions of inlet of gullytrap. It will also have a watertight C.I. cover weighing not less than 2.72 kg. The grating cover & frameshall be sound & good casting and shall have truly square machined seating faces.The excavation for gully traps shall be done true to dimensions and levels as indicated on plans or asdirected by the Engineer - in-chargeThe gully trap shall be fixed on cement concrete foundation 600 x 600 cm square and not less than 10cm.thick The mix for the concrete will be 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40mmnominal size) The jointing of gully outlet to the branch drain shall be done similar to jointing of S W pipeas directed in 2134.6.3 Brick Masonry Chamber:After fixing and testing gully and branch drain, a brick masonry chamber 300 x 200 (in side) (with class50 brick in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 fine sand) shall be built with a 115mm thick brick work roundthe gully trap from the top of the bed concrete upto ground level. The space between the chamber wallsand the trap shall be filled in with cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 course sand: 10 graded stoneaggregate). The upper portion of the chamber i.e. above the top level of the trap shall be plastered insidewith cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) finished with a floating coat of neat cement, the cornersand bottom to the chamber shall be rounded off as to slope towards the grating and form a hopper.C.I. cover with frame 300 x 200 mm (inside) shall then be fixed on the top of the brick masonry withcement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement 2 coarse: 4 graded stone aggregate 20mm normal size) and renderedsmooth The finished top of cover shall be left about 4 cm. above the adjoining ground level so as excludethe surface water from entering the gully trap.EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY:5. SCOPE OF WORKThe work shall consist of furnishing all materials Labour equipment and appliances necessary andrequired to completely install the water supply system as required by the Drawings.Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the water supply system shall include the following:

85a) Water supply mains and sub mainsb) Control valvesc) Masonry chambers and other appurtenancesd) Excavation and refilling pipe trenchese) Concrete anchor blocksf) Ferrules, Ferrule chambers G.I. pipe below ground from ferrule to outer face of the building upto finished ground level.5.1.1 CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGESThe contractor shall, at his own cost, make good during the whole period the works are in hand and duringdefect liability period thereafter, any settlement that may occur on the surfaces of roads, beams, footpaths,gardens, open spaces etc., whether public or private caused by trenches or by other excavations and shallbe liable for any accidents caused thereby He shall also, at his own expense and charges, repair and makegood any damage done to buildings and other property. If in the opinion of the Consultant/Engineer-incharge,he fails to make such works with all practicable dispatch, the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge shallbe at liberty to get the work done by other means and the expenses thereof shall be paid by the contractoror deducted from any money that may be or become due to him or recovered from him in any othermanner according to the law of the land5.1.2 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS SOILThe contractor shall at his own cost shall provide places inclusive of transportation for disposal of allsurplus materials not required to be used in the works. As each trench is refilled the surplus soil shall beimmediately removed and the surface properly restored the roadways and sides shall be left clear.5.2.1 Trenches: The width and depth of trenches for different diameter of G.I under-Dia of PipeWidth of trench Depth of trencha) 15 to 50 mm 39 cm 60cmb) up to 100 mm 50cm 90cmc) Over 100 mm 60cm 90cmAt joints the width of trench shall be widened where necessary5.2.2 CUTTING AND THREADINGWhere pipes have been or re-threaded the ends shall be carefully filled out so that no obstruction to flowis offered the ends of pipes shall then be carefully threaded, in such a manner as will not result inslackness or joints.5.2.3 JOINTINGScrewed steel pipes shall be jointed with screwed and socket joints using screwed fittings of wrought iron,steel or malleable cast iron The pipes shall be cleaned and cleared of all foreign matter and may burrsfrom the ends or pipes removed before laying. In joining the pipes, the inside of the socket and thescrewed and the screwed and of the pipe shall be oiled and rubbed over with white lead and a few strandsof fine yarn or thread wrapped round the screwed in the socket, tee etc. Care shall be taken that all thepipes and fittings are properly jointed so as to make the joints completely water tight.5.2.3 PROTECTIONG.I. pipes below ground shall be protected against corrosion by the application of two coats of bitumenpaint covered with polyethylene tape and a final coat of anticorrosive bitumen paint

865.2.4 TRENCH FILLING OF G.I. PIPESThe pipe shall be laid on layer of 10 cm sand and filled up to 15 cm above the pipes The remainingportion of the trench shall than be filled with excavated earth and the surplus earth shall be disposed off asdirected by Engineer-in-charge/Consultant The pipes shall be embedded in sand or soft soil free from rockand gargle and where the pipe lime crosses a road or a drain, it shall be through RCC pipe5.2.5 FERRULE CONNECTIONFerrule connection shall be inclusive of necessary excavation, boring a hole in cast iron mains, tapping itproviding necessary saddles, and bailing out of water.5.2.6 TESTINGa) On completion the pipe line laying shall be tested to a Hydraulic pressure of 7 kg/sq.cm. (70 meter),Pressure shall be maintained for a period of two hours without drop. Any joint found leaking shall beredone and all leaking pipes removed and replaced Testing shall be done before the trenches are refilled.The contractor shall arrange all the equipment required for testing and the rate quoted shall be deemed tobe inclusive of this cost.b) Contractor shall maintain a test register and tests shall be recorded in it. The entries shall be signed anddated by Consultant, Project manager and contractor. This register shall be handed over to the projectManager on completion of work.c) G. I. pipes shall be measured per linear meter (to be nearest centimeter) and shall be inclusive of allfittings, earth work, pipe protection and other items as specified.5.3 FERRULESThe ferrules for connection with CI shall generally conform to IS 2692: 1964. It shall be of non ferrousmaterials with CI bell mouth cover and shall be nominal bore as specified. The ferrule shall be fitted withscrew and plug or valve capable of completely shutting off the water supply to communication pipe as andwhen required.5.4 VALVE CHAMBERSContractor shall provide suitable brick masonry chambers in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand)on cement concrete foundations 150 mm thick 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand: 10 graded stone aggregate40 mm nominal size) 15 mm thick cement plaster inside and outside finished with a floating coat of neatcement inside with cast iron surface box including excavation, back filling completea) Valve chambers shall be of following sizes :-For depths 90 cms.For depths up to 100 cms. beyond60 x 60 cms120 x 120 cms5.5 TESTINGa) All pipes, fittings and valves shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure of 7 kg./sq.cm.b) Pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least two hours without appreciable drop in the pressureafter fixing at site (+/ -, 10%)c) At least register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by contractor(s) andConsultant/Engineer-in-charge.d) In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction, contractor shall test the entireinstallation after connections to the overhead tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify allleakage, and shall replace all defective materials in the system. Any damage done due to carelessness,

87open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building, furniture and fixtures shall be made good duringthe defects liability period without any extra cost.e) After commissioning of the water supply system, contractor shall test valve by closing and opening it anumber of times to observe if it is working efficiently. Valves which do not effectively operate shall bereplaced by new ones at no extra cost and the same shall be tested as above.5.6 DISINFECTIONa) After completion of the work, contractor shall flush clean the entire system with the City’s filtered waterafter connection has been made.b) After the first flushing, add commercial bleaching powder to achieve a dosage of 2 to 3 mg/Ltr of water inthe system and flushed. This operation should be performed twice to ensure that the system is fullydisinfected and usable.5.7 PRE-COMMISSIONINGa) Ensure that all pipes are free from debris and obstructionsb) Check all valves and for effective opening and closing action Defects should be rectified or valvesreplacedc) Ensure that all connection to branches have been maded) Ensure that mains have been connected to the respective pumps, underground and overhead tankse) Water supply should be available at main underground tankf) All main line valves should be closed5.7.1 COMMISSIONINGa) Fill underground tank with water Add 1 kg of fresh bleaching powder after making a solution, to be addednear inletb) Start water supply pump and allow water to fill main under ground tank Water will first fill the fire tankand then overflow to the domestic tanks.c) After overhead reservoir drain the same to its one forth capacity through tank scour valve. This is toensure removal of all mud, debris, etc. in the tankd) Fill overhead tank to fulle) Release water in the main lines by opened valves in each circuit Drain out water in the system throughscour valves in lower regions Ensure clean water is now coming out of the systemf) Open valves for individual sectors Observe for leakages or malfunctions, check pressure and flow at endof line by opening hydrants etc., remove and rectify defects notice.g) The entire water supply system should be disinfected with bleaching powder and system flush clean.h) Send four samples of water drawn from four extreme locations for testing for bacteriological test insterilized bottles obtained from the concerned laboratory. Laboratory personal may collect the samplesthemselves.5.7.2 RESPONSIBILITY:Responsibility for various activities in pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures will rest withthe contractor.STORM DRAINS6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTSa) All materials shall be new and of the best quality conforming to specification and subject to the approvalof the Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.b) Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and profiles.c) All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local municipal by laws.d) Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the drainage system from the municipal orany other competent authority.

88e) Location of all manholes, catch basins etc., shall be got confirmed by the Consultants before the actualexecution of work at site.f) All works shall be executed as directed by Consultants.6.1 RUBBLE MASONRYAs specified under item No. 6.3 of civil works for rubble masonry with black granite stones.6.2 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PIPESUnderground storm water drainage NP2 pipes shall be centrifugally spun RCC pipes of specified size.Pipes shall be true and straight with uniform bore throughout. Cracked, warped pipes shall not be used onthe work. All pipes shall be tested by manufacturer and the contractor shall produce, when directed acertificate to the effect from the manufacturer.6.3 TESTINGAll pipes shall be tested to a hydraulic test of 1.5 M head for atleast 30 minutes at the highest point in thesection under test. Test shall be carried out similar to those for stoneware pipes given above The smoketest shall be carried out by the contractor, if directed by the Consultant, at the expense and charges of thecontractor. A test register shall be carried out similar to those for stoneware pipes given above. The smoketest shall be carried out by the contractor, if directed by the Consultant, at the expense and charges of thecontractor. A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by theContractor/Consultant.6.4 PRE CAST SLABSPre cast layer slabs shall be casted in RCC 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 sand: 4 coarse aggregate of 20 mmaggregate) and shall be placed over RR masonry drain as per drawing.

8919. LIST OF APPROVED MAKES/AGENCY OF MATERIALS(For Sanitary work)The following guidelines are to be noted with regard to use of materials in the work.1 As far as possible, materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" from Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS) shallbe used in the work, unless make is specifically mentioned in Schedule of rate/ scope.2 Wherever, material bearing Standard Mark (ISI) are used the work, the following shall be ensured.a) The supplier has a valid license from BIS during the period the material is being used in the work.b) The Contractor should furnish necessary documents and proof of payments made for the procurementof materials bearing Standard Mark (ISI).3. Due to non-availability of materials bearing ISI mark as detailed in para-2 above, the materials as perthe list of approved makes of materials shall be used in the work and the Contractor can use any ofmakes given in the attached list.4. In case it is established that Standard material (bearing ISI mark) as well as the materials indicated inthe list (as mentioned in the above para) are not available in the market, then approved equivalentmaterials may be used in the work subject to approval from the consultant and Engineer-in-Charge.5. For materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" ordinarily no testing is to be done. However, in case ofdoubt or with a view to check the quality of materials, Engineer-in-Charge may send samples forrandom testing.6. For use of materials other than materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" Mandatory tests shall beconducted at the frequency specified in the contract. In case frequency of testing is not stipulated in thecontract then standard specification (CPWD, ISI etc.) may be considered for frequency at whichmaterials are to be tested.7. Before bulk purchase of quantities of materials, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to getthe samples of materials approved from consultant and Engineer-in-Charge

90Sr.No. MATERIALS APPROVED MAKE/AGENCY1 Vitreous china sanitary ware Hindustan(hindware), Toto2 Plastic W.C Seat cover - NA Commander, kingston, Diplomat,B t lit3 C.P Fittings/Accessories Jaquar, MARC.4 PVC Pipes & fittings Supreme, Prince, Sudhakar5 G.I Pipes `B’ class Tata, Zenith, Jindal7 Gunmetal Valves (fullway check L & K brand by L.K. Industries,and globe valves)/fittings – as per Mathura, Leader Brand byISI 981Leader Engg. Works Jullunder,Zoloto8 Bib cock & angle/stop cocks Jaquar, MARC.(brass), health faucets etc.10 Stone ware pipes & gully traps –as per ISI11 Manhole C.I cover and frame NECO, BIC12 CI pipes and fittings NECO, BICPerfect Potteries BharatpurBurn potteries Jabalpur16 Hand Drier Kopal , Askon, Technocrat17 HDPE Water tank Sintex or equivalent18 Liquid soap dispensor Kimberly Clarke19 Auto sensor pillor cock battery AOS (Doppler)operated20 Urinal flush sensor AOS concealed type21 Toilet Accessories Jaguar, Marc

1II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFORELECTRICAL WORKS

2TECHNICAL CONDITIONS1.1 These special conditions shall be read in conjunction with the description of the item of work in the Bill(s) of Quantities, the particular Specifications, Local Statutory Regulations Indian StandardsSpecifications Codes and the drawings. All the above quoted documents shall be consideredsupplementary to each other. However, in the case of conflict amongst the various provisions theEngineer-in-charge’s and the Consultants opinion will be final and shall be adopted.1.2 The tenderer is advised to inspect the site to ascertain the nature of site, access thereto, local facilities forprocurement of materials and working labor rates prevalent in the area, in fact all matters affecting hisprices and execution of the work. The tenderer shall be deemed to have full knowledge of the site anddrawings whether or not he actually inspects them.2. Rates2.1 The rates quoted shall be deemed to allow for all minor extras and constructional details which are notspecifically shown on drawings or given on the specifications but are essential in the opinion of theEngineer-in-charge to the execution of works to confirm to good workmanship and sound engineeringpractice. The Consultant/Employer reserves the right to make any minor changes during the executionwithout any extra payment.2.2 The Consultants decision to clarify any item-under minor changes, minor extras and constructional detailsshall be final, conclusive and binding on the Contractor.2.3 The rates quoted by the Contractor shall be net so as to include all requirements described in the contractagreement and no claim whatsoever due to fluctuations in the price of material and labour will beentertained.2.4 The rates quoted by the Contractor shall include for supplying materials and labour necessary forcompleting the work in the best and most workmanship like manner to the satisfaction of theConsultant/Employer and which in the opinion of the Consultant cannot be made better, and formaintaining the same. The rates shall be complete in all respects also including cost of materials, erection,fabrication, labour, supervision, tools and plant transport, sales and other taxes royalties, duties andmaterials, contingencies, breakage, wastage, sundries, scaffoldings, etc. on the basis of works contract.The rates quoted shall include all taxes, duties, transport, insurance, control, or any other levies applicableunder the statute.3. Materials:3.1 The Contractor shall ensure to the satisfaction of the Consultant Employer that the materials arc packed inoriginal sealed containers/packing bearing manufacturer’s markings and brands etc. except where thegross quantity required is a fraction of the smallest pickings Materials not complying with thisrequirement shall be rejected.3.2 Testing of Materials:a) When required by the Consultant, the Contractor shall provide all facilities at site or at manufacturer’sworks or in an approved laboratory for testing the materials and/or workmanship All the expenditure inrespect of this shall be borne by the Contractor unless specified otherwise in the Contract The Contractorshall, when required to do so by the Consultant shall submit at his own cost, manufacturer’s certificate oftests, proof sheets, mill sheets etc., showing that the materials have been tested in accordance withrequirements of these specifications The samples for Tests shall be selected by the Client/Consultant4. Rectification of Defects:4.1 Any defect in the work done or materials used in the works pointed out by the Consultant shall berectified within a week by the contractor or such extended time as may be allowed in this failing, theConsultant is authorized to rectify the same and the estimation for the said will be deducted from thecontractor.

35. Conduit and Cables Layout:5.1 Prior to the pulling of wires, the Contractor shall verify the conduits laid at site by Contractors and satisfythemselves about the adequacy of the same. The contractors shall prepare Wiring layout along withConduit layout and submit for approval. Prior to laying of the cables, the Contractor shall submit to theConsultant detailed layout plans of the cable net work and get the same approved. The layout plans shallcontain particulars regarding site and routes of the cables. The Cables shall be procured only afterapproval of Layout Drawings.6. Regulations & Standards:6.1 The installation shall conform in all respects to Indian Standard Code of Practice for Electrical WiringInstallation IS:732| and IS:2274. It shall also be in conformity with the current Indian Electricity Rulesand Regulations and requirements of the local Electric Supply Authority in so far as these becomeapplicable to the installation. Wherever this specification calls for higher standard of material and/orworkmanship than those required by any of the above regulations then this specification shall takeprecedence over the said- regulations and standard.7. Shop Drawings:7.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Consultant for the approval of detailed fabricationdrawings for Main LT Panels / Switchgears / Rising Mains special boxes and Distribution Board, switchboard special any other equipment to be fabricated by Contractor within 60 days of signing of thecontract.8. Completion Drawings:8.1 At the completion of the work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion the contractor shallsubmit to the consultant/Employer layout drawings drawn at approved scale indicating the completewiring system “As Installed”. These drawings shall in particular, give the following information.a. Run and size of conduits, inspection, junction and pull boxesb. Location and rating of sockets and switches, controlling the light and power outlets.c. Number and size of conductors in each circuit.d. Location & details of distribution boards, mains, switches, switchgear & other particulars.e. A complete wiring diagram, as installed and schematic drawings showing all connections in thecomplete electrical system.f. Location of telephone outlets. T. V. Music & Fire Alarm outlet boxes, junctions boxes, sizes ofvarious conduits.g. Locations of all earthing stations routs and size of all earthing conductors manholes etc.h. Layout and particulars of all cables.9. Manufacturer’s Instruction9.1 Where manufacturers have furnished specific instructions, rating to the materials used in this job,covering points not specifically mentioned in the documents, these instructions shall be followed in allcases.10. Completion Certificate:10.1 On completion of the Electrical Installation a certificate shall be furnished by the Contractor countersigned by a licensed supervisor, under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out.This certificate shall be in the prescribed form as required by the local supply authority. The Contractorshall be responsible for getting the drawings and Electrical Installation inspected and approved by thelocal Authority concerned.

411. Qualified Competent Supervision:11.1 The Contractor shall employ competent fully licensed, qualified full time Engineer to direct the work ofElectrical installation in accordance with drawings and specifications. The Engineer shall be available atall times on the site to receive instructions from Consultant in the day today activities, through out theduration of the contract. The foremen shall co-relate the progress of the work in conjunction with allrelevant requirements of the supply authorities.12. Approval from SEB/ Electrical Inspectorate:The Contractor shall prepare and submit all the relevant drawings as per the Requirement of APTRANSCO & Electrical Inspectorate and obtain the Approvals from CEIG No incidental expenses will bepaid towards the same. Only statutory fees if any will be paid by GAIL.

5TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS1. Scope:CHAPTER 1INTERNAL WIR1NGThis specification is intended to cover the requirements of supply, installation testing and commissioningof electrical wiring installation and other accessories required for its satisfactory operation This covers theessential requirements or precautions regarding wiring installations for ensuring satisfactory and reliableservice.2. Standards:The Electrical wiring installations and other accessories shall comply with latest IS - 732 -1989 andNational Electrical code - 1985.3 ConstructionWall mounted lighting switch boards shall be installed such that the bottom is at a minimum height of1.35 m above finished floor level wherever applicable, as indicated in the drawing.Equipment which is on the front of a switchboard shall be so arranged that inadvertent personnel contactwith live parts is unlikely during the manipulation of switches, changing of fuses or similar operation.In every case in which MCBs are fitted on the same pole, these MCBs shall be so arranged that the MCBsare not live when their respective switches are in ‘OFF’ position.No MCBs other than MCBs in instrument circuit shall be fixed on the back or behind a switchboard panelor frame.4. Capacity of circuitLighting Circuits shall not have more than a total of ten points of fans, 5A socket outlets and light pointsand its total load shall not exceed 800 watts. Lights, fans, and 5A socket outlets can be wired on a singlecommon circuit. If fan circuit is drawn separately, circuit shall not be used more than eight points andload shall not exceed more than 800 watts. In the circuit, the neutral and earth wires can be looped up to l0points (.) From distribution boards Neutral & Earth wires shall be run for every circuit.The power circuits shall not have more than two outlets per circuit if load to he fed by each outlet is lessthan 1 KW and if load is more than 2 KW each outlet shall be connected to a separate circuit.NOTE : ALL SWITCHES/ SOCKETS ETC. SHALL BE MODULAR TYPE IRRESPECTIVE OFDESCRIPTION IN THIS SPECIFICATIONSSwitches: All switches shall be placed in the live conductor of the circuit and no single pole switch or fuseshall be inserted in the earth or earthed neutral conductor of the circuits. Single pole switches(other than for multiple control carrying not more than 15 amperes may be of the piano flushtype and the switch shall be ‘ON’ when the knob is down.Lamp holders:Lamp holders for use on brackets and the like shall have not less than 1.3 cm nipple and all thosefor use with flexible pendant shall be provided with cord grips. All lamp holders shall beprovided with shade carriers Where center contact Edison screw lamp holders are used, the outeror screw contact shall be connected to the ‘middle wire’ or the neutral or to the earthed conductorof the circuit.Lamps: All incandescent lamps, unless otherwise specified shall be hung at a height of not less than 2.5 m abovethe finished floor level.

6Ceiling rose: a) A ceiling rose or any other similar attachment shall not be used on circuit, the voltage of whichnormally exceeds 250 volts.A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse terminals as an integral part of it.Every socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch. The switch controlling the socket shall be on the ‘live’side of sideline. 5 Amps and 15 Amps socket-outlet shall normally be fixed at any convenient place 60 cmabove the floor level or near such level as indicated in drawing. 15 Amps socket outlets in kitchen shall befixed at convenient place 23cm above the working platform. In a room containing a fixed bath or shower,there shall be no socket outlet and there shall be no provision for connecting a portable appliance.5 Recessed conduit wiring systema) Making of chase the chase in the wall shall neatly be made and shall be of suitable dimension to permitthe conduit to be fixed in the manner desired by the Engineer-in-charge. In the case of buildings underconstruction, chases shall be provided in the wall, ceiling, etc. at the time of their construction and shallbe filled up neatly after erection of conduit and brought to the original finish of the wall.b) Fixing of conduit in chase: The conduit shall be fixed by means of staples or by means of saddles notmore than 600 mm apart. Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as practicable and allcurves maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself with a long radius, which will permit easy drawinginof conductors. All the threaded joints of rigid steel conduits shall be treated with approved preservativecompound to ensure protection against rust.c) Inspection boxes: To permit periodical inspection and to facilitate replacement of wires, suitableinspection boxes shall be provided at convenient locations. They shall be mounted in flush with the wall.The minimum size of inspection boxes shall be 75 x 75 mm. suitable ventilating holes shall be provided inthe inspection box covers.d) Types of accessories to be used. All outlets such as switches and sockets may be either of flush mountingtype or of surface mounting type.The switches and other’ outlets shall be mounted on such boxes The metal box shall be efficiently earthedwith the earth continuity wire run along the conduit.When crossing through expansion joints in buildings, the conduit sections across the joint may be throughflexible copper bellows of the same size as MS conduit. The Number of wires that can be drawn though aconduit shall be strictly as per IS 732 and as mentioned in Drawings6 Conduits:MS conduit shall he black enameled and of thickness not less than 16 SWG and of size minimum 19 mmdia. The Conduit shall conform to IS 95377 Part IIBunching of cables: Separate conduits shall be used for bunching of conductors of AC supply and DCsupply for lighting and small power outlet circuits.All outlets of conduit systems shall be properly drained and ventilated, but in such a manner so as toprevent the entry of insect’s etc. as far as possible.Bends in conduit:Wherever necessary, bends or diversions may be achieved by bending theconduits or by employing normal bends, inspection bends, inspection boxes,elbows or similar fittingsIn case of plain conduit, heat may be used to soften the conduit for bending and forming joints.Positioning of conduit in close proximity to hot surfaces should be avoided.

77. TESTING OF WIRING:The following tests shall be carried out on all types of wiring on completion of the work and beforeenergizing the installation:i. Insulation resistance test.ii. Electrical continuity test,iii. Earth continuity test.iv. Earth electrode resistance test.v. Switch polarity testThe insulation resistance shall be measured by using 500v megger between the following points.Phase and neutral conductor with all fuses in position and all switches in closed condition and mainswitch in OFF position with lamps and other devices removed.Between earth and whole system of conductors with all fuses in place, all switches closed and all lamps inposition.The insulation resistance in megaohm as obtained by each of the above tests shall not he less than 50divided by the number of points on the circuit. Where a whole installation is being tested, a lower valuethan that given by the above formula is acceptable subject to a minimum of one megaohm.(ii)(iii)Electrical continuity test:Each and every circuit shall be tested for electrical continuity by using a multi meter.Earth continuity test:The earth continuity conductor including metal conduit shall be tested for electrical continuity and theresistance of the same along with the earthing lead measured from the connection with the earth electrodeto any point in the earth continuity conductor in the complete installation shall not exceed one ohm.(iv)(v)Earth electrode resistance test:The earth electrode resistance shall be tested as specified in sectionSwitch polarity test:Test shall be made to verify that all switches in every circuit have been fitted in the same conductorthroughout and such conductor shall be marked for connection to the phase conductor.8 Distribution Boards:All the distribution boards shall be with MCBs as described in the respective schedule.A switch fuse, miniature circuit breaker or an isolator as described in the respective schedule shall controlthe distribution boards. Each outgoing circuit shall be provided either with MCB or a fuse on the phase.The neutral shall be connected to a common link and be capable of being disconnected individually fortesting purposes.The distribution boards shall be located as indicated in the respective electrical working drawings and asdirected by Engineer - in - charge. The distribution boards shall be fixed on wall in the niche provided andmarked with the details of circuits, source of supply, size of incoming wires Etc.All marking shall be clear and legibleThe total load of the consuming devices shall be evenly distributed between the numbers of ways ofdistribution board.

8The consuming device circuit shall be connected to distribution board in proper sequence. So as to avoidunnecessary crossing of wires.Cables shall be connected to a terminal only by crimped lugs.Cables shall be rigidly fixed in such a manner that a clearance of at least 2.5cm is maintained betweenconductors of opposite polarity or phase and between the conductors and any material other thaninsulating material.The incoming and outgoing cables shall be neatly bunched.9. MOUNTING HEIGHTS:The Mounting heights of various fixtures shall be as specified in the Drawings

91 Scope:CHAPTER 2POWER CONTROL CENTRES / POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS / MOTORCONTROL CENTRES.This specification is to cover the requirement of design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning ofLT power control centres / main switchboards with all components. Instruments, fittings and accessoriesfor efficient operation without any trouble.NOTE : THE MAIN CABLE SHALL RUN FROM THE SPARE FEEDER IN EXISTINGSUBSTATION TO THE PROPOSED OFFICE BUILDING.2. Standards:The PCC (Power Control Centre) / PDB/ MCC specified herein unless otherwise stated shall conform tothe relevant and latest revisions of Indian standards and Indian Electricity Rules.3. Design and construction:3.1 Design requirements: The power control centres shall be suitable for operation on 440volt, 3 phase,4wire 50 HZ system to withstand a short circuit level of 50 KA RMS symmetrical.The PCC (Power Control Centre) shall be designed for operation in high ambient temperature up to 45degrees centigrade and high humidity up to 95% and tropical atmospheric conditions. Means shall beprovided to facilitate ease of inspection. Maintenance and Servicing.3.2 Constructional requirements:The PCC (Power Control Centre) shall be ofi. Metal clad, cubicle, indoor, free standing type suitable for Mounting on Built up Trenches with UChannels of adequate size.ii. Made up of the requisite vertical sections, which when coupled together shall form continuousdead front switchboard.iii. Dust and damp protected the degree of protection shall be better than IP - 54 as specified in IS-2147.iv. Readily extendable on both sides by the addition of vertical sections after removal of the endcovers.v. Single front construction with the circuit beaker feeder and switch fuse feeders suitable foroperation from the front of the panel.The PCC (Power Control Centre) shall have the feeder ratings as per the schematic diagrams enclosedwith the schedule and constructed only of materials capable of withstanding the mechanical, electrical andthermal stresses as well as the effects of humidify, which are likely to be encountered in normal service.3.3 Vertical Sections each vertical section shall comprise a front framed structure rolled folded sheet steelchannel section of minimum 2mm thickness rigidly bolted together. This structure shall house thecomponents contributing the major weight of the equipment such as circuit breaker, switch fuse units,main horizontal bus bars, vertical risers and other front mounted accessories The structure shall bemounted on a rigid base frame of folded sheet steel of minimum of 2.5 mm thickness and 100mm height.The design shall ensure Structural stability during Transit and also during Operation after CommissioningSuitable cable chamber housing the cable end connections and power / control cable terminations shall beprovided The design shall ensure generous availability of space for ease of installation and maintenance ofcabling and adequate safety for working in one vertical section without coming into accidental contactwith live parts in the adjacent section

10A cover plate at the top of the vertical section shall be provided with necessary ventilating arrangementsAny aperture for ventilation shall be covered with a perforated sheet having less than 1 mm diameterperforations to prevent entry of vermin.3.4 Sheet Steel Cubicle:3.4.1 The sheer steel cubicle shall be designed in fully segregated multitier formation Each cubicle shall havehinged front access door with easy operating fasteners. All the doors and covers shall be heavily gasket tomake the compartment dust tight. Each cubicle shall have a covering at the bottom to make a dust- andvermin roof construction. Door hinges shall be of concealed type.The cubicle shall be of minimum 2mm thick (14 SWG ) sheet steel. Sheet steel shrouds and partitionsshall be of minimum 1.6mm thickness (16SWG). All sheet steelwork forming the exterior of switchboardsshall be smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. The corners shall be rounded. The thickness ofGland plates shall be 3mm.3.4.2 The apparatus and circuits in the power control centers shall be so arranged as to facilitate their operationand maintenance at the same time to ensure the necessary degree of safety.Apparatus forming part of the control centers shall have the following minimum clearance.i. Between phases - 25 mm.ii. Between phase and neutral - 25 mm.iii. Between phases and earth - 25 mm.iv. Between neutral and earth - 19 mmWhen for any reason, the above clearances are not available suitable insulation shall be provided.Clearance shall be maintained during normal service conditions. Creepage distances shall comply withthose specified in relevant standards.3.4.3 All insulating materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be non hygroscopic duly treated towithstand the effect of high humidity high temperature and ironical ambient service conditions3.4.4 Functional units such as circuit beakers and fuse switches shall be arranged in mortifier formation, exceptthat not more than One air circuit breaker housed in a single vertical section3.4.5 Metallic/insulated barriers shall be provided within vertical sections and between adjacent sections toensure prevention of accidental contact with:i. Main bus bars and vertical risers during operation, inspection or maintenance of functional unitsand front connected accessories.ii. Cable terminations of one functional unit, when working on those of adjacent unit/units3.4.6 All doors /covers providing access to live power equipment / circuits shall be provided with tool operatedfasteners to prevent unauthorized access.3.4.7 Provisions shall be made for permanently earthing the frames and other metal parts of the switchgear bytwo independent connections.3.5 Metal treatment and finish:All steel works used in the construction of the switch-boards shall have undergone a suitable rigorousmetal treatment process so as to remove oxide scales and rust formation and to facilitate a durable coatingof the paint on the metal surfaces and also to prevent the spreading of rust, in the event of the paint filmbeing mechanically damaged.Two coats of Anti Corrosive primer followed by a finishing coat of Epoxy spray powder coating of theshade 631 of IS: 5 (i.e., Siemens Grey) shall be given. The total thickness of paint shall not be less than 25micron.

113.6 Bus Bars:3.6.1 The busbars shall be housed in non-segregated sheet steel compartments in the cubicle at convenientlocations with provision for access to the buses from the front of the panel The busbar shall be suitablybraced with DMC/SMC supports to provide a through fault withstand capacity of 50 KA RMSsymmetrical for one second and a peak short circuit withstand capacity 150 KA minimum. The neutral aswell as the earth bus shall be capable of withstanding the above fault level.3.6.2 Large clearance and creeping distance shall be provided on the bus bar system to minimize the possibilityof a fault.3.6.3 High tension bolts, nuts and spring washers shall be provided at all bus bar joints3.6.4 The continuous rating of the bus bar shall be 125% of the rated current. Maximum temperature of the busand the connections shall not exceed 85 degrees centigrade. The bus bars shall be of liberal design for therequired current rating i.e. 0.8Amp-sqmm.The main phase bus bars shall have continuous current rating throughout the length of each power controlcentre and the neutral bus bars shall have continuous rating of at least 50% of phase bus bars3.6.6 Connections from the main bus bars to functional circuits shall be arranged and supported so as towithstand without any damage or deformation, the thermal and dynamic stresses due to short circuitcurrents.All busbars and tapings shall be provided with color-coded sleeves for phase identification.All joints tapping points of the buses shall be suitably shrouded to prevent accidental contact4. Circuit Breakers:4.1 General:4.1.1 Circuit breakers shall be of triple pole / four pole, air break, horizontal draw out/Fixed type, as given inthe schedule of work and comply with the requirements of relevant IS with latest amendments and shallhave the following:i. A short-circuit breaking capacity of not less than 50 KA RMS at 415 volts. 50 Hz AC.ii. A short-circuit making capacity of 105 KA.iii. A short time withstands capacity of 150 KA for one second.iv. Electrical overload performance at 6 times the rated current. 100% of the rated voltage asrecovery voltage at 0.5 power factor.v. Dielectric test of 2.5 KV applied for one minute on main circuits.4.1.2 The circuit breakers shall be fitted with detachable arc chutes on each pole designed to permit rapiddispersion, cooling and extinction of the arc. Inter phase barriers shall be provided to prevent flash overbetween phases.4.1.3 Arcing contacts shall be of hard wearing material copper tungsten or silver tungsten and shall be easilyreplaceable. Main contacts shall be of silver-plated copper of high-pressure type and generous crosssection.4.2 Operating Mechanism:The operating mechanism shall be of robust design, with minimum number of linkages to ensuremaximum reliability. Manually operated circuit breakers shall be provided with spring operated closingmechanism which are independent of speed of manual operation Electrically shall be independent of themotor which shall be used slowly for charging the closing spring.The operating mechanism shall be such that the breaker is at all times free to open immediately when thetrip coil is energized.

12Mechanical operation indicators shall he provided to show open and close positions of the breaker.Electrically operated breakers shall be additionally provided with mechanical indications to show chargedand discharged conditions of the charging springMeans shall be provided for slow closing and opening of the breaker for maintenance purposes, and formanual changing and closing of electrically operated breakers during emergencies.4.3 Protection:Provisions shall he available for fitting a minimum of five trip devices - three over current as shunt tripand an under voltage release or two over current and earth fault release, a shunt trip and one under voltagerelease The breakers shall be of the shunt or series trip type as specified in the schedule.4.4 Housing of Circuit Breaker:Circuit breakers shall be individually housed in sheet metal castle provided with hinged doors. Thebreaker along with its operating mechanism shall be mounted on a robust carriage moving on guide rollerswith in the castle. Isolating contacts for both power and control circuits shall be of robust design and fullyself-aligning. The assembly shall be designed to allow smooth and easy movement of the breakers withinits castle.The breaker shall have three distinct positions within the castle as follows:i. ‘Service’ position: With main and auxiliary contacts connected.ii. ‘Test’ position: with power contacts fully disconnected and control circuit contacts connected.iii. ‘Isolated’ position: with both power and control Circuit contacts fully disconnected.It shall be possible to achieve any of the above positions with the castle doors closed. Mechanical positionindicators shall be provided for the three positions of the breakers.4.5 Interlocking4.5.1. The moving portion of the circuit breaker shall be interlocked so that:i. It shall not be possible either to isolate it from the connected position, or to plug it in from theisolated position with the breaker closed.ii. The circuit breaker can be closed only when it is in one of the three positions or when it is fullyout of the castle.iii. It shall not be possible to open the hinged door of the castle unless the breaker is drawn to theisolated position.iv. Inadvertent with drawl of the circuit breaker too far beyond the supporters is prevented by thesuitable stops4.5.2. Provisions shall be availability for the padlocking of the circuit breaker access frame in any of the threepositions.4.5.3 Automatically operated safety shutters shall he provided to screen the fixed isolating contacts when thebreaker is drawn out from the castle.4.5.4 The moving portion of the circuit breaker shall he provided with a heavy duty, self aligning earth contact,which shall make before and break after the main isolating contacts during insertion into with drawl fromthe service position of the breaker. Even in the isolated position positive earthing contact should exist.4.5.5 Auxiliary switches directly operated by the breaker operating mechanism and having 4 “NO’ and 4 ‘NO’contacts, shall be provided on each breaker. The auxiliary switch contacts shall have a minimum ratedthermal current of 10 amps.

135. Switch Fuse Units:5.1 GeneralThe switch fuse units shall be of the load break, heavy duty, cubicle type conforming to the requirementsIS and of AC 23 duty.The switch fuse units shall he capable of withstanding the thermal and electromagnetic stresses caused byshort circuits for the time of operation of the associated fuse links.The switch fuse units shall be double break and have quick make break mechanism, designed to ensurepositive operation.All switch fuse contacts shall be silver plated at the current transfer surfaces.The unit shall he provided with a front operating handle. The ON and OFF positions of the switch handleshall be clearly marked.5 2 Interlocks and SafetyInterlocks shall be provided so as to prevent opening of the unit door when the switch is in the ONposition and also to prevent closing of the switch with the door not properly secured. It should however bepossible for a competent person to operate the switch shall be suitable for locking with switch in the OFFposition by means of a padlock.The interior arrangement of the switch fuse unit shall be such that all ‘live’ parts are shrouded,5.3 HRC Fuses:The switch fuse units shall be fitted with High rupturing capacity cartridge fuse links with ISI marking fora rupturing capacity of not less than 50 KA at 415 volts. The fuse links shall be mounted in a draw outcarriage thus ensuring positive isolation of contacts during fuse replacements.6. Current Transformers.Current transformers shall comply with the requirements of relevant latest amendment IS. They shall haveratios, outputs and accuracy as specified in the schedule.7. Indicating / Integrating Meters:All indicating instruments shall he of flush mounted industrial pattern conforming to the relevant latestamended IS. The instrument shall have non-reflecting bezels, clearly, divided and indelibly marked scales.And shall be provided with zero adjusting devices in the front. Integrating instruments shall be of flushmounted switchboard pattern complying with the requirements of relevant latest IS.8. Relays: Circuit breakers shall be provided with integrally mounted relays as specified in theschedule.The relay shall have a set of three phase characteristics, which shall be adjustable over a wide range, toprovide discrimination between multiplicities of devices. The relay shall be able to provide over currentand earth fault protection. Also UV and Shunt trip Relays are to be provided.9. Control switches/Selector switches: Control switches/Selector switches shall be of the heavy-duty rotarytype, with plates clearly marked to show the operating position. They shall be of semi-flush mounted typewith only the front plate and the operating handle projected.10. Contactors : Contactors shall be 3 pole /4 pole load break AC 23 duty with auxiliary contacts,fixed & moving contacts copper tinned, silver coated, interier type ,ounting base frame din rail channel.

1411. Indicating lamps and push buttons:Indicating lamps shall be of the LED type of low watt consumption, provided with series resistors wherenecessary and with translucent lamp covers. Bulbs and lenses shall be easily replaceable from the front.Push buttons shall be of the momentary contact, push to actuate type fitted with self-reset contacts andprovided with plates marked with its junctions.12. Cable terminations:Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the switchboard to suit the number, type and size ofaluminium conductor power cables and copper conductor control cables as indicated in the schematicdiagram.Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required Generous size of cabling chambersshall be provided, with the position of cable glands and terminals such the cables can be easily and safelyterminated.Barriers or shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the terminals of one circuit withoutaccidentally touching that of another live circuit.Cable riser shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated short circuit currents withoutdamage and without causing secondary faults.Cable sockets shall be of copper and of the crimping type/soldering as required.13. Control wiring: A1l control wiring shall be carried out with 1100/650 V grade multistandard Copperflexible wire conforming to relevant IS having stranded: copper conductors of minimum 2.5 sq. mmsection for CT Wiring and 1.5sq mm for Control/indicating Instruments.Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately supported and properly routed to allow easy access andmaintenance.Wires shall be identified by numbered ferrules at each end. The ferrules shall be of the ring type of nondeterioratingmaterial. They shall be firmly located on each wire so as to prevent free movement.All control circuit fuses shall be mounted in front of the panel and shall be easily accessible.14. Terminal blocks and labels:15. Tests:Terminal block shall be of 500 volts grade of the stud type. Insulating barriers shall be provided betweenadjacent terminals.Terminal block shall have minimum current rating of 10 amps and shall be shrouded. Provisions shall bemade for label inscriptions.Labels shall be made of anodized aluminium, with white engraving on black background. They shall beproperly secured with fasteners. Danger plate of size and descriptions as recommended in the relevant ISshall be provided on the PCC./PDB/MCC.i) The power control centre shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested for operation undersimulated conditions to ensure correctness of wiring and interlocking and proper functioning of allcomponents.ii) Each power control centre and components shall be subjected to standard routine tests as per applicableclauses of relevant standards.

15iii)All current carrying parts and wiring of power control centre shall be subjected to power frequencyvoltage withstand test16. Drawings: After the award of the contract the contractors shall submit three copies of the followingdrawings for approval of the Department.i) Outline dimensional drawing of the PCC /PDB/MCC showing the general arrangement indicating thefollowing:a) Bus bar clearances:b) Power and control cable entry points;c) Configuration of bus bars;d) Details of support insulation and spacing;e) Outgoing power cable termination arrangements.i) Single line diagram of power control centre showing Protection Metering etcii) cubicle wiring diagramiii) List of Firements with Ratings & makes / Models17. Installation Testing and commissioning:The power control centre shall be installed over the cable trench/cable pit using suitable size of MSchannel including grouting of the channel with necessary bolts and nuts Proper earthing of PCC (PowerControl Centre)/PDB/MCC shall he done using two independent Copper/GI Strip of sizes as indicated inthe schedule. The channel shall be painted with one coat of red oxide primer and two coats ofanticorrosive enamel paint of proper shade as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.The pre-commissioning tests as required shall be done and the PCC (Power Control Centre) shall becommissioned.

16CHAPTER 31. Scope:LAYING OF CABLESThis specification is intended to cover the requirements of installation and energizing of PVC / XLPE /PILCDSTA power cables including jointing of cables.2. Standards:The power cable and its fixing accessories shall comply with the latest relevant Indian Standards andNational Electrical Code.3. Laying of Cables:3 1 General:3.1 Before the commencement of cable laying routing shall be ensured by the engineer- in-charge.3.1.2 The material such as bricks, sand, cable route markers, RCC slab of best quality as approved by theEngineer-in-Charge only shall be used for cable laying works.3.1.3 The contractor shall provide all the necessary labour, tools, plants and other requisites at his own cost forcarrying out pumping of water and removing of water from trenches, if any, where required.3.1.4 Installation shall be carried out in a neat, workman like manner by skilled, experienced and competentworkman in accordance with standard practices.3.1.5 While laving the cable care shall be taken to avoid formation of twists and also damage to the cable. In thecase of cable bends, it shall not have bent radius lesser than 20 times the overall diameter of the cable.3.1.6 A cable loops of about five meters length and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be provided atthe following locationsa) Near the termination pointsb) Near to the straight through joint3.1.7 The method of cable laying and routing of cables, shall in every, case be as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge / consultant.3 1 8 Whenever cable passes through Hume pipes/GI pipes embedded across the wall in a building, both theends of the pipe shall be suitably sealed.3.1.9 Identification tags indicating the size of (the cable and feeder designation shall be securely attached atboth ends of the cable. Such tags shall also be attached to the cable at intervals of 50 Mtrs. The materialsof the tag shall be of either 12 SWG GI Sheet. In case of plastic, the details have to be engraved andincase of GI sheet, the details should be punched Cable route markers shall be provided at the intervals of200 M with a minimum of one number route marker. The details of the route makers shall be as per thedrawing. At the locations of straight through joints, necessary joint-markers shall be provided.3.1.10 When cable runs vertically, it shall be clamped on mild steel flats or angle iron fixed on walls and isspaced at such intervals as to prevent buckling of the cables. All steelwork shall be painted with a coat ofred oxide and thereafter finished with suitable anticorrosive paints.

173.2 Cable laid in ground:3.2.1 All MV cables (up to 1.1 KV) shall be laid at a minimum depth of 0.75 M & HT cables (1.1 KV to 11K.V) shall be laid at a depth of 1.0 M when laid in ground. When cable pass through roads, nallahs etcthey must be protected by either hume pipe or GI pipe of suitable dimensions.3.2.2 Excavations of trenches shall be carried out as indicated in the drawing. The width of the trench at thebottom shall be 0.4 M for one cable. In case the total number of cables laid in trenches is more than one,then the width shall be such that the spacing between the cables is maintained as shown in the drawing.Before the cable is laid in the trench the bottom of the trench shall be cleared from stones and other sharpmaterials and filled with sand layers of 75 mm, as shown in the drawing.3.2.3 While removing the cable from the drum, it shall be ensured that the cable drum is supported on suitablejacks and the drum is rotated to unwind the cable from the drum the cable showed never be pulled whileunwinding from the drum. It shall be ensured that the cables are run over the wooden rollers placed intrench at intervals not exceeding 2 M3 2.4 After placing the cables in the trench shall be filled in layers ensuring that each layer is well rammed byspraying water and consolidated. The extra earth shall be removed from the place of trench and depositedat a place as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge/consultant,3.2.5 The HT cables shall be provided with RCC slabs (marked HT cable) on top as protection.3.3 Cables laid in built up trench:3.3.1 Before the commencement of cable laying the cable trench shall be drained properly Cable shall be laid asexplained in item 3.2. Cable shall be properly clamped to the cable supports, which are provided in thecable trench. The method of clamping shall suit the size of the cable and the cable supports, which areprovided in the cable trench. The method of clamping shall suit the size of the cable and the cablesupports as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge Care shall be taken while removing and replacing thetrench cover slab. It is responsibility of the contractor to make good any damaged trench covers.3.4 Cable terminations and straight through joints:3.4.1 All cable-jointing materials such as straight through joint boxes, cable compound, cable lugs insulationtapes etc. shall be of best quality and as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.3.4.2 Cable glands for strip / armored cables shall include a suitable armor clamp for receiving and securelyattaching the armoring of the cable in a manner such that no movement of the armor occurs when theassembly is subjected to tension forces.The cable gland shall not impose on the armoring, a bending radius not less than the diameter of the cable.The clamping ring shall be solid and of adequate strength.Provision shall be made for attachment of an external earthing bond between the metallic covering of thecable and the metallic structure of the apparatus to which the cable box is attached.3.5 Sealing boxes:3.5.1 A sealing box irrespective of the class of insulation of the cable, for which it is intended, shall be sodesigned that it may be filled with compound after connecting the cable especially in flameproof/hazardous areas.3.5.2 “All parts and connection for attaching the armouring, wiping or clamping the metallic sheath in a sealingbox, shall be easily accessible. This may be achieved by splitting the box or by providing a suitable coveror other such means.3.5.3 The joints in the box shall prevent leakage of the compound.

183.5.4 Provision shall be made to ensure that the cores of the cable are efficiently sealed to prevent moisturepenetrating along the strands or the cable conductors.3.5.5 The sealing box shall be provided with compound filling orifices with suitable covers or plugs of size thatwill permit easy pouring of the compound.In all cases where screwed plugs are used, one or more air vents shall be provided to ensure completeexpulsion of air and total filling of the box with compound.3.5.6 The box shall be of sufficient length to allow for manipulation of the insulated cover without damage tothem or to the insulation.3.5 7 A sealing box intended to be attached directly to the apparatus shall be designed such that the boxtogether’ with the connected cable may be detached from the apparatus without disturbing the sealingcompound.3.5.8 Cable scaling and dividing boxes intended for use in the flameproof areas shall comply additionally withthe relevant requirements of 1S: 2148-1968.4. TestingOnce cable is laid, following tests shall be conducted in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge. Beforeenergizing the cable:i) Insulation resistance test (Sectional and overall).ii) Sheathing continuity test.iii) Continuity and conductor resistance testiv) Earth test.v) High voltage testTests conducted shall be as per Indian Standards and National Electrical Code.

19CHAPTER 4EARTHING1. SCOPE:This specification is intended to cover the requirements of supply, installation, testing and commissioningofa) Pipe earthingb) Plate earthingc) Strip earthing2. STANDARDS:Earthing installations shall conform to the Indian Electricity Rules - 1956. as amended from time to timeand IS 3043-1989 “code of practice for earthling” with latest amendments.3. Earth electrode arrangement:3.1 Pipe electrode-:3.1.1 Electrode shall be made of CI pipe having a clean surface and not covered with paint. Enamel or poorlyconducting material. Galvanized pipe shall not be smaller than 100 mm ID. Earthing with pipe electrodeshall be done as per the details indicated in IS: 3043/87.3.1.2 Electrode shall be made of GI pipe having 40mm ID with ‘C’ class GI pipe.3.1.3 Electrodes shall be embeded below permanent moisture level3.1.4 The length of pipe electrodes shall not be less than 2.5 m. if rock is encountered, pipes shall be driven to adepth of not less than 1.5 m with 2 nos. of pipes of electrodes with a gap of 2mts. and inter connected.Pipe shall be in one piece and deeply driven.3.1.5 To reduce the depth of burial of an electrode without increasing the resistance, a number of rods or pipesmay have to be connected together in parallel. The distance between two electrodes in such a case shallnot be less than twice the length of the electrode. The earthing lead shall be connected by means of a-through bolt, nuts and washers and cable socket.3.2 Plate electrode:For plate electrodes, minimum dimensions of the electrode shall be as under.3.2.1 GI plate electrode 600 x600 x 6 mm thick3.2.2 Copper plate electrode 600 x 600 x 3 mm thick3.2.3 The electrode shall be buried in ground, with its face vertical and top not less than 2.5 M from the surfaceof the ground.3.2.4 Earthing using plate electrode shall be done as per details indicated in drawing.3.2.5 Plate electrodes shall have galvanized iron water pipe, buried vertically and adjacent to the electrode. Oneend of pipe shall be atleast 5 cm above the surface of the ground and need not be more than 10 cm. Theinternal diameter of the pipe shall be at least 19 mm. The length of pipe under the earth’s surface shall be

20such that it shall be able to reach the center of the plate. The earthing lead shall be securely bolted theplate with two bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers.3.3. Strip or conductor electrodes:3.3.1 Strip electrode shall not be smaller than 25 x 3 mm. if of copper and 25 x 6 mm. if of galvanized iron andsteel. If round conductors are used as earth electrodes, their cross sectional area shall not be smaller than 3sq.mm if of copper and 6 sq.mn if galvanized iron and steel.4. General:3.3.2 Conductor shall be buried in trenches not less than 0.5 m deep.i) All materials used for connecting the earth lead with electrode shall be of GI in case of GI pipe and GIplate electrodes, and of tinned brass in case of copper plate electrode. The earthing lead shall be securelyconnected at the other end to the main board.ii) The earthing lead from electrode onwards shall be suitably protected against mechanical injury by routingthe earth wire / strip through a suitable size of GI pipe.iii) All medium voltage equipments shall be earthed by two separate and distinct connections with the earth.In the case of high and extra high voltages, the neutral points shall be earthed by not less than twoseparate and distinct connections with the earth, each having its own electrode at the generating station orsubstation.iv) All materials, fittings etc. used in earthing shall conform to Indian standard specifications wherever theyexist. In the case of materials for which Indian standard specifications do not exist, such materials shall beapproved by the Engineer-in-Charge.v) The earth electrode shall be kept free from paint, enamel and grease.vi) It shall be ensured that similar material for respective earth electrodes and earth conductors are used.vii)viii)ix)Earth electrode shall not be installed in proximity to a metal fence.Copper GI strip shall be connected to the respective earth electrodes either by brazing or weldingrespectively. The Copper GI strip shall be jointed only either by brazing or by riveting at the end of overlapping portions The over lap shall not be less than 50 mmEarthing clamps used for supporting earth strips shall be made of such materials so as to avoid bimetallicaction between strip and clamps.5. Testing:The earth resistance of each electrode shall be measured by using a reliable and calibrated earth meggerand the value shall be as per IS/IE rules

21CHAPTER 5SUB-STATION1. SCOPE:This specification is intended to cover the requirement of supply, testing at manufacturer’s works,installation, testing and commissioning of various sub-station equipment such as HT switchgear &transformer.2. Standards:All the sub-station equipment shall comply with the latest relevant Indian Standards. National ElectricalCodes and IE Rules.2.1 SINGLE POLE STRUCTUREThe single box Pole Structure shall be fabricated with 2 of 9.5 Mtr long RS Joist (150 x 75mm size) pole,as specified by AP TRANSCO. The pole shall be erected sturdily in Ground by excavating the soil.Providing foundation and coping with PCC of 1: 2: 4, The pole shall have a Channel using 75X 40 X 40mm MS angles for fixing of strain discs/ Lightning Arresters/ AB switch & HG fuse set. The pole shall besupported with stay wires & stay insulators and anchored properly in ground.The AB switch, HG fuse shall be mounted at the height as per drawing. The interconnections betweenIncoming line & AB switch/ HG fuse set shall be made using suitable size Copper wire. All currentcarrying parts shall be earthed using GI strip of 50 X 6mm size and Lightning arresters shall be earthedusing 25X 3mm Copper strip. All the earth strips shall be clamped to the RS Joists and interconnectedwith earthing stations.All metal parts shall be painted with two coats of Zinc chromate Primer & two coats of Aluminum paint.2.2 HT SFU:The HT SFU is latest and occupied less space. For maintenance & operation is easier / safe.The HT 630A ,11KV interior switch and 40A HT HRC fuse units shall be fitted in the enclosure.The enclosure shall be made dwith 14SWG CRCA sheer steel fabrication , floor mounted, double door,weather proof.The operation with spring charge mechanism and fuse trip mechanism. If fuse blam off it will hit the offcircuit lever and switch got off. Also with earth switch for earthong of any maintenance work carriedout.3. Transformer:3.1 Technical Requirements:The transformer shall conform to the specification as given below:i. Capacity: As per Scheduleii. Voltage Ratio: I1KV/433Viii. No. of phases: Three phasesiv. Supply of Voltage: 11 KV 3phase. 50Hz.v. Rating Suitable for continuous ratingvi. No. load voltage: 11000 V on HT side and 433V on LT sidevii. Connection: Delta on HT side and star on L.T side with neutral terminal brought out for solidearthing.viii. Vector group : Dyn-l1ix. Percentage impedance: shall not exceed 5%

22ii) Tappings : OFF load tap changing arrangement on HT side for variation of LT voltage from+/-2.5%,+/-5% &+/-7.5%iii) Temperature rise: Not to exceed 40 deg.C by thermometer in oiliv) Type: Outdoor as specified in the Schedule.v) Terminals: Cable end boxes on LT sidesvi) Cooling: Natural oil cooled (ONAN).3.2 Fittings and Accessories:i) Lifting Lugs: Necessary-lifting lugs shall be provided to lift the transformer without disturbing theconnections.ii)iii)iv)Swivel type rollers: 4 Nos. Bi-directional rollers shall be fitted on cross channel at the bottom of thetransformer so as to facilitate the movement of transformer in both the directions.Oil-conservator: Suitable size of oil-conservator shall be provided. The conservator shall have oil levelgauge with marking for minimum level and oil filling hole with a cap.Air release valve: An Air release valve shall be provided on the lop of the lank cover to facilitate therelease of the entrapped air while filling of oilv) Breather: Sufficient capacity of indicating de-hydrating silica gel breather shall be provided.vi)Drain-cum-oil filter valve: At the bottom of the transformer drain-cum-oil filter valve shall be provided.vii)viii)ix)Earthing terminals: Two separate connecting terminals shall be provided on both the sides of the tank forearthing.Oil-load tap changing switch. The transformers shall be provided with an externally operated off-load tapchanging switch with handle with position indicating plate and locking device.Diagram and rating plate: The transformer shall be fitted with a diagram and rating plate indicating thedetails of the transformer connection diagram, vector group, tap changing diagram etc.x) Dial type thermometer: Dial type thermometer of range 0-100 degree celcius shall be provided.xi)Explosion vent: The transformer shall be fitted with an explosion vent of suitable size.xii)The transformer shall be provided with first filling of oil. The transformer oil shall conform to the latestrelevant Indian Standards.3.3 Testing:The following tests shall be conducted at the factory before dispatching and the test certificates shall befurnished.i) Measurement of winding resistanceii) Ratio, polarity and phase relationshipiii) Impedance voltageiv) Load lossesv) No load loss and no load currentvi) Insulation resistance

233.4 General:3.4.1 The transformer shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from the date of commissioning. Thecontractor shall repair/replace the damaged equipment without my extra cost.4. HT and LT cables.HT and LT cables shall be of the sizes as indicated in the schedule and schematic drawing and shall bearthe ISI mark. Laying of cables shall conform to the specification detailed in cables laying section.5. Installation, testing and commissioning of sub-station Equipment:5.1 General:The installation of various sub-station equipments shall be carried out in accordance with the workingdrawings, relevant Indian Standards, code of practice and manufacturers instruction.The installation shall be in accordance with IE rules and the regulations of either local electricity authoritywhich ever is applicable. The installation, testing and commissioning of various sub-station equipmentsshall also be carried out as per the details briefly described in the subsequent paragraphs.5.2 LT panels:5.2.1 Site inspectionThe switchboards shall be supplied by the supplier in a properly packed condition. After ascertaining thatthere is no damage to the packing, all the items shall he inspected after unpacking. It shall he ensured thatthe switch boards arc in accordance with the requirements as described in the schedule and drawings. Itshall also be ensured that all the meters, relays, indication lamps etc. are in good condition and have notsuffered any damage during transit.5.2.2 Installation: The switchboard shall be assembled together in case the switchboard is supplied insection. The switchboard shall be installed in position and levelled on the foundation as per theinstallation drawings furnished by the manufacturer. The busbar of the sections shall be properlyconnected and checked for tightness after installation. The cable termination shall be carried out inaccordance with the relevant standards and the cable end box shall be sealed. The switch board shall beearthed by means of two independent earth strips of sizes as indicated in the working drawn in theschedule. It shall be ensured that 15mm thick rubber matting of an approved make is provided in front ofthe full length of the switch board. The width of the matting shall be 1 000 mm and shall withstand 1500V for one minute.5.2.3 Testing and commissioning: The following tests shall be carried out on the switchboards at thesight prior to commissioning:i) Insulation resistance between phases and individual phase and earthii) DI-electric strength of circuit breaker oil shall be checked in accordance with relevant ISiii) Earth continuityiv) Earth Resistancev) All protective relays and tripping mechanism shall be checked for their proper operation5.3 Transformer:5.3.1 Site Inspection: The transformer shall be inspected at site to ascertain that there is no damage to any ofthe components and accessories of the transformer. Normally inspection manual will be supplied by themanufacturer. The instruction given in the instruction manual shall be followed.

245.3.2 Installation: The transformer shall be installed as per the installation manual provided by thetransformer manufacturer. The installation shall also conform to the relevant IS and IE rules. After thecompletion of the erection of the transformer it shall be ensured that the transformer wheels are suitablylocked to prevent accidental movement of transformer. HT and LT cabling LT bus duct shall be earnedout as detailed in the schedule and working drawing. The transformer neutral and body shall be earthed asdetailed in the drawing. The breather shall be cleaned and filled with oil and silica gel.5.3.3 Testing and commissioning: The following test shall be conducted on the transformer prior iscommissioning:i) Insulating resistance of the winding between phases and between individual phases and earth on both HVand LV sides and also between HV and LV windingsii) Winding resistanceiii) Di-electric strength of transformer oiliv) Voltage ratio test at all tap positionsv) Polarity testAfter commissioning of the transformer, the MV sides voltage shall be measured at different tap positions.The transformer shall be kept on no load for 24 hours, and shall be ascertained that there is no unduetemperature rise before loading the transformer.

25CHAPTER 6LIGHTNING PROTECTION1. Scope:This specification is intended to cover the requirements of supply, installation and testing of lightningprotection system at plaices specified by the department.2. Standards:The lightning protection system shall conform to the 1S: 2309/1989 and National Electrical code.3. Terminology:i) Air termination (lightning conductor) or Air termination network. Those pans of lightning protectionsystem that are intended to collect the lightning discharges from the atmosphere.ii) Bonds: Electrical connection between the lightning protection system and other metal work, and betweenvarious portions of the latter.iii) Down conductors: Conductors, which connect the air terminations with the earth terminations.iv) Earth terminations or earth terminations net work: Those parts of the lightning protection system whichare intended to distribute the lightning discharges into the general mass of the earth. All parts below thetesting point in a down conductor are included in this term.v) Earth electrodes: A metal plate, pipe or other conductor or an array of conductors electrically connected tothe general mass of the earth. These include those portions of the earth terminations that make directelectrical contact with the earth.vi) Lightning protection system: The whole system interconnected conductors used to protect a structure fromthe effects of lightning.vii) Side flash: A spark occurring between nearby metallic objects or between such objects and the lightningprotection system to earth.viii) Testing points: Joints in down conductors or in bonds or in earth conductors connecting earth electrodes,so designed and situated as to enable resistance measurements to be made.4. Materials to be used:Materials to be used in the lightning protection system shall be reliably resistant to corrosion oradequately protected against corrosion. The materials to be used are.i) Copper: Solid, or flat copper strips or stranded copper wire of 98 per cent conductivitywhen annealed, shall be used.ii) Galvanized: It shall be protected against corrosion in zinc coating.5. Lightning protection system:5.1 Air terminations:The lightning protection system comprises of the following major components.i. Air terminationsii. Down conductorsiii. Joints and bondsiv. Testing pointsv. Earth terminationsvi. Earth electrodesvii. FastenersIt shall consist of a vertical conductor on a tall structure, a single horizontal conductor for a small buildingand system of horizontal and vertical conductors for the protection of bigger buildings.

26A vertical air termination shall project at least 30 cm above the building, which it is fixed.All horizontal air terminations shall be interconnected such that no part of the roof is more than 5 m awayfrom the nearest horizontal conductor. For a flat roof, horizontal air terminations shall be fixed along theouter perimeter of the roof.Horizontal air termination shall be fixed along contours of the roof of the buildings in such a way as tojoin each air termination to the rest and shall they form a closed network.All metallic finials, Chimneys, ducts, vent pipes, railings, gutters etc. on or above the main surface of theroof of the structure shall be bonded to the air terminations network. A typical fixing detail of vertical airtermination on flat roof building is shown in drawing.All terminals shall be firmly fixed to the building in order to avoid overturning.5.2 Down conductors:5.2.1 Down conductors shall be distributed around the outside walls of the structure and run along the cornersand other projections, considering the location of air terminations and earth terminations. Lift shafts shallnot be used for fixing down conductors.5.2.2 The down conductors shall be routed in the most direct path possible between the air termination avoidingsharp bends, up turns and links. Joints shall be avoided in down conductors. Metal pipes shall not be usedas protection for the conductors.5.2.3 In buildings of cantilever construction, down conductors shall be taken straight down to ground by routingthrough a nonmetallic, non-combustible internal duct. Any covered recess not smaller than 75 x 1 5 mmor any vertical service duct running the full height of the building shall also be used for this purpose,provided it does not contain an unarmored or non-metal sheathed cable.The routing of the down conductor shall be such that its accessibility for inspection, testing andmaintenance is ensured.5.2.4 It shall be ensured that the same material is used for both air termination and down conductor. Forexample if GI strip is used for air termination, the down conductor shall also be of GI strip.5.2.5 The shapes and minimum sizes of conductors for use above ground and below ground given in IS 2309 -1989 is reproduced below for ready reference.Sl. No Materials and Shape Minimum size(i)Above ground:a) Round copper wire 6 min diameterb) Standard copper wire 50 mm sq.c) Copper strip 20 x 3 mmd) Round galvanised iron wire 8 mm diametere) Galvanised Irron Strip 20 x 3 mmf) Round aluminium wire 9 mm diameterg) Aluminium strip 25 x 3.15 mm(ii)Below ground:a) Round copper wire 8 mm diameterb) Copper strip 32 x 6 mmc) Round galvanised iron wire 10mm diad) Galvanised iron strip 32 x 6 mm

275.2.6 During installation of air terminations and down conductors, the following items shall be taken intoconsideration.i) The mechanical forces produced in case of lightning stroke.ii)External local heating.iii)The Consultantural or aesthetic beauty of the building.iv)Services entering the structure above and below groundv) Radio and television receiver aerials.vi)Flag masts and roof level plant rooms.5.3 Joints and bonds:5.3.1 Joints: It shall he ensured (hat the joints are avoided in the lightning protection system as far as possible.In case joints becomes necessary, the number of joints shall be kept as minimum as possible and theyshall be mechanically and electrically effective. The joints shall be bolted, crimped, riveted or welded. Incase of over lapping joints the length of the overlap shall not be less than 20mm. in the down conductorbelow ground level, there shall not be any joint.5.3.2 Bonds: The bond to the lightning protection system shall have a cross sectional area not less than thatemployed for the main conductors. All bonds shall be suitably projected against corrosion and shall be asshort as possible.5.4 Testing points:Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing point at a height of 1.5M from the ground level. Itshall be ensured that there is no connection other than the direct connection to the earth electrode is madebelow a testing point. The details of the test links are shown in the drawing.5.5 Earth terminations:Each down conductor shall have an independent earth termination and have provision for isolation fortesting purpose. Water pipe system shall not be bonded to the earth termination system. However ifadequate clearance between the two cannot be obtained, they may be effectively bonded and the bondsshall be capable of isolation and testing. The gas pipes however shall in no case be bonded to the earthtermination.5.6 Earth electrodes:5.6.1 Earth electrodes shall consist of pipe, strips or plates. Metal sheaths of cables shall not be used as earthelectrodes. The earth electrode shall be constructed as per IS: 30435.6.2 When pipes are used they shall be driven into the ground as close as practicable but outside thecircumference of the structure.5.6.3 When strips are used, they shall be buried at a depth not less than 0.5 m deep. The strips shall be laidradially in two or more directions from the point of connection to a down conductor. If this is not possiblethey shall be laid in one direction. If the space restriction -requires the strips to be laid in parallel or ongrid formation, the distance between two strips shall not be less than 2m.5.6.4 When plate electrodes are used they shall be buried in the ground so that the top edge of the plate is at adepth not less than 2.5m from the surface of the ground. If two plate electrodes are to be used in parallel,the distance between two shall not be less than 8m.5.7 FastnersThe conductors used for lightning protection shall be securely attached to the building or other object tobe protected through fasteners made of galvanized steel. The fasteners shall be substantial in constructionnot subjected to breakage and protected against corrosion. Guidelines given in page 24 IS 2309-1969 shallbe referred.

286. Testing:On the completion of the installation of lightning protection system the following tests shall he carriedout.i) Continuity testThe continuity of all conductors and the efficiency of all bonds and joints shall be checked.ii)Resistance tests:The resistance of the lightning protection system completes with air terminations but without the earthconnection shall be measured and its value shall not exceed 1 ohms.iii)Earth resistance test:The earth resistance shall be measured and it should not exceed 10 ohms.

29RECOMMENDED MAKES OF MATERIALSThe following guidelines are to be noted with regard to use of materials in the work.1 As far as possible, materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" from Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS) shallbe used in the work, unless make is specifically mentioned in Schedule of rate/ scope.2 Wherever, material bearing Standard Mark (ISI) are used the work, the following shall be ensured.a) The supplier has a valid license from BIS during the period the material is being used in the work.b) The Contractor should furnish necessary documents and proof of payments made for the procurementof materials bearing Standard Mark (ISI).3. Due to non-availability of materials bearing ISI mark as detailed in para-2 above, the materials as perthe list of approved makes of materials shall be used in the work and the Contractor can use any ofmakes given in the attached list.4. In case it is established that Standard material (bearing ISI mark) as well as the materials indicated inthe list (as mentioned in the above para) are not available in the market, then approved equivalentmaterials may be used in the work subject to approval from the consultant and Engineer-in-Charge.5. For materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" ordinarily no testing is to be done. However, in case ofdoubt or with a view to check the quality of materials, Engineer-in-Charge may send samples forrandom testing.6. For use of materials other than materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" Mandatory tests shall beconducted at the frequency specified in the contract. In case frequency of testing is not stipulated in thecontract then standard specification (CPWD, ISI etc.) may be considered for frequency at whichmaterials are to be tested.7. Before bulk purchase of quantities of materials, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to get thesamples of materials approved from consultant and Engineer-in-Charge

30l. Light Switches/Sockets/Fan Regulators(Modular type) : MK India/NW/MDS/Anchor Roma2. Ceiling roses :Anchor/MK/Rider/Equivalent3. Buzzers : Anchor/NW/MDSEquivalent4 MCBs/MCB Distribution boards/ELCBs :MDS/Schnider/L&T-Hager/Equivalent5. Change Over MCBs :Schnider/L&T-Hager/Equivalent6. LV/HT Cables :CCI/Polycab/Gloster/universal/Torrent7. LV Switchgear :Siemens/GEC/L&T/ Schneider8. Telephone Cables/LAN :Finolex/ Dehon/Mazda9. TV /CC Cable : Finolex/Pilot/ Equivalent10. Transformer :KIRLOSKAR/VE/ETE/equivalent11. PVC conduits :Sudhakar/Precission/Equivalent12. MS Conduits : Guptha Brand(GB)/Bharath/Equivalent13. Copper Conductor wires :Finolex/L&T/Polycab/Equivalent14. Metal clad Sockets : BCH/Crompton/MDS/L&T/Equivalent15. Cable Glands :HMI/Comet/Equivalent16. Cable Lugs :Dowel/Jainson Equivalent17. Water level Controller :Minilec/L&T/Equivalent18. Indicating Meters : AE/Risliab/IMP/Equivalent19. Energy meters :BHEL/SIMCO/L&T:Havell’s/Equivalent20. Indication Lamps : L&T / C&S / Equivalent21. Push Buttons :L&T / C&S / Equivalent22. GI Pipes : Zindal / Tata / Equivalent23. Street Light Poles : National Tubing Co.:Bombay poles/Equivalent24. Light fittings : Philips/ Crompton/ Wipro/Equivalent25. AB Switches / HG Fuses : Versatek/Hema/Equivalent26. LAS :LANCO/OBLEM/Equivalent27. HT Insulators :OBLEM/JAYA/ Equivalent28. MCCB :L&T/GEC/SEIMENS/Equivalent29. C. T. :KAPPA/AE/Equivalent30. Ceiling fans/Exhaust fans : CROMPTON/GEC/USHA/Equivalent31. CAPACITORS :DUCATI/L&T/ASIAN/Equivalent32. HT SFU : MEGAWIN/ SYSTEM CONTROL/’A’BOND STAND /Equivalent.

1III. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFORAIR CONDITIONING WORKS

2TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSA) AIR COOLED PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONER UNIT1.0 SCOPE:The scope of this section comprises supply, erection, testing and commissioning of selfcontainedSplit type package air-conditioning units and auxiliaries conforming to thesespecifications and in accordance with the drawings.2.0 PACKAGE UNITS:Air cooled, floor mounted free standing package unit shall be provided with scroll/reciprocatingcompressor complete with vibration isolators & factory installed controls (like HP & LPcutouts, inter locking of Fan & Compressor, Thermostat with selector switch etc) &accessories including wiring. Efficient cooling coil shall be selected for low velocity with3/8"/1/2" OD copper tubing having extended aluminium fins. Hydraulic expansion of tubesassures tight bonding between tubes & fins for high heat transfer. Tubes shall be arrangedin a staggered design for best air contact thus giving low bypass. The cooling coil circuits arefed with liquid refrigerant through the thermostatic expansion valve and a distributor Blowerof an evaporating unit shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall be selected to giverequired airflow as identified in the drawings. Filters shall be minimum 25mm thick synthetictype or equivalent wire aluminium frame. Drain pan shall be of 18 gauge insulated withexpanded polyethylene sheet. Casing shall be as per the manufacturer's recommendationfactory painted to provide better protection against rusting.Remote air cooled condensing unit shall have to be most efficient condenser coils made out ofcopper tubing with extended aluminium fins. Tubes shall be arranged in a staggered design forbetter efficiency. Condenser fans shall be selected to operate quietly for required CFM to keepcondensing temperature low. The compressor may be in the indoor unit or with the outdoorunit, but, it should be capable of operating continuously even at high ambient of 46 0 C (115 0 F).Interconnected refrigerant piping between outdoor unit & indoor unit shall be of heavy gaugecopper complete with thermostatic expansion valve, liquid line strainer, drier, shut off valves,high & low pressure gauges including insulated suction line. 25mm thick neoprene rubber padsshall be supplied for each indoor/outdoor units. The units shall be tested in accordance with IS:1391.3.0 INSTALLATION:The indoor units shall be mounted on ribbed rubber pads for vibration isolation. The outdoor unitshall be installed with a steel base frame along with cushy best mounting vibration isolation pads.The refrigerant pipes & interconnecting cables & wires shall be neatly & firmly installed on 16SWG cable trays. The cable trays shall be rigidly supported from walls/slabs. Care shall betaken to avoid possibility of damage to cable/wires insulation due hot refrigerant pipes. Thecontractor shall supply the required charge of refrigerant, lubricant and other consumables, forcommissioning and testing of the equipment.

3All the equipment shall be thoroughly tested and checked for leaks. All safety controlsshall be suitably set and a record of all setting shall be furnished to the Engineer incharge.4.0 SPLIT UNITS:Air cooled split unit shall be as per approved make, energy efficient scroll hermitically orsemi-hermitically compressor complete with vibration isolators & factory installedcontrols (like HP & LP cutouts, inter locking Fan & Compressor, Thermostat withselector switch etc) & accessories including wiring. Efficient cooling coil shall beselected for low velocity with 3/8"/1/2" OD copper tubing having extended aluminiumfins. Hydraulic expansion of tubes assures tight bonding between tubes & fins for highheat transfer. Tubes shall be arranged in a staggered design for best air contact thusgiving low bypass. The cooling coil circuits are fed with liquid refrigerant through thethermostatic expansion valve and a distributor. Blower of an evaporating unit shall bestatically and dynamically balanced and shall be selected to give required airflow asidentified in the drawings. Filters shall be minimum 25mm thick synthetic type orequivalent wire aluminium frame. Drain pan shall be of 18 gauges insulated withexpanded polyethylene sheet. Casing shall be heavy gauge factory painted to providebetter protection against rusting.Remote air cooled condensing unit shall have to be most efficient condenser coilsmade out of copper tubing with extended aluminium fins. Tubes shall be arranged in astaggered design for better efficiency. Condenser fans shall be selected to operatequietly for required CFM to keep condensing temperature low. The compressor may bein the indoor unit or with the outdoor unit, but, it should be capable of operatingcontinuously even at high ambient of 46 deg C (115 deg F). The condensing unit shall beinstalled with M.S. base frame, alongwith cushy foot mounting vibration isolation pads.Bolted and clamped with the system. The compressor for 1.5 & 2 Tr units shall behermetically sealed Rotary/Reciprocating.Interconnected refrigerant piping between outdoor unit & indoor unit shall be of heavygauge copper complete with thermostatic expansion valve, liquid line strainer, drier, shutoff valves, high & low pressure gauges including insulated suction line. 25mm thickneoprene rubber pads shall be supplied for each indoor/outdoor units. The units shall betested in accordance with IS: 1391. The power supply shall be provided at outdoor/indoorunit as per manufacturer's requirement.5.0 TESTING:Unit capacity in tons Refrigeration, shall be computed from the temperature readings andair-flow measurements. Flow measurements shall be preferably by a hot-wireanemometer or a velometer. Computed results shall conform to the specified capacitiesand the power consumption shall conform to the figures furnished by the manufacturer.6.0 PAINTING:Shop coats of paint that have become marred during transportation or erection shall becleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas,then coated with two coats of enamel paint to match the finish over the adjoining shoppaintedsurfaces.

47.0 CONEENSATE & DRAIN PIPING:7.1 All pipes to be used for condensate drain shall be approved make and fittings as per BIS4736 or galvanized steel class B (medium class) conforming to relevant BIS codes.7.2 All jointing in the pipe system shall be by screwed fittings using non-hardening lubricant assealing material and/or by screwed flanges using 3mm 3 ply rubber gaskets. Pipe threadsand flanges shall be as per BS 534 and BS 45047.3 All pipe supports shall be mild steel, thoroughly cleaned and given on primary coat of redoxide paint before being installed.7.4 Fittings shall be galvanized steel 'Medium Class' malleable casting of pressure ratingsuitable for the piping system. Flanges shall be of approved make. Supply of flanges shallinclude bolts, washers, gaskets as required sufficient number of flanges and unions shall beprovided for future cleaning and servicing of piping. Tee-off connections shall bethrough equal or reducing tees. All equipment and valve connections, or connections toany other mating pipe shall be through unions/screwed flanges upto 50 mm dia andthrough screwed flanges for larger diameters, or as required for the mating connections.7.5 All condensate drain piping shall be insulated as per the section 'Insulation' Cold waterpiping within the building may also be insulated.7.6 After the piping has been installed, tested and run for atleast three days of eight hourseach, all piping and pipe supports shall be painted with one coat of red oxide paint & twofinish coats of 3 mils each of approved color of synthetic enamel paint conforming to IS23797.7 The direction of flow of fluid in the pipes shall be visibly marked with identifying arrow.8.0 REFRIGERANT PIPING:a. All refrigerant pipes and fittings shall be type L' hard drawn copper tubes and wroughtcopper fitting suitable for connection with silver solder phos copper or as perManufacturers recommendations.b. All joints in copper piping shall be sweat joints using low temperature brazing and/orsilver solder. Before jointing any copper pipe or fittings, its interior shall be thoroughlycleaned be passing a clean cloth via wire or cable through its entire length. The piping shallbe continuously kept clean of dirt etc. while construction the joints. Subsequently, it shallbe thoroughly blown out using carbon-dioxide/nitrogen.c. Refrigerant lines shall be sized to limit pressure drop between evaporator andcondensing unit to less than 0.2 kg per Sq.cm.d. Removable type combination drier and filter shall be installed in liquid line of therefrigeration system incorporating a three way valve bypass. After ninety days ofoperation, liquid line drier and filter cartridges must be replaced by contractor atactual cost to be borne by owner.

5e. After the refrigerant piping installation has been completed the refrigerant piping systemshall be pressure tested using, Freon mixed with nitrogen/carbondioxide at a pressure of20 Kg per Sq. cm (High side) and 10 Kg per Sq. cm (Low side) pressure shall bemaintained on the system for a minimum of 12 hours. The system shall then beevacuated to a minimum vacuum of 70 cm. of mercury and held for 24 hours, duringwhich time, change in vacuum shall not exceed 12 cm of mercury. Vacuum shall bechecked with vacuum gaugef. All refrigerant piping shall be installed strictly as per the instructions andrecommendations of air conditioning equipment manufacturers.9.0 TESTING & BALANCING:a. All piping shall be tested at field, test pressure of atleast two and half timesthe maximum operating pressure, but not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defectsin joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified and gotten approved at site.b. Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test shall be retested in the samemanner.c. System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be securely capped, thenretested for entire system.d. The contractor shall give sufficient notice to all other agencies at site, of hisintention to test a section or sections of piping and all testing shall be witnessedand recorded by Owner's site representative.e. The contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation of fluid isachieved through all coils and other heat exchange equipment in the systemconcerned. If proper circulation is not achieved the contractor shall rectify thedefective connection. He shall bear all expenses for carrying out the aboverectifications, including the tearing up and refinishing of floors and walls asrequired.f. The contractor shall provide all materials, tools, equipment, instruments, servicesand labour required to perform the test.g. Complete certified report shall be submitted for evaluation and approval toEngineer in charge. Upon approval, four copies of the balancing report shall besubmitted with complete drawings and documents.

6B) AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:1.0 GENERAL:Supply, fabrication, installation and testing of all sheet metal/aluminium ducts & supply,installation, testing and balancing of all grilles, registers and diffusers, in accordancewith these specifications and the general arrangement shown on the drawingsDuctwork shall mean all ducts, casings, dampers, access doors, joints, vanes, stiffeners,hangers and supports etc.All ducts shall be fabricated from galvanised steel sheets of the following thickness asindicated in schedule of quantities & as described in the IS:655 with latest edition.2.0 RECTANGULAR DUCT:Dimensions Gauge Gauge Type of Type of Angles/of Ducts G.I. Aluminium Joints Bracings (Epoxy coated)Upto 600 24 22 G.I. Flange at 2.5 Cross Bracings0.63mm 0.8 mm Centre601 to 750 24 22 25 x 25 x 3 mm angle ir25 x 25x 3mm MS angles0.63mm 0.8 mm with 6mm dia nuts & bracing at 1500 mm fromboltsjoints751 to 1000 22 20 25x25.\3mm angle iron 25 x25 x3mm MS0.8mm 1.00 mm with 6mm dia nuts angle bracing at 1500mm1001 to 1500 220.8mm1501 to 2250 201.00 mm2250 and abo 181.20 mm201.00 mm161.4 mm141.60 mmand bolts.40x40x5 mm angle ironwith 8mm dia nuts andbolts.from joints.40 x 40 x 3mm MSangle bracing at1500mm from joints.50x50x3 mm angle iron 40 x 40 x 3mm MS anglecross braced diagonally bracing at 1200mm fromwith 10 mm dia nuts & joints or 40x40x3 mm MSbolts at 125 centre. angle diagonal bracing.50x50x6 mm angle iron 50 x 50 x 3mm MS anglemm nuts & bolts at 125 bracing at 1200mm fromcentre.joints or 50x 50x 3mmMSangle diagonal bracing.Sheet metal ducts shall be fabricated out of galvanized steel sheets conforming to BIS 655,BIS 277, BIS 737 & SMACNA Sheets used shall be produced by Hot dip process andgalvanizing shall be Class VIII- Minimum Average Coating 120 gm/sq.m as per BIS 277: 1992.3.0 HANGERS FOR DUCT (HITECH SUPPORTS PATTERNS SHALL BE USED):Duct Size(mm)Spacing(M)Size of MS angle(mm x mm)(Epoxy coated)Upto 750 2.5 40 x 3 10751 to 1500 2.0 40 x 3 121501 to 2250 2.0 50 x 3 152251 to above 2.0 50 x 3 15Size of GI roddia (mm)

74.0 FABRICATION:All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in workman like manner, generally conforming to IS655. Round exposed ducts shall be die formed for achieving perfect circle configuration.a) Ducts so identified on the drawings shall be acoustically lined with thermalinsulation as described in the section 'Insulation' and as indicated in schedule ofquantities Duct dimensions shown on drawings are overall sheet metal dimensionsinclusive of acoustic lining, where required and indicated in schedule of quantities.b) Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. All jointsshall be made air tight.c) All exposed ducts within conditioned spaces shall have slip joints - no flanged joints.The internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of air flow.Exposed ducts, where required or as indicated in Schedule of quantities, shall bepainted with two coats, of enamel paint of approved colour. Ducts andaccessories within ceiling spaces, visible from air conditioned areas shall be providedwith two coats of mat black finish paint.d) Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual Curved elbows, unlessotherwise indicated, shall have a centre line radius equal to one and a half times thewidth of the duct. Air turns shall be installed in all vanes, arranged to permit the airto make the turn without appreciable turbulence. Suitable vanes shall be provided induct collar to have uniform/ proper air distributione) Ducts shall be fabricated as per details shown on drawings. All ducts shall be rigid andshall be adequately supported and braced where required with standing seams, tees, orangles of sample size to keep the ducts true to shape and to prevent bulking, vibrationor breathingf) All sheet metal connections, partitions and plenums required to confine the flow ofair to and through 18g GI/16 gauge aluminium, thoroughly stiffened with 25mm x25mm x 3mm angle iron braces and fitted with all necessary doors as required to giveaccess to all parts of the apparatus Access Doors shall be not less than 45cm x 45cmin size.g) Ducts required for exhaust of air consisting of corrosive fumes shall be fabricated of4 mm thick polypropylene sheets All joints shall be leak proof & sealed with suitablesealent of GE make. Ducts shall be of cylindrical shape with smooth bends to avoiddeposit of foreign bodies within ducts. No accessories shall be installed within ducts.The exhaust shall be through lip extraction system at fume generating surfaces.5.0 INSTALLATION:All ducts shall be installed generally as per the drawings and in strict accordance withapproved shop drawings to be prepared by the Contractor.i. The Contractor shall provide and neatly erect all sheet metal work as may berequired to carry out the intent, of these specifications and drawings. The workshall meet with the approval of Owner's site representative in all its parts anddetails

8ii.iii.iv.All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made by the Contractorfor beams, pipes, or other obstructions in the building, whether or not the sameare shown on the drawings. Where necessary to avoid beams or otherstructural work, plumbing or other pipes, and/or conduits, the ducts shall betransformed, divided or curved to one side, the required area being maintained,all as per the site requirements.If a duct cannot be run as shown on the drawings, the contractor shall installthe duct between the required points by any path available, in accordance withother services and as per approval of Owners site representatives.All duct work shall be independently supported from building structure. Allhorizontal ducts shall be rigidly and securely supported, in approved manner withtrapeze hangers formed of MS rods and angle iron under ducts at not greater than2 meter centres. All vertical duct work shall be supported by structural membersat each floor. Air conditioning contractor shall supply and install 50mm cube MSboxes with 10mm dia steel rod passing through box, all given two coats ofredoxide paint, the MS rod tied with reinforcement bar at point of suspensionshall be neatly exposed and opening subsequently filled with plastic compoundafter duct hangers are installed.If duct is passing through in such areas where space between ceiling slab to falseceiling is more than 1500 mm than duct should be supported by wall mountedbrackets of 40 x 40 x 3 mm anglev. Ducting over furred ceiling shall be supported from the slab above, orfrom beams, after obtaining approval of Owner's site representative In no caseshall any duct by supported from false ceiling hangers or be permitted to rest onfalse ceiling. All metal work in dead or furred down spaces shall be erected in timeto occasion no delay to other contractors on the buildingvi.vii.viii.Where metal ducts or sleeves terminate in wood work, tight joints shall be made bymeans of closely fitted heavy flanged collars. Where ducts pass through brick or masonryopening and wooden frame work shall be provided within the opening and crossingducts provided with heavy flanged collars on each side of wooden frame work, so that ductcrossing is made leak-proofAll ducts shall be totally free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Wheneverduct work is connected to fans, air handling units or blower coil units that may causevibrations in the ducts, ducts shall be provided of closely woven, rubber impregnateddouble layer asbestos/canvas or neoprene coated fibre glass fire resistant flexibleconnection. The flexible connections located close to the unit, in mutually perpendiculardirections. The flexible sleeve at least 10cm long securely bonded and bolted on both sides.Sleeve shall be made smooth and the connecting duct work rigidly held by independentsupports on both ends. The flexible connection shall be suitable for pressures at the point ofinstallation.Air conditioning unit and exhaust fans shall be connected to duct work by insertingat air inlet and air outlet a double canvass sleeve. Each sleeve shall minimum 150 mmsecurely bolted to duct and the connecting duct work rigidly held in line with unit inlet oroutlet

96.0 SPLITTERS AND DAMPERS:All dampers shall be opposed blade type dampers of robust construction and tight fitting.They shall be made of G.S. sheet minimum 16 g thick and shall have brass bushes. Thedesign, method of handling, and control shall be suitable for the location and servicerequired.Dampers shall be provided with suitable links, levers and quadrants as required for theirproper operation control or setting devices shall be made robust, easily operatable andaccessible through suitable access doors in the ducts. Every damper shall have anindicating device clearly showing the damper position at all times Handles will beprovided with extended arms to account for insulation thickness.Dampers shall be placed in ducts and at every branch supply or return air ductconnection, whether or not indicated on the drawings, for the proper volume control andbalancing of the system.7.1 FIRE DAMPER:All Supply/Return air duct or path at AHU room wall or slab crossing shall be providedwith fusible link type fire damper The fire rating shall be of 90 minutes fire damperblades and outer frame shall be formed of 1.6 mm galvanised sheet steel. The damperblade shall be pivoted spindles in self lubricated bronze bushes, stop seals shall beprovided on top and bottom of the damper housing made of 16g galvanised sheet steel.Side seal shall be provided to preventing fire leakages7.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION :The Flexible Connection should be made of TF quality fire retardant double canvas orimported fabric of fibreglass weave having silicone rubber coating, as mentioned in theschedule of quantities. Flexible connections shall be air tight & water proof andwithstand high temperature application,' non flammable type and does not supportcombustion. There shall be extruded Angle aluminum frame at both ends for connection8.0 MOTOR1SED COMBINATION SMOKE & FIRE DAMPER :All supply/return air duct or path at AHU room wall or slab crossing shall be providedmotorised combined smoke and fire damper The fire rating shall be of 90 minutes firedamper blades and outer frame shall be formed of 1.6mm galvanised sheet steel. Thedamper blade shall be pivoted spindles in self lubricated bronze bushes, stop seals shallbe provided on top and bottom of the damper housing made of 16g galvanised sheetsteel. Side seal shall be provided to preventing fine leakages. Fire damper shall be keptopen during normal mode with the help of 230 V operated electric actuators spring toproviding maximum air passage without creating any noise or actuated either throughelectric actuator or through UL stamped electro-thermal link. The actuator shall beenergized with the help of a single from smoke detector installed in AHU room / RAduct/damper. The fire damper shall also close due to temp rise in SA Ducts through theelectric temp sensor factoy set at 165 deg F, micro switches with bakelite base will beprovided to stop fan motor & give open & close singnal at remote panel in case ofmotorised damper

10ACTUATOR:In case of motorised smoke -cum-fire damper it shall have its own panel which willincorporate necessary circuit required to stop down voltage available from UPS oremergency power supply to show the status of damper (open or closed), to allowremoting testing of damper & indication in event of damper clouser due to signal fromsmoke sensor/temp sensor & reset button Additional terminal will be provided to havesingle (sound beep or visual)in central control room. The fire damper shall be mounted infire rated wall with a duct sleeve 400mm/500mm long depending upon the wallthickness. The sleeve shall be factory filled of fire damper the joints at sleeves end shall beslip on type minimum thickness of GI sheet shall be 18g. The fire damper shall beinstalled in accordance with the installation method recommended by the manufacturer9.0 SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR GRILLES:Supply and return air grilles shall be MS or anodized extruded aluminium constructionwith individually adjustable bars as shown on drawings and indicated in schedule ofquantities. Supply air grilles shall be generally double deflection type, with removablekey operated volume control dampers. Return air grilles shall be generally doubledeflection type similar to supply air grilles but without dampers. All supply and return airgrilles behind wooden grilles shall be single deflection type with one way bars only, thesupply air grilles being provided with removable key operated volume control dampers.Mild steel supply and return air grilles shall be factory coated with rust resistant primerand shall be finished with two coats of paint as per client's choice. Aluminium supplyand return grilles shall be powder coated and to have colour of client's choice or extrudedaluminium as per bill of quantities.10.0 SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DIFFUSERS:\Supply and return air diffusers shall be shown on the drawings and indicated in scheduleof quantities. The supply air diffuser shall be provided with removable key operativevolume control dampers. Mild steel diffusers/dampers shall be factory coated with rustresistant primer. These shall be finished with two coats of paint as per client's choiceAluminium supply and return air diffusers shall be powder coaled and to have colour ofclient's choice or shall be extruded aluminiumi. Round or Rectangular Diffusers:Supply/return air linear diffuser shall be MS or Extruded aluminiumconstruction, square, rectangular, or round diffusers with flush fixed pattern oradjustable flow pattern. Diffusers for different spaces shall be selected inconsultation with the Architect/Consultants Supply air diffusers may beequipped with fixed air-distribution grids, removable key-operated volumecontrol dampers, and antismudge rings as per requirements of schedule ofquantities.ii.Linear Supply air/ Return Air Grilles:This shall be extruded aluminium construction with fixed horizontal bars at 15dig inclination and flange on both side. The thickness of fixed bar louvers shall beat least 5.5mm & angle shall be 20mm/30mm inside The grilles shall be suitablefor concealed fixing volume control damper of extruded. Aluminium constructionwith black anodised finished shall be provided in SA duct collars

1111.0 LINEAR DIFFUSER ;Liner diffuser shall be extruded aluminium construction multislot type with air patterncontrolled provided in each slot. Supply air diffusion shall be provided with volumedamper in each slot of the supply air diffuser. Plenum shall be provided for each supply airdiffuser.The Material of Grilles shall be as follows:i. Al1 grilles shall be selected in consultation with the Architect/Consultant.Different spaces shall require horizontal or vertical face bars, and different width of marginframes.ii.iii.iv.All grilles shall have a soft, continuous rubber gasket between the periphery of theregisters and the surface on which it has to be mounted. The effective area of the registersshall not be less than 75 percent.Grilles shall be adjustable pattern as each grille bar shall be pivotable to providepattern with 0 to 100 deg horizontal arc and upto 30 deg C deflection up or down Barsshall hold deflection settings under all conditions of velocity and pressure. Extrudedaluminium grilles shall have fixed bars.Bars longer than 45cm shall be reinforced by set-back vertical members of approvedthickness.The material thickness of grills, diffuser, damper shall be as follows :Diffuser MS Aluminiuma) Frame 20 gauge 18 gaugeb) Louvers 20 gauge 18 gaugeGrills:a) Frame Louv 20 gauge 26 gau 18 gauge 24 gb)V.C. Damper :a) Frame 20 gauge 1 8 gaugeb) Louver 26 gauge 24 gaugev. Fresh air intake and Extract louvers:All the louvers shall be rain protection type and shall be fabricated from extrudedaluminium section. The louvers shall additionally be provided with heavy duty expandedmetal (aluminium - alloy) bird screen.12.0 TESTING & BALANCING:After the installation of the entire air distribution system is completed in all respects, allducts shall be tested for air leaks before painting the interiors of conditioned spaces airdistribution system shall be allowed to run continuously for 48 hours for driving awayany dust or forein material logged within ducts during installation.

12D) THERMAL/ACOUSTIC INSULATION. GENERAL:Scope of this specification comprises of supplying, installing, testing and commissioningof insulation on duct, pumps, chilled water piping, chillers, expansion tank, AHU roomand duct lining.1.0 DUCT INSULATION:Resin bonded, glass wool, prelaminated with aluminium foil. The thermal conductivityof glass wool shall not exceed 0.024 Kcal/hr sqm deg C (0.19 BTU in/Hr Sq ft deg F at10 deg C - mean temperature and density shall not be less than 48 kg/m3.1.1 Thickness of Insulation:a. For Duct passing through return air areas = 25mmb. For Duct passing through non air conditioned space = 50mmc. Treated fresh air duct = 50mmd. For exposed duct = 50mm1 2 Application: (For unexposed duct)- Clean the surface of duct and apply coal of Black Japan paint of approvedmake applied @ 7 Sq mt./Kg.- Fix the insulation material of required thickness before adhesive dries up. Alllongitudinal joint will have an over lap of minimum 50 mm followed bycovering firmly by 75 mm width aluminium sticking tape to seal all transverse& longitudinal joints.Where the duct is exposed to atmosphere material shall be same as for ducts not exposed toatmosphere but without aluminium foilApplication: (For exposed duct)a. Cleaning the surface of ducts with wire brush to remove dirt, rust etc.b. Applying a coat of adhesive.c. Fixing the glass wool insulation and tied with PVC strap of 25mm widthd. Cover the insulation with fire retardant quality polythene lined hessian of 500gand seal the joint with black Japane. Fixing 24 x 3/4" Hexagonal wire netting tied with G.I. wire.f Finally applying sand cement plaster in ratio 1:3 in two layers each 10mmthick.g. Paint it to required colour with brush.

132.0 ACOUSTIC LINING OF PACKAGE UNIT ROOM AND LINING OF DUCTS:For acoustic lining of AHU room/plant room and duct lining material shall be resin bondedglass wool of density not less than 32 kg/m3. All duct upto a distance of 5m from AHU outlet oras shown in the drawing shall be acoustically lined from inside2 1 Application: 2.1.1 Duct Lining:- Clean the inner surface of duct which is to be lined with wire brush to remove thedirt.- Fixing GI frame Z section of 24 g of 25 mm x 25 mm x 25 mm size at 600mmdistance screwed with the duct and making size as per requirement- Apply a Black Japan paint over the frame/duct.- The adhesive shall be non flammable, odorless and having vapour barrier property- Fixing insulation material of specified thickness and covered with K. P Tissue paperand then covering the material with 28 g perforated aluminium sheet having 2 mmdia perforation at 3 mm center to center distance with the help of self tapping screwsand shall be neatly finished to give true surface finish.Specification for acoustic lining of Package Unit Room Walls/ceiling :For acoustic lining of Package Unit Room insulating material shall be resin bonded glass wool ofdensity 32kg/m3 and thickness 25 mm/50mmClean wall/ceiling surface which is to be acoustically linedFixing GI frame Z section of size 25 x 45 x 25 x mm, or of equal insulation thickness as specified, tothe wall/ceiling with screw/bolts.Apply a 2 coats of Black Japan Paint on wall/ceilingResin bonded glass wool of 25mm/50mm thickness shall be fixed in GI frame of 600mm x 600mmdimension, covered with R.P TissueCovering the material with 24 gauge perforated aluminium sheet should have 3mm dia perforation at 4to 6mm center to center with self tapping screws.- All joints of perforated aluminium sheet should be covered with 20 mm aluminiumcurved beading

14BASIS OF DESIGNAC REQUIRED FOROFFICE BLDG (G+1 FLOOR)/AC FOR ADMN & CONFERENCE AREAS1. Area To be air-conditioning As per the enclosed drawings (275 sqm)GF (140 Sqm) + FF (135 Sqm)2. Height of the hall (Below false ceiling) 2.50 mts3. Out Side ConditionSummer: 96F DB 82F WB 61% RHMonsoon: 87F DB 80F WB 80% RH4. Inside Conditions and requirementsTemperature : Max. 24 0 C, Min. 22 0 C,Relative Humidity : 60% max.Summer 76 0 F + 2 0 F DB RH not exceeding 60%5. Occupancy 40 People6. Lighting 3 KW7. Equipment Load 5 KW Max. for Appliances / work stations and PC, server etc.,8. Air Changers required for Package unit sizing 16 max. ACHP, CFM/Ton shall bearound 300 to 3509. Fresh Air quantity 15 to 20 CFM / person10. Specific information: Bidders shall also offer the PC based central control / monitoringsystem with SCADA compatibility with proof of functional operational reliability. As optionalcost separately with case studies shall be furnished.11. Specific AC system planThe estimated load per peek summer is in the order of 25 TR with above designassumptions. The scheme shall normally comprised ceiling suspended type, split typeindoor AC unit complete with inter connected refrigerant piping between indoor and outdoorunit duly field tested and complete with first charge of refrigerant and system shall beoffered as per schemes enclosed and as per BOQ without any deviations.E) TECHNICAL DATA (TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER)1.0 AIR COOLED PACKAGE/SPLIT A/C UNIT:a) Make & Model No.b) Nominal cooling capacity (tons)c) Actual cooling capacity at specifiedConditions :d) Operating weight of indoor unit(Kg.):e) Operating weight of Air cooledcondenser unit (Kg.)

15f) Refrigerantg) Nominal Air Quantity (Cfm )h) Compressorsi) Type of compressor1. Type of Starter2. Starting Current3. Running Currentj) Blower Size Motor HPk) CondenserNo. of Fans & Fans Size Air Qty of each fan MotorHPl) No. of Rows Evaporator / Condensersm) Face Area Evaporator / Condensersn) External S.Por Evaporator fan (mm WG)o) Indoor Unit Dimensions outdoor Unit Dimensionsi) Length (mm) i) Length (mm)ii) Depth (mm).ii) Depth (mm).iii) Height (mm).iii) Height (mm).p) Control Panel & Accessories/Control schemes proposed(Brief note with special featuresshall be attached)

162.0 INSULATIONManufacturer Materials DensityMean 'K' value at 50°C3.0 CONTROLS:RefrigerantManufacturerCapacityConnection size4.0 PROPFXLER FANa) Makeb) Modelc) Fan dia (mm)d) CapacityStatic Pressure (mm Wg)0 Power requirement (KW)g) Power Supply (1 ph/3 ph)DuctingAcoustic lining7.0 DAMPERS Fire DampersVolume Control Dampers(Make & Test certificates patternsto be submitted)8.0 GRELLES/DIFFUSERSLouveres(Make, Material & Guage)Grilles(Make, Material & Guage)

17F) MODE OF MEASUREMENTS:Mode of Measurement for payment of items of ducting and piping & their insulation shallbe as follows:1.0 DUCTING:Payment for ducting shall be on the basis of the external surface area of the ducting includingall material and labour for installed duct.The rate per Sq. meter of the external surface shall include all wastage flanges, gaskets forjoints, bolts and nuts, duct supports and hanyer vibration isolation pads or suspenders,flexible connections, inspection doors, dampers, running vanes, straight vanes, and any itemwhich will be required to complete the external insulation and acoustic lining.The external area shall be calculated by measuring the over all width and depth(including the corner joints) in the centre of the duct section from flange face to flange face incase of ducts length with uniform cross section Total area will be arrived at by adding up thearea of all duct sectionsIn case of taper pieces average width and depth will be worked out as followsW 1 = Width of small cross section W 2 - Width of large cross section D 1 = Depth of smallcross section D 2 = Depth of large cross sectionAverage Width = W 1 + W 22 Average Depth = D 1 + D 2Width and depth in the case of taper pieces shall be measured at the edge of the collar of theflange for duct sections flatted with angle iron flanges, otherwise at the bottom of the flangewhere the flanges are of duct sheet.For circular pieces the diameter of the section midway between large and small diametersshall be measured and adopted as the mean diameter for calculating the surface area of the taperpiece. Duct measurements for calculation of area shall be taken before applications of insulationFor the special pieces like bends, branches and tee etc, same principles of areasmeasurements as for liner and outer periphery along the curvature angle of the piece shall apply2.0 DUCT INSULATION/ACOUSTIC LINING:This item is provided separately for various thickness and shall be paid for an area basis ofuninsulated duct The area of the duct to be insulated shall be measured before

0G) LIST OF APPROVED MAKES:The following guidelines are to be noted with regard to use of materials in the work.1 As far as possible, materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" from Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS)shall be used in the work, unless make is specifically mentioned in Schedule of rate/ scope.2 Wherever, material bearing Standard Mark (ISI) are used the work, the following shall be ensured.a) The supplier has a valid license from BIS during the period the material is being used in the work.b) The Contractor should furnish necessary documents and proof of payments made for theprocurement of materials bearing Standard Mark (ISI).3. Due to non-availability of materials bearing ISI mark as detailed in para-2 above, the materials asper the list of approved makes of materials shall be used in the work and the Contractor can useany of makes given in the attached list.4. In case it is established that Standard material (bearing ISI mark) as well as the materials indicatedin the list (as mentioned in the above para) are not available in the market, then approvedequivalent materials may be used in the work subject to approval from the consultant andEngineer-in-Charge.5. For materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" ordinarily no testing is to be done. However, in caseof doubt or with a view to check the quality of materials, Engineer-in-Charge may send samplesfor random testing.6. For use of materials other than materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" Mandatory tests shall beconducted at the frequency specified in the contract. In case frequency of testing is not stipulatedin the contract then standard specification (CPWD, ISI etc.) may be considered for frequency atwhich materials are to be tested.7. Before bulk purchase of quantities of materials, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to get thesamples of materials approved from consultant and Engineer-in-Charge

1S . NO ITEM ACCEPTABLE MAKES1.0 MACHINES1.1 Air Cooled Package Units Blue Star, Batliboi, LG, CarrierAircon, ETA, Voltas, Hitachi,Diakin & Mitsubushi1.2 Split AC units Blue Star, Batliboi, LG, CarrierAircon, ETA, Voltas, HitachiDiakin & MitsubushiAlsthom2.0.2.1VENTILATION/EXHAUST FANPropeller Fans2.2 Inline, Centrifugal Fans Nicotra, Caryaire, Kanalflakt3.0 DUCTING & ACCESSORIES: Tata/HSL/SAIL3.1 G.I. Sheets3.2 Aluminium Grilles, Diffusers, LinearGrillesCaryaire, Ravistar, Air master,Airtech3.3 MS Grilles, Diffusers Caryaire, Ravistar, Air master4.04.1VALVESRefrigerant ValvesBrassomatic, Sant4.2 ' Y' Strainers Brassomatic, Sant5.0 Temp/ Pressure Gauges Taylor, Fiebig, H Guru6.0 Fire Dampers Caryaire, Air master,Ravistar, Airtech7.0 Vibration Isolators Resistoflex, Dunlop, Emerald8.0 INSULATIONS 1 Glass wool UP Twiga, Owens Coming, Kiimco8.2 Expanded Polystyrene (TF Quality) Beardscll, Lloyd Insulation9.010.0Air FiltersV belts/PulleysAerosol, Purolator, ThermadyneFenner, Dunlop11.0 Electric Motors Siemens, Kirloskar, Crompton, ABB12.0 Air Curtains Sidwal / Thermoking

1IV. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFORINTERIOR WORKS

2I. SPECIAL NOTES TO TENDERERS1. The work under this tender shall be executed strictly in accordance with constructional and material requirementsdefined under these specifications and latest C.P.W.D specifications. The contractor shall carefully acquainthimself with these specifications to determine his contractual obligations for the work The conditions of thesespecifications will be binding on the contractor and no deviation shall be permissible unless specificallyapproved by the Engineer-in-charge / Consultant in writing In case of any doubt/ambiguity, CPWDspecifications shall prevail In absence of any detailed specifications in CPWD or these specifications, latestIndian standard specifications and code of practice shall become applicable. Wherever the codes andspecifications are silent, the Manufacturer's specification shall prevail and then the same shall be governed bysound engineering practice and the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge/consultant in matters of interpretation etcshall be final & binding on the contractor2. While quoting rates for each item of work, the contractor shall include for the following irrespective whether ithas been mentioned or not in the description of the item without any extra claim/payment3. All exposed surfaces of timber (any variety) shall also have necessary coat of wood primer/putty and paint/polishas per description in the item and specifications.4. The specifications, which are not included in the technical specification mentioned earlier, shall be as perCPWD/ISI specifications5. All exposed edges of ply board shall be fixed with C.P teak wood lipping.6. Thickness of laminate used shall be 1.5 mm.7. All items are to be supplied and placed in position8. As soon as the work is completed in all respect, the contractor should remove all surplus materials debris wastematerials etc. and clean the areas.9. Only superior and highest quality of joinery hardware fittings shall be used as per samples approved by theConsultant/GAILPlease refer the drawing for dimensions, sizes etc wherever not specified in the schedule of quantities and quoteaccordingly.10. Any sub standard materials used during execution will be rejected and has to be replaced by the Contractor at hisown cost. The rejected material shall be removed immediately.11. The Contractor shall engage one competent and qualified Engineer at Site, who shall take the instruction from theproject Engineer/Interior Designer and supervise the work. The work should not suffer due to lack of supervision(from the site).12. The contractor is required to coordinate his work along with other agencies working at site. He has to reimburseany of the damage made by him or any of his representative for any of the other agency or Engineer-in-charge atsite.13. Making of any cutout/opening for electrical wiring/fitting in any of the item of false ceiling, partitions, panelingmasonary work etc and providing panels of the same finish in partitions paneling shall not be paid extra.14. The Contractor is required to fabricate one or more samples of each item as instructed for approval. Any minorchanges in the sample to the specifications as mentioned in the tender shall not be deducted or paid extra Thebulk production of the furniture can only be taken in hand after the final approval of sample of each item Thesample of each item must be got approved with in two weeks of the date of order/Commencement It shall be theentire responsibility of the Contractor to get the sample approved by the Consultant/GAIL spending theminimum time and no extension of time shall be granted for getting the late approval of the samples15. All furniture bases shall be provided with nylon/hard wood supports for even distribution load, designed andshaped to minimize wear and tear of floor.

316. Unless otherwise provided specifically in the description of various items of the work, the rates tendered by thecontractor shall be for complete items of work covering all materials labor, carriage, royalties, fees, rents, salestax, octroi, wastage, tool plant, equipment, transport, temporary constructions over head charges and profits aswell as general liabilities, obligations and risks arising out of the conditions of contract and carrying the work inpart(s) or under/across/along pipes, cables drains etc. complete and shall apply to all heights, depths, leads andlifts. No extra charges whatsoever consequent on any misunderstanding or otherwise shall be allowed.17. Any damage caused to the existing work including finished work by the Contractor while executing the workshall be got done by the contractor at his own cost.18. The contractor shall provide all facilities to the Consultant/GAIL or his representative to make frequentinspection of his workshop and to ascertain the progress and quality of work undertaken in this contract.19. The dimensions mentioned in drawing and specification will be verified at site before fabrication of any item andcan vary by 5% during approval stage.20. The safe custody and up-keep till handling over, is the sole responsibility of the contractor. The Contractor shallemploy sufficient supervisory personnel and watchmen to ensure that the different items fabricated, supplied byhim are kept in fine condition till they are handed over satisfactory.21. All materials, articles and workmanship shall be the respective kind for the class of work described in thedrawings and specifications. All materials, so used in the different items of work shall be subject to the "BEST"used in the specifications shall mean that in the opinion of the Consultant/GAIL there is no superior quality offinished of material or article in the market available in the nature of the particular item described in the scheduleof quantities. The consultant/GAIL shall have the power to make the contractor purchase and use such materialsof particular make or from a particular source as may, in his opinion, be necessary for proper or reasonablecompliance with specifications and description of the different items of work.22. The Contractor shall keep the site of works neat and clean during the execution of the work. Any debris found ator near the site of work shall be got removed immediately as and when so required by the Engineer - In - ChargeThe Contractor shall be responsible for any objections from any local body for occupying approach roads/mainroad and nuisance to others including payments of penalties levied.23. The Contractor shall have complete coordination with other agencies employed by the GAIL. He shall ensurethat the works of other agencies are not hampered in any way during the duration of the Contract24. On completion of the work, the site of work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all debris removed before the workis handed over satisfactorily25. The Contractor shall provide all materials and/or fittings and perform any work which is obviously necessary tocomplete the works or which is generally provided in accordance with "Good accepted trade practice" eventhough such material of work may not be explicitly mentioned in the specification or shown in the drawing26. Approved hangers, bolts, screws and other metal fixing devices shall be used to secure frames, panels and otherunits in position Holes shall be formed with electrical drills wherever possible. Structural members shall not becut or drilled without prior consent of the Consultant/GAIL.27. Contractor shall carry out different tests of materials of works as directed by Consultant/GAIL at his own cost inapproved laboratories. All such test shall be carried out under the supervision/direction of Consultant/GAIL.

4II.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INTERIOR WORKS1. For all detailing please refer drawings in Volume-IV. All exposed wooden surface shall be polishedwith first grade melamine polish of matching colour shade unless mentioned otherwise in drawingsand or in specifications.2. FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS2.1 SCOPE OF WORK.The interior works comprising of furniture, furnishing fixtures/fittings for OFFICE BUILDING OF M/s. GAIL(INDIA) LIMITED AT VISAKHAPATNAM, A.P.All the works, as per the drawings shall be earned out strictly as per the specifications mentioned herein. In theabsence of any materials, relevant C.P.W.D. specifications of latest editions (with corrections upto date) shall bestrictly followed and in case any materials is not covered up in the above specifications, relevant latest IS Codesshall be followed.The conditions of these specifications shall be binding on the Contractor No deviation shall be permissible unlessspecifically approved by the Engineer-in-Charge2.2 DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTSDrawings are indicative only and shall not be scaled Figured dimensions shall be strictly followed, large-scaledrawings/ details shall supercede small scale drawingsThe contractor shall be fully responsible for any error, difficulty in execution/damage incurred owing todiscrepancy in drawings which has been overlooked by him and has not been brought to the notice of Engineerin-Chargeetc2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSThis section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with the drawings and other contract documents andother section of this specification, which shall be deemed to the complimentary of one carpentry and joinery, andpainting sections. The Contractor carrying out this work shall be responsible for providing all plants tools,materials and all things necessary for the proper execution, completion and maintenance of these works.2.4 SAMPLESA sample of every item of furniture, including its parts shall be submitted for approval before an order is placedor manufacture commences Approved samples shall be used as standards of finish and workmanship.2.5 TIMBERTimber shall be of the species indicated on detailed drawings or as specified. It shall be the best of its kind, as setout in section of Carpentry and Joinery, well seasoned or kiln dried with a moisture content of 12% nominal Itshall be matched for colour and graining, free from worm holes, large loose or dead knots or other defects andsawn die square, Timber which is completely hidden by upholstery material shall be as specified on drawings.2.6 DELETED2.7 TEAK WOODIt shall be 2nd class Indian teakwood such as Ballarshah Malabar and Dandles The timber shall have uniformcolor straight grained and free from knots, cracks, shakes sapwood etc.2.8 SAMPLES & SHOP DRAWINGSThe contractor shall before proceeding with the work, submit to the Engineer-in-Charge complete samples of thevarious materials including hardware and fastening all devices and shop drawings and large scale detailscovering all joinery work The final procurement and works shall be carried out in accordance with the samplesduly approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

52.9 ROUGH CARPENTRYMaterialAll framing and other concealed wood members shall be of specified quality of timber as shown in drawings andas per the directions of Engineer-in-Charge. It shall be seasoned to a moisture cone content of not less than 10%not more than 15%. Wood of greater moisture content shall not be used in any part of the structure.2.10 WORKMANSHIPAll carpenters work shall be done by skilled workman using proper tools All joints shall be as far as possible ismortised and tenoned and glued with best quality approved waterproof glue. Where mortise and tenon joints arenot possible, the joints shall be securely nailed or screwed as called for with the longest nails or screws that maybe used without splitting the wood Wherever it is necessary or an adequate joint cannot be formed by nailing, themembers shall be lapped or joined by GI straps or extra wood blocks All joints shall be done with neatness andas approved and directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Cross bracing, solid blocking and bracing shall be providedaccording to best practice. Workmanship shall generally conform to IS 4021.2.11 JOINERY:MaterialsFinished wood work and joinery shall be surfaced with straight grained best quality Indian teak wood unlessnoted otherwise, free from knots and other blemishes and imperfection All finished woodwork and joinery shallbe seasoned to not less than 10% or more than 12 1/2% moisture content. All joinery work shall be securelymortised and tenoned and glued with best quality waterproof glue. All sections and dimensions to be shown ondrawings. For all joinery work use of nails shall not be permitted and wood work screws of appropriate size andof approved make shall be used Wherever practicable means of fastening the various parts together shall beconcealed All work (both carpentry and joinery) shall be to the dimensions shown on drawingsAll interior wood finish work shall be smoothly treated and sanded after erection, until all defects are entirelyremoved. Any works showing splits saw sandpaper or other defecting marks or other defects should be rejected.All exposed wood and plywood shall be straight grained of matched grain and color and shall be approved byEngineer-in-Charge before being fabricated.2.12 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENTThe following treatment shall be applicable to all rough carpentry and joinery workOil type wood preservative has specified quality and approved make conforming to IS 216 shall be used.Painting shall be done after the surface to be painted is made free from dirt, dust any foreign matter and all roughspots sand papered and cleaned. The surface must be perfectly dry before painting is commenced.In addition to above, all portions of timber in joinery work, abutting against or embedded in masonary orconcrete shall be painted with boiling coal tar before being placed in position.All joints in joinery work shall be coated adequately with white lead.2.13 DELETED2.14 PLYWOODPlywood shall be a premium quality, resin bonded, weather proof. Close grained plywood quotable forveneering, painting or bonding plastic laminate as required. Plywood for outdoor furniture shall be of standardspecification waterproof brand. Exposed edges of plywood shall be finished with a strip of solid wood, tonguedand grooved and glued or as detailed on the drawings.2.15 JOINTS AND ADHESIVESAll joints shall be standard mortise and tennon dowel, dovetail, cross halved, mitered tonque and grooved orrebated Nailed butt joints will not be permitted Where mortise and tennon points are used tennons shall fit themortises exactly Adhesives shall be as specified for Carpentry and joinery.

62.16 FASTENINGSScrews, nails etc. shall be of standard iron or wire unless otherwise specified/shown on drawings. Screws andnails for outdoor furniture shall be of brass or other non-corrosive metal Exposed fastening shall match the finishof hardware.Where screws shown on a finished surface, they shall unless otherwise detailed be sunk and the hole pluggedwith a wood plug of the same wood and gram of the finished surface. Nails on finished surfaces shall be neatlypunched and the hole filled with wood filler to match.2.17 HARDWAREHinges, locks, latches, door tracks, nail hides etc., shall be as specified or an approved substitute equal or betterthan that specified.2.18 METALWhere metal legs, frames and the like are used, these shall be welded, brazed, bolted or riveted as required andon finished surfaces welding, brazing and riveting shall be grounded so that no evidence of this is apparent on thefinal finish of the metal.All legs of case or cabinet furniture, whether of wood or metal shall be equipped with nylon glides or castorsunless otherwise shown on the drawings.2.19 FINISHFinishes shall be fully in accordance with the drawings and schedules. Where timber is in natural finish, piecesshall be matched for color and grain before assembly. Where timber is stained the stain shall be matchedthroughout Backs of wall hung case or cabinet furniture shall be treated with an approved brand of woodpreservative.3.0 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSThis section of the specifications shall be read in conjunction with the Drawings and other contract documentsand other sections of this specification, which shall be deemed complimentary with one another The contractorshall be responsible for providing all plant, tools, materials and all things necessary for the proper execution,completion and maintenance of the works.3.2 DELETED3.3 DIFINITION OF CARPENTRYThe definition of carpentry work shall be deemed to include fixing clips, blocking, grounds, fittings, sub-frames,rough frames and wood framing members.3.4 MOSTURE CONTENT OF TIMBERThe moisture content of timber during manufacture, delivery to site, storage, site working, assembly, installationat issue of certificate of completion shall, subject to confirmation by the Project Engineer, be + 2 of the averageequilibrium moisture content percent that it is expected to attain in service.3.5 PROTECTION. DELIVERY AND STORAGE.All timber shall be treated with preservatives and fire retardant before delivery to site.All joinery to be painted shall be appropriately sealed with the specified primer to all faces before leaving itsplace of manufacture.

7All joinery to be varnished/spirit polished shall be sealed with a minimum of one coat of specified varnish polishto all faces before leaving its place of manufacture.All joinery and joinery timber shall be properly protected until its final delivery.3.6 TIMBERTimber shall be softwood or hardwood and suitable for the purpose for which it is intended. It shall bethoroughly seasoned free of defects which would affect strength or usability and shall be flat, straight, nonsplittingand dressed on all sides, wherever softwood used, it means kail wood or other approved equivalentwherever hard wood used, means 2nd class C.P Teak wood.3.7 TIMBER FIXINGThe carpentry timber shall be fixed with nails, spikes, bolts, screws, hangers, stirrups, anchors, ties or any otheraccessories which are suitable to develop the full strength of the member which they supported to which they areattached, as directed.3.8 FIXINGCarpentry timber where fixed to solid masonry or concrete shall be secured with expansion bolts or other positivemethods of mechanical fastening. Carpentry timber where fixed into hollow masonry shall be secured with togglebolts and steel with bolts, nuts and washers.3.9 WOODEN PLUGSFixing by means of wooden plugs will be permitted only where it is required.3.10 FASTENINGSPowers driven fasteners may be used for fastening to steel concrete and brick masonry.3.11 PROTECTION AND RETARDANTS3.11.1 ORGANIC PROTECTION - TIMBER GENERALLYThe Contractor shall make his own investigation to guard against local sources of attack and damage and take allnecessary precautions for protection.All timber shall be protected with an organic solvent water repellent wood preservative to give a highly efficientprotection against termite, spider, worm, all insect and fungus attack and shall, where exposed, enhance theappearance of the timber. Color of the product shall be such as to bring out the natural color of the respectivetimbers.3 12 FIRE RETARDANTSFire retardant treatment of timber shall be applied by vaccum/pressure impregnation and shall comply with therequirements of I.S.I. Code and local fire requirements The fire retardant effect shall be produced by thegeneration of water vapor and inert gases and the production of hard crystalline surface which acts as a heatbarrier.3.13 SOFTWOODSSoftwood shall be appropriate for its use in the works and shall be kail wood or similar species as approved.3.14 HARDWOODSHardwoods shall be 2nd class teakwood, Species shall be chosen, for their suitability to requirements.3.15 PLASTIC LEMINATE VENEERa) Plastic decorative laminated veneer shall be of the brand, catalogues number and color indicated. The laminatedveneer shall be 1.5 mm. thick on flat surfaces and otherwise approved.

8b) Plastic laminates shall be veneered to mounting surface with an approved adhesive, used in strict accordancewith the manufacture's instructions. Rubber based adhesives shall not be used. Sheeting shall not be applied totimber with moisture content of more than 15 or at a temperature of less than 15 c (60°F). The sheeting shall beapplied only too close-grained plywood’s to ensure a smooth ripple free surface; it shall not be applied to opengrained plywood’s. Edges not faced with laminate, as at filed joints, shall be minimized by using longestavailable lengths where required, and all butt joints shall be perfectly flush and sealed Grain direction of woodgrain laminated sheeting shall be as follows unless otherwise required by the Project Engineer.Lengthwise on horizontal surfacesVertical or vertical surfacesHorizontal on edges of top surfaces and shelves.c) No surface sanding of laminated plastics will be allowed.d) Unless otherwise specified, all laminated plastics shall have a standard satin or furniture finish.e) Samples of laminated plastics showing the surfaces texture and pattern shall be submitted for approval beforefixing.3.16 PLYWOODSa) Plywoods shall be a product of a balanced construction made up of piles assembled by gluing, the chiefcharacteristics being the crossing of alternate piles to improve the strength properties and minimize movement inthe plane of board.b) The manufacturer and reference for plywood shall be subject to approval. The thickness shall be in accordancewith the drawings.3.17 STORAGE OF SHEET MATERIALSSheet materials shall be transported and stored flat, with sufficient support to proven bowing and warping and toprevent damage to edges and corners. Sheet materials shall be protected from weather and kept off the groundand in dry, wall-ventilated conditions.3.18 SAMPLESThe Contractor shall submit samples of all materials including samples of veneer assemblies for approval. Allmaterials prefabricated, delivered and assembled shall be in accordance with the approved sample.3.19 DELIVERY AND STORAGE - SHOP FABRICATED ITEMSShop fabricated items shall be delivered to the site of the works and installed / fixed / placed in position, andshall be properly protected whilst in transit. Installed work shall be adequately protected against soiling ordamage. Damaged or soiled items shall be made good or replaced at the contractor's own expense and to thesatisfaction of the Interior Designer/Project Engineers.3.20 JOINERY GENERALLYJOINERY SHALL BE CARRIED OUT STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE drawings. Where jointsare not specifically indicated recognized forms of joints shall be used.Joinery shall conform to relevant IS Specifications.Where no dimensions are specified or shown on drawings the contractor shall space fixing battens, fillets,grounds studs and the like in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the sheets being fixedor as approved by Project Engineer/Interior Designer.3.21 FINISHING OF VENEERSFINISHING OF TIMBER VENEERTimber veneers shall be finished by the application of two coats of an acid catalyzed clear lacquer (Polyurethanecoating) wherever it is indicated in the drawing The finish shall be a satin, semi-gloss finish and shall be carriedout as follows.a) The lacquer/polyurethane coating shall be applied evenly by a soft cloth to give an even coat to the veneersurface.

9b) After the first coat has fully dried, the coated surface shall be rubbed down in the direction of the veneer grainwith very fine glass paper and left completely smooth and clean before the second coat is applied.c) When the second coat of polyurethane is fully dry. The surface shall be rubbed down in the direction of veneergrain with very fine wire wool dipped on a petroleum based wax to give lubrication.d) Twenty-four hours after completion of this process the lacquered veneer surface shall be finished by furnished byfurnishing with a soft cloth to an approved finish.3.22 PROTECTION GENERALLYa) The contractor shall be responsible for protecting all items of work in the areas of work forming part of thisContract. The Contractor shall replace at his own expense any damaged work caused through lack of adequateprotection or care in installation or handling.b) The Contractor shall make his own investigation to guard against local sources of attack and damage and take allnecessary precautions of protection.3.23 CABINET WORKAll cabinetwork shall be assembled in the workshop, as practicable and then brought inside the building ready toset in place. The various members shall be worked in the best manner known to the trade mortised and tennon,dwelled, blocked and glued together as to avoid the use of nails as such as possible. The details shall be boardand ply for all cabinetwork shall be as per manufacturer's specifications or as approved by the Consultant/GAIL.3.24 PAINT AND POLISHINGAll material required for the works shall be of specified and approved manufacture, delivered to the site in themanufacture's containers with the seals, etc., unbroken and clearly marked with the manufacturer's name ortrademark with a description of contents and color. All materials to be stored on the site to the works.Spray painting with approved machines will be permitted only if prior written approval has been obtained fromthe interior designer. No spraying will be permitted in the case of priming coats nor where the soiling of adjacentsurface is likely to occur. The nozzle and pressure to be so operated as to give an even coating throughout to thesatisfaction of Interior Designer. The paint used for spraying is to comply generally with the specificationconcerned, which is to be specifically prepared by the manufacturer for spraying Thinning of paint made forbrushing will not be allowed.Wood preservation shall be slingnarm or other equal or approved impregnating wood preservative, and allconcealed woodwork shall be so treat.All brushes, tools, pots, kettles, etc used in carrying out the work shall be clean and free from foreign matter andare to be thoroughly cleaned out before being use with a different type of class of material.All iron or steel surfaces shall be thoroughly scrapped and rubbed down with wire brushed & shall be entirelyfree from rust, mill scale, etc before applying priming coat.Surfaces of new woodwork which are to be painted are to the rubbed down knotted and stopped to the approvalof interior designer.Surfaces of previously painted woodwork which are to be repainted shall be cleaned down with soap and water,detergent solution or approved solvent to remove dirt, grease, etc whilst wet the surfaces shall be flatted downwith a suitable abrasive and then rinsed down and allowed by scrapping back to a firm edge and the exposedsurface touched in with primier as described and stopped with putty Where woodwork has been previouslypainted or polished and is to be newly polished, the same shall be prepared with scrapping, burning off orrubbing down.Surfaces of previously painted metal which are to be repainted shall be cleaned down and flatted down asdescribed in surfaces of previously painted woodwork. Minor areas of defective paint and any rust and loosescale shall be removed completely by chipping, scrapping and wire brushing back to the bare metal and touchedin with primer as described.3.25 HARDWARE:Hinges, locks, latches, door tracks etc. shall be s specified and as far as is possible of specified manufacture. Inany variation of this quality of the substitute shall be equal to or better than the originally specified and thesample should be submitted to the designer for prior approval.

103.26 METAL:Where metal legs, frames, sheets etc. are used these shall be welded, brazed bolted or riveted as required and onfinished surfaces welding, brazing and riveting shall be neatly smoothed so that no evidence of this is apparenton the final finish of the metal, which will be as specified in drawing.3.27 FINISH:This will be as indicated on the drawing and color scheme charts and materials (timber, plastic, laminate,polyurethane coating, paints, etc) most be as specified. No variation will be accepted unless with the priorapproval of the GAIL/Consultant."Backs" of cabinets, etc where wall hung shall be treated with an approved brand or wood preservative. Full sizedrawings or port types are to be submitted for approval if requested.4. MIRROR AND GLASS4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSThis section of the specification shall be read on conjunction with the Drawings and Schedules and other sectionsof the specification which shall be deemed to be complimentary to one another The contractor carrying out thiswork shall be responsible for providing all plant, tools materials and all things necessary for the proper executioncompletion and maintenance of these works.4.2 SAMPLESThe Contractor shall submit samples of all glass and mirror types for approval. These shall be obtained from anapproved source4.3 GUARANTEEMirrors shall be guaranteed against loss of reflective image true ness (silver delimitation or deterioration) for aperiod of three years.4.4 FABRICATIONCutting of mirror or glass shall be in accordance with site measurements / dimensions All edges shall besmoothed before fixing. No chipping, starring and otherwise visible imperfections around cut edges shall beaccepted4.5 FIXINGThese shall be fixed in position as specified with metal fixings or with adhesives All visible metal fixing shall beof approved color and finish4.6 CLEANING AND COMPLETIONThe contractor shall remove all marking and labels with suitable solutions after receiving directions from ProjectEngineer. All installed material and fixings shall be left in perfect condition to the satisfaction of InteriorDesigner/ Project Engineer.SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES / MANUFACTURERS OF MATERIALThe following guidelines are to be noted with regard to use of materials in the work.1 As far as possible, materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" from Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS) shall be usedin the work.2 Wherever, material bearing Standard Mark (ISI) are used the work, the following shall be ensured.a) The supplier has a valid license from BIS during the period the material is being used in the work.

11b) The Contractor should furnish necessary documents and proof of payments made for the procurement ofmaterials bearing Standard Mark (ISI).3. Due to non-availability of materials bearing ISI mark as detailed in para-2 above, the materials as per the list ofapproved makes of materials shall be used in the work and the Contractor can use any of makes given in theattached list.4. In case it is established that Standard material (bearing ISI mark) as well as the materials indicated in the list (asmentioned in the above para) are not available in the market, then approved equivalent materials may be used inthe work subject to approval from the consultant and Engineer-in-Charge.5. For materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" ordinarily no testing is to be done However, in case of doubt or witha view to check the quality of materials, Engineer-in-Charge may send samples for random testing.6. For use of materials other than materials bearing "Standard Mark (ISI)" Mandatory tests shall be conducted at thefrequency specified in the contract. In case frequency of testing is not stipulated in the contract then standardspecification (CPWD, ISI etc.) may be considered for frequency at which materials are to be tested.7. Before bulk purchase of quantities of materials, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to get the samples ofmaterials approved from consultant and Engineer-in-Charge.5.0 SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALSHARDWARE & METALSThe hardware throughout shall be of approved manufacture and supply, well made and equal in every respect to thesamples to be deposited with the Consultants The Contractor may be required to produce and provide samples from manydifferent sources before the Consultants take decision and he should allow in his rates for doing so.Fittings generally shall have satin chrome or anodized finishing unless otherwise specified and shall be suitable for theirintended purpose as per Consultants approval.Screws are to match the finish of the articles to be fixed, and to be round or flat-headed or counter sunk as required.The Contractor should cover up and protect the brass and bronze surface with thick grease or other suitable protectivematerial, renew as necessary and subsequently clean off and clear away on completion.Aluminium and stainless steel shall be of approved manufacture and suitable for its particular application. Generally thesurface of aluminum shall have an anodized finish, and both shall comply with the samples approved by the ConsultantsAll stainless steel sheets shall be 304 S. S. Japan or equivalent with gauges as specified but not less than 16 GL.All steel, brass bronze aluminium and stainless steel articles shall be subject to a reasonable test for strength, if so requiredby the Consultants at the Contractor's expense.All brazing and welds are to be executed in a clean and smooth manner, rubbed down and left in the flattest and tidiestway, particularly where exposed.Chromium plating shall be in accordance with BS 1224 Standard or as per approved specifications for normal outdoorconditions and shall be on a base material of copper or brass.GLAZIERAll glass to be of approved manufacture, complying with IS 3548 1966 as per approved quality and sample to be of theselective qualities specified and free from bubbles, smoke, wanes, air holes and other defects.Polished plate glass shall be "glazing glass “(G.G.) quality that for mirrors shall be” silvering quality (S.G.), conformingto IS 3438 - 1965 or as per approved sample and quality.The compound for glazing to metal is to be special non-hardening compound manufactured for the purpose and of a brandand quality approved by the consultants.While cutting glass, proper allowance to be made for expansion Each Square of glazing to be in one whole sheet. Oncompletion of work, clean all glass inside and out, replace all cracked scratched and broken panes and leave in goodcondition.

12PAINT AND POLISHESAll material required for the works shall be of specified and approved manufacturer delivered to the site in themanufacturer's containers with the seals etc unbroken and clearly marked with the manufacturer's name or trade-mark adescription of the contents and color All materials are to be stored on the site off the work.Spray painting with approved machines will be permitted only if written approval has been obtained from the consultantsprior to painting No spraying will be permitted in the case of priming coats nor where the soiling of adjacent surfaces islikely to occur, The nozzle and pressure to be so operated as to give even surface The paint used for spraying is to complygenerally with the specification concerned and is to be specially prepared by the manufacturer for spraying Thinning ofready mixed paint made for brushing will not be allowed.Wood preservative shall be solignum or other equal and approved impregnating wood preservative and all concealedwoodwork shall be treated with wood preservative.All brushes, tools, pots, kettles etc used in carrying out the work shall be clean and free from foreign matter and are to bethoroughly cleaned out before being used on a different type or class of material.All iron or steel surfaces "shall be thoroughly scrapped and rubbed with wire brushes and shall be entirely free from rust,with scale etc. before applying the priming coat.Surfaces of new woodwork, which is to be painted, are to be rubbed down and cleaned down to the approval of theconsultants.Surfaces of previously painted woodwork which are to be painted are to be cleaned down with soap and water, detergentsolution or approved solvent to remove dirt, grease, etc. whilst wet, the surfaces shall be flatted down with a suitableabrasive and than rinsed down and allowed to dry. Minor areas of defective paint shall be removed by scraping back to afirm edge and the exposed surface touched in with primer as described and topped with putty. Where woodwork has beenpreviously painted or polished and is to be newly polished, scraping, burning off or rubbing down of the surface shall besatisfactorily done,Surfaces of previously painted metal, which is to be painted, are to be cleaned down and flatted woodwork. Minor areas ofdefective paint and any rust and loose scale shall be removed completely by chipping, scraping and wire brushing back tothe bare metal and touched up with primer, as described.Where glued joinery and carpentry work is likely to come in contact with moisture, the glue shall be waterproof. The useof animal glues will not be permitted.Timber is to be cut to the required sizes and lengths as soon as practicable after the works are began and stored undercover so that the air will circulate freely around it. Joinery is to be prepared immediately after the placing of the contract,framed up (but not bounded) and stored until required for fixing in position, when it is to be bonded and wedged up. Anyportion that warp or develop shakes or other defects are to be replaced before wedging up. The whole work is to beformed and finished in a proper and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the detailed drawings, and fitted with allnecessary metal ties, straps, belts, screws, etc. Tunning bended joints are to be cross-tongued with teak tongues and whereover 1 1/2" thick double cross tongued. Joiner's work generally is be finished with fine class prepared surfaces unlessotherwise specifiedTemplates, boxes and moulds shall be accurately set out and rigidly constructed so, as to remain accurate during the timethey are in useGrounds are to be cleansewn, free from large knots, splayed required plugged and fixing to walls etc at 150 - centersWood plugs are to be cut on the twist. Patent well plugs of plastic filling may be in lieu of wood plugs with the approvalof the Interior DesignerBlock board shall be of Mysore, Anchor or P.G. Brand shelves generally shall be constructed of plywood with edgings of1/2" teak tongued onOne of the following I.S. Specifications or such approved adhesives shall be usedIS: 851 - 1957 - Synthetic Resin adhesive for construction work in woodIS: 849 - 1957 - Cold setting case in glue for wood1. Hard wood - Means 1stquality C.P. Teak weighting not less than 45 lbs per cft.Seasoned - Kiln dried, moisture content less than 12% free from worm

13holes, loose or dead knots or other defects such as wraping, splitting chemicallytreated with wood preservative of approved manufacturer2 B. T C - B.T C. means Busher Teak cut size seasoned kiln driedmoisture content less than 1 1/2% weighting not less than 50 lbs per cubic foot. Freefrom worm holes, loose or dead knots or other defects such as wrapping, splittingChemically treated with wood preservative of approved manufacturer3. Plywood - Plywood shall be closed grain weather proof ply. It will be'Phenol bonded plywood shall be complying to IS: 308 - 1960.4. Block Board - Block board to comply with IS: 1659 - 1979.5. Teak Pascal - Teak partical boards shall have phenol bond and will complywith IS : Board 3478-19666. Veneer - Veneer to have straight grains and will selected from matchinggroup. Veneer to comply with IS: 1328 - 1970. 'Anchor' Brand of Indian Plywood.7. Laminate - Laminate should be 1 5 mm thick.8. Wooden flooring - Wooden flooring should be 8mm tk. Laminate floor colouring use 33, wetresistance AC5, impact resistance IC3 (as per EW 13325) with Multi levelcomposite high pressure laminate surface treated with aluminium oxidesurface good, treated on top of high density fibre board substrata density910 kg/m3. The joining & laying of flooring shall be as per manufacturer’sspecifications.

1V. LIST OF MANDATORY TESTSS.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORY MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF REFERENCETEST QTY.OF TESTING IF QTY. IS FOR TESTING/MATERIAL BEYOND THE REQUIREMENTSFOR MINIMUM QUANTITYCARRYINGOUT THETEST1 Sand Bulking of sand Field 20 Cum Every 20 Cum or part As perthereof or morefrequently as decidedby EIC.CPWDspecificationSilt content Field 20 Cum Every 20 Cum or part As per CPWDthereof or morefrequently as decidedby EIC.specification.Particle size Field or Laboratory as 40 Cum Every 40 Cum of fine As per CPWDDistribution decided by the EIC. aggregate/sand specification.required in RCC workonly.Every 40 Cum of fine-do-aggregate/sandrequired for otheritems.

2S.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORYTEST2 StoneAggregatePercentage of softor deleteriousmaterials. ;Particle sizedistributionMINIMUMQTY. OFMATERIALFORCARRYINGOUT THETESTGeneral visual inspection, As requiredlaboratory test wherever by EICrequired by the EIC or asspecified.Field or Laboratory asrequired by EIC.FREQUENCY OFTESTING IF QTY. ISBEYOND THEMINIMUM QUANTITYFor alt quantities.45 Cum For every 45 Cum orpart thereof as decidedby EIC.REFERENCE FORTESTING/REQUIREMENTSIS-.2386, Pt.-ll,1963As per CPWDspecification.Ten percent finevalue.Laboratory 45 Cum Initial test andsubsequent test as andwhen required by EIC.As per CPWDspecification.3 Cement(OPC)1.. ConsistencyII; StrengthLaboratory-do-1000 bags One from eachsource/manufactureror more frequently asdecided by EIC.IS : 269, 33 Grade18:8112,. 43 GradeIS:1 2269, 53 Grade4 Steel forreinforcement.1. Tensile StrengthII. Bend TestIII. WeightLaboratoryLaboratoryField/Lab20M.T. -do- IS:1608-197215:1599-1985

3S.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORY TEST5 a) Water forconstructionpurposesb) Water forpotability1. Chemical &II. PhysicalpropertiesLaboratory-do-MINIMUMQTY.OFMATERIALFORCARRYINGOUT THETESTFrom eachsource-do- Laboratory From eachsourceFREQUENCY OFTESTING IF QTY. ISBEYOND THEMINIMUM QUANTITYBeforecommencement ofwork and thereafterevery three months tillcompletion of work.As decided by EIC.REFERENCE FORTESTING/REQUIREMENTSIS-3025-1986IS:10500-19916 Cementconcrete orreinforced 'cementconcrete7 ReinforcedCementConcrete.a) Nominalmix mix1. Slump Test Field 15 Cum 15 Cum or part thereofor more frequently asrequired by EIC.I.Cube Test Laboratory a) 20 Cum inslab, beams& connectedcolumns.a) Every 20 Cum of aday's concreting.As per CPWDspecification.IS:516-1956 &CPWDspecification.

4S.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORYTESTMINIMUMQTY. OFMATERIALFORCARRYINGOUT THETESTb) 5 Cum inColumnsFREQUENCY OFTESTING IF QTY. ISBEYOND THEMINIMUM QUANTITYb) Every 5 CumREFERENCEFOR TESTING/REQUIREMENTSb) Design mix I.Cube Test Laboratory As perrequirementsof codeIS:456-197811. Hammer test Field do- Once in three months oras directed by the EIC.As per CPWDspecification.NOTE : FOR ALL OTHER SMALL ITEMS WHERE RCC DONE IN A DAY IS LESS THAN 5 CUM CUBE TEST MAY,BE CARRIED OUT AS REQUIRED BY EIC.

5S.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORYJEST8 Bricks/BricksTilesTesting ofBricks/Brick Tilesfor dimensions,compressivestrength, waterabsorption andefforescence.9 Timber 1. MoistureII. Bulk DensityIII. Species10 Flush door 1. End ImmersionTest II. Knife TestIII. Adhesion Test11 Aluminium Thickness ofdoor and anaodic coating.windowfittingsMINIMUMQTY. OFMATERIALFORCARRYINGOUT THETESTFREQUENCY OFTESTING IF QTY. ISBEYOND THEMINIMUM QUANTITYLaboratory 2000 nos. As per CPWDspecifications.REFERENCEI FOR TESTING/REQUIREMENTSIS : 3495-1976Field (by moisture meter) 1 Cum Every one Cum or part IS:287-1973&or laboratory test asthereof.IS:1003-1004required by EIC.Laboratory 26 shutters As per CPWDspecifications.LaboratoryIf the cost offittings exceedRs. 20,000/-Rs. 20,000/- or partthereof as required byEIC.IS:2202-1991(Part I & II)IS:5523-196912 Mortice Locks Testing of spring Laboratory 50 nos. 1 00 or part thereof. IS:2209-1976

6S.M. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORY MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF REFERENCETEST QTY. OF TESTING IF QTY. IS FOR TESTING/MATERIAL BEYOND THE REQUIREMENTSFOR MINIMUM QUANTITYCARRYINGOUT THETEST13 Terrazo Tiles I. Transverse Laboratory 5000 nos. (No One test for every IS:1237-1980strength testing need 10,000 nos. or partII. Water absorption -do- be done if total thereof for each typeIII. Abrasion Test -do- number of tiles and size from a singleof all types of all manufacturer.sizes from allmanufacturersused in a workis less than5000 Nos)14 White Glazed I. Water absorption Laboratory 3000 nos. 3000 nos. or part IS:777-1988Tiles/Ceramic II. Crazing test Laboratory thereof.Tiles (for floor III. Impact Strength Laboratoryand wall). IV. Chemical Test Laboratory15 Aluminium Thickness of powder Laboratory 250 KG 250 Kg or part thereof. IS : 5523-1 969Sections for coating or thicknessDoors and of anodising.Windows.

7S.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORY MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF REFERENCETEST QTY. OF TESTING IF QTY. IS FOR TESTING/MATERIAL BEYOND THE REQUIREMENTSFOR MINIMUM QUANTITYCARRYINGOUT THETEST16 Marble I. Moisture Laboratory 50 Sqm 50 Sqm or part IS:1124-1974absorption thereof.II. Mhos scale -do-hardness test.17 Commercial I. Thickness test Field 100Sqm 1 00 Sqm or part IS:1659-1590Board/Block II. Dimensional test Laboratory thereof.board III. Resistance to LaboratorywaterIV. Adhesion of plies Laboratory18 Plywood I. Thickness test Field 100 Sqm 100 Sqm or part IS : 303-1989II. Glue strength in Laboratory thereof.dry state)III. Glue sheer Laboratorystrength (in waterresistance state) .IV. Moisture content Laboratory19 Particle Board I. Thickness test Field 100Sqm -do- IS:3087-1985 (plain)

8S.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORY MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF REFERENCETEST OTY. OF TESTING IF QTY. IS FOR TESTING/MATERIAL BEYOND THE REQUIREMENTSFOR MINIMUM QUANTITYCARRYINGOUT THETESTII. Physical and IS:3097-1980Mechanical (Veneered)Properties.20 Gypsum 1. Thickness test Field 100Sqm 100 Sqm or part IS:2095-1976Board II. Transverse Laboratory thereof.strengthFor Road Work21- Coarse (a) Los Angeles Laboratory Per 200 Cum IS:2386aggregate (Part-IV)(b) Abrasion value Laboratory Per 200 Cum IS : 2386or aggregate impact (Part-V)value. IS: 5640(c ) Flakiness .Index Laboratory -do- IS : 2386 (Part - 1 ). (d) Grading Field Per 100 Cum IS : 2386requirement. (Part-l)22 Fine Deleterious Laboratory As required by EIC. IS : 2386Aggregate (Part-Ill)23 Bitumen As prescribed in Laboratory As required by EIC. IS:73IS:73

9S.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORYTESTMINIMUMQTY. OFMATERIALFORCARRYINGOUT THETESTFREQUENCY OFTESTING IF QTY. ISBEYOND THEMINIMUM QUANTITY24 Embankment Moisture content Laboratory 250 Cum IS:2720REFERENCEFOR TESTING/REQUIREMENTSunder O.M.C. (Part-II)conditions)Density Field 250 Cum IS:2720(Part - XXVIII)Control test on Laboratoryborrow pits.(a) Gradation Laboratory One to two test per IS:27208000 Cum (Part-IV)(b) Plasticity Laboratory -do- IS:2720(Part-V)(c ) Proctor test Laboratory -do- IS : 2720(Part-VIII)(d) Deleterious Laboratory As required by EIC. -contents(e)Moisture contents Laboratory 250 Cum IS:2720 (Part-II)

10S.N. MATERIAL TEST FIELD/LABORATORY MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF REFERENCETEST QTY. OF TESTING IF QTY. IS FOR TESTING/MATERIAL BEYOND THE REQUIREMENTSFOR MINIMUM QUANTITYCARRYINGOUT THETEST25 ConcretePavementunderControlledconditionsCoarse (a) Flakiness index Laboratory . Before approval of the IS:2386 (Part - 1)Aggregate querry and everysubsequent change inthe source of supply. and one test per 100Cum.(b) Impact value Laboratory -do- IS:2386(Part-IV)(c ) Los Angeles Laboratory -do- IS:2386(Part-IV)(d) Deleterious Laboratory Before approval of the IS:2386material querry and at every (Part-II)subsequent change inthe source of supply.(e) Moisture content Laboratory Regularly as required IS:2386subject to a minimum (Part-III)of one test pending.

11S.N. MATERIAL TEST - FIELD/LABORATORY MINIMUM FREQUENCY OF REFERENCE: TEST QTY. OF TESTING IF QTY. IS FOR TESTING/MATERIAL BEYOND THE REQUIREMENTSFOR MINIMUM QUANTITYCARRYINGOUT THETESTFine (a) Silt content Field One test per 15 Cum As per CPWDAggregate specification(b) Gradation of Field One test per 15 Cum. IS:2386sand (Part-II)(c ) Deleterious Field Before approval of the IS:2386materialquerry and at every (Part-II)subsequent change in thesource of supply.(c ) MoisturecontentField Regularly as requiredsubject to a minimum ofone test pending.IS : 2386(Part-III)(d) Mix aggregate Field One test for 15 Cum of IS : 2386 (Part-l)concrete.(e) Flextural Laboratory One test consisting 8 IS : 526NOTE:(1) FOR MATERIALS BEARING "STANDARD MARK (ISI)", MANDATORY TESTS ARE NOT REQUIRED,HOWEVER, IN CASE OF DOUBT RANDOM TESTING MAY BE CARRIED OUT AS DECIDED BY EIC.(2) IN CASE OF ANY AMBIGUITY, CPWD SPECIFICATIONS AND RELEVANT IS CODES SHALL TAKEPRECEDENCE.

1VI. LIST OF DOCUMENTS/REGISTERS TO BE MAINTAINED AT SITEFOR ENSURING PROPER QUALITY CONTROL OF WORK IN PROGRESS1. A complete set of Contract Documents.2. A complete set of drawings (Tender drawings and Good for Execution Drawings).3. A complete set of change in specification or scope if any.4. Material Test Register (Master Register) indicating details of various other TestRegisters.5. Cement Test Register.6. Aggregates Test Registeri) Fine aggregate-sandii)Coarse aggregate7. Cube Test Register8. Register for anti-termite material used in the work.9. Register for bricks testing. .10. Bar bending schedule Register/Pour Cards.11. Concrete Pouring Register.12. Paint Test Register.13. Register for approval of samples for various materials.14. Site Order Book.15. Register showing use of non specified materials and reasons thereof.16. Hindrance Register17. Cement & steel consumption register.18. Levels-Record registers (for earth filling, roadwork).19. Daily records pertaining to labour deployment.20. Records for all the deviations during the execution of work to be maintained.

221. Records for bitumen consumption register.22. Paint consumption register.23. Water proofing compound consumption register.24. Other registers required for maintenance of proper records during execution ofInternal Electrification, External Electrification, Air conditioning, Fire fighting & Lift works.25. Shop drawings shall be submitted for final approval by air conditioning,contracting agency with in 15 days of award of contract along with stage wisework programme, inspection stage schedule for equipment at theirmanufacturing place, with quality assurance plans to be implemented for factorylevels, site level, completion stages.

The following are the tentative quantities for the lumpsum portion of the buildings, any how contractor hasto workout the quantities on his own before quoting. However, no extra payment shall be made in thelumpsum contractOFFICE BUILDING - GROUND FLOORS.No DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY1 Transportation of excavated earth/ debris upto a lead of 2 m unloading, levelling etc. 206.00 Cum2 Earth work excavation in all types of soilsa 0.00 to 1.50 m 146.00 Cumb 1.50 to 3.00 m 97.00 Cumc 3.00 to 4.50 m 78.00 Cum3 Backfilling with excavated earth. 120.00 Cum4 Anti termite treatment. 250.00 Sqm5 Sand (grade 2) Filling in basement 65.00 Cum6 Providing PCC 1:4:8 as levelling course under foundations, flooring. 33.00 Cum7 Providing & laying of Cast in situ RCC 1:1.5:3.a upto plinth level 46.00 Cumb Columns & walls 7.00 Cumc Lintels, tie beams, staircases, slabs & beams with mix 1:1.5:3. 59.00 Cum8 Reinforcement steel for RCC Works. 11200.00 Kgs9.a Providing & construction brick masonry (230 tk) in CM 1:6 with class 50 bricks 38.00 Cum9.b Providing extra for brick masonry in super structure. 38.00 Cum10.a Providing & construction brick masonry (115 tk) in CM 1:4 with class 50 bricks 183.00 Sqm10.b Extra for brick masonry in super structure over above item No.12. a. 183.00 Sqm1

S.No DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY10.c Extra for providing 2 nos. 6mm dia MS bars over above item No. 12. a. 183.00 Sqm11 Providing 15mm tk. cementplastering to brick masonry at uneven surfaces. 526.00 Sqm12 Providing 12mm tk. Cement plastering at even surface for brick masonry. 49.00 Sqm13.a Providing Copolymer Acrylic aggregate paint etc., Complete. 298.00 Sqm13.b Extra for using water proofing liquid. 298.00 Sqm14 Providing 6mm tk. cement plastering to RCC surfaces. 432.00 Sqm15.aProviding & applying of luppum of approved make for internal surfaces with BIRLA wallcare putty or equivalent on inside surface of peripheral wall.100.00 Sqm15.b for plastic emulsion painting including POP punning wherever required. 100.00 Sqm16 Providing & applying of white wash to the ceiling and walls above false ceiling areas 273.00 Sqm17 Providing & laying glazed tiles dado with colour tile combination and border tiles 18.00 Sqm18 Providing & laying Vitrified tile flooring of size 600 x 600. 145.00 Sqm19 Providing & laying ceramic tile flooring. 20.00 Sqm20Providing & laying Maroon/brown with small size grains granite (gangsaw cut) flooring.Each slab area 1 sqm to 2 sqm.52.00 Sqm21.a Providing & doing Granite nosing polishing 46.00 Rmt21.b Half round for skirting 25.00 Rmt22 Providing & laying granite (gangsaw cut) flooring. Each slab area 0.5sqm to 1sqm 21.00 Sqm23.a Providing & laying polished black granite on platform. 2.00 Sqm23.b Edge polishing with offset rebate 1.20 Rmt2

S.No DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTYProviding & fixing both sides polished approved granite partitions for urinals. (each slab24.a 2.00 Sqmarea 0.5 to 1 sqm) with black granite.24.b Edge polishing full round with offset rebate. 1.20 Rmt25.a Providing & laying polished granite platform in pantry with approved granite. 6.00 Sqm25.b Edge polishing full round. 5.50 Rmt26 Providing & fixing of S.S.Pipe railing for internal staircase. 20.00 Rmt27 Providing & fixing 110 dia(OD)PVC rain water down take pipes of pressure 4kg/cm2 14.00 Rmt28 Providing & fixing shuttering for RCC works.a for footings 36.60 Sqmb for Pedestals 67.00 Sqmc for Plinth beams 25.00 Sqmd Columns 59.00 Sqme Lintel beams 28.00 Sqmf Chajjas 14.00 Sqmg Stairs (for internal staircase) 14.00 Sqmh Landings 4.00 SqmI Sides shuttering 68.00 Rmtj Roof beams 130.00 Sqmk Roof slab 227.00 Sqmp Extra for additional height for centering for roof slab and beams (roof area only). 227.00 Sqm29 Cement punning to ceiling and beams where false ceiling is there. 250.00 Sqm30 Providing & fixing Chiken wire mesh. 53.00 Sqm31 Providing plinth protection. 111.00 Sqm3

OFFICE BUILDING - FIRST FLOORS.No DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY1 Providing and laying of Cast in situ RCC 1:1.5:3.a Columns 8.50 Cumb Lintels, tie beams, staircases, slabs and beams with mix 1:1.5:3. 60.00 Cum2 Reinforcement steel for RCC Works. 6700.00 Kgs3.a Providing & construction brick masonry (230 tk) in CM 1:6 with class 50 bricks. 58.00 Cum3.b Providing extra for brick masonry in super structure . 58.00 Cum4.a Providing & construction brick masonry (115 tk) in CM 1:4 with class 50 bricks. 164.00 Sqm4.b Extra for brick masonry in super structure over above item No. 4a 164.00 Sqm4.c Extra for providing 2 Nos. 6mm dia MS bars over above item No.4a 164.00 Sqm5 Providing 15mm tk. Cement plastering to brick masonry at uneven surfaces. 671.00 Sqm6 Providing 12mm tk. Cement plastering at even surface for brick masonry. 46.00 Sqm7.a Providing Copolymer Acrylic aggregate paint etc., Complete. 351.00 Sqm7.b Extra for using water proofing liquid 351.00 Sqm8 Providing 6mm tk. Cement plastering to RCC surfaces. 401.00 Sqm9.aProviding & applying of luppum of approved make for internal surfaces with BIRLA wallcone putty or equivalent.54.00 Sqm9.b Providing & applying plastic emulsion painting. 54.00 Sqm10 Providing & applying of white wash to the ceiling and walls above false ceiling areas 175.00 Sqm11 Providing & applying of O.B.D to the internal plastered surfaces. 25.00 Sqm4

S.No DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY12 Providing & doing water proofing treatment at sunken areas. 5.00 Sqm13 Cinder concrete filling in Sunken area. 2.00 Cum14 Providing & laying glazed tiles dado. 27.00 Sqm15.aProviding & laying 20mmtk polished black / Maroon / brown granite for platform for washbasins, urinal partition, pantry platforms & shelves in conference room.3.50 Sqm15.b Nosing polishing with offset rebate/ as approved. 1.50 Rmt16.aProviding & fixing both sides polished black/maroon/brown granite partitions for urinals.(each slab area 0.5 to 1 sqm).2.50 Sqm16.a Edge polishing full round with offset rebate. 3.00 Rmt17 Providing & laying ceramic tile flooring. 17.00 Sqm18 Providing & laying Vitrified tile flooring of size 600 x 600. 40.00 Sqm19 Providing & fixing 110dia (OD)PVC rain water down take pipes of pressure 4kg/cm2 14.00 Rmt20 Providing & fixing shuttering for RCC works.a Columns 71.00 Sqmb Lintel beams 20.00 Sqmc Chajjas 15.00 Sqmd Slab sides 68.00 Rmte Roof beams 150.00 Sqmf Roof slab 227.00 Sqmg Extra for additional height for centering for roof slab & beams over 3.50 m ht. 227.00 SqmI For double height slab at 7.60m lvl (4 lifts) 48.00 Sqm21 Providing & fixing Chiken wire mesh. 53.00 Sqm22 Providing & fixing of polycarbonate sheet 14.00 Sqm23 Providing water proofing with brick bat coba 225.00 Sqm24Providing & installing of Sintex or equivalent make HDPE overhead tanks as perIS:12701 complete with associated piping, fittings, float valves, valves, transportation toworksite etc., including supply of all related materials all complete as per drawings anddirection of engineer-in-charge of 1000 ltr capacity.1.00 No5

OFFICE BUILDING INTERNAL WORKS - PLUMBING WORKSS.No DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY1 Providing & laying SWG pipes with Bed concrete & haunching 100 mm dia. 7.00 Rmt2 Providing concealed piping GI pipea 15 mm dia 14.00 Rmtb 20 mm dia 10.00 Rmt3 Providing & fixing gun metal valvesa 25 mm dia 2.00 Nos4 Providing & fixing of white glazed porceline P-Trap with grating etc., - 100 mm dia 2.00 Nos5 Providing & fixing CI nahani trap. 5.00 Nos6 Providing & fixing CI soil waste pipesa 100 mm dia 9.00 Rmt7 Providing & fixing CI plain benda 100 mm dia 2.00 Nos8 Providing & fixing CI terminal guard (vent cowl)a 100 mm dia 2.00 Nos910Providing & fixing GI Pipe of 25 mm dia NB with GI fittings including trenching andrefilling.Making connection to GI distribution branch with GI make of sizes upto 40 mm NB byproviding fixing Tee, including cutting & threading / welding the pipe etc.,complete20.00 Rmt2.00 Each6

CONNECTING CORRIDORS.No DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY1 Transportation of excavated earth/ debris upto a lead of 2 m unloading, levelling etc. 16.00 Cum2 Earth work excavation in all types of soilsa 0.00 to 1.50 m 47.00 Cum3 Backfilling with excavated earth. 31.00 Cum4 Sand (grade 2) Filling in basement 24.00 Cum5 Providing PCC 1:4:8 as levelling course under foundations, flooring. 15.00 Cum6 RR masonry in foundation, plinth & in basement in CM 1:6 prop. 9.50 Cum7 Providing & laying of Cast in situ RCC 1:1.5:3.a upto plinth level 9.50 Cum8 Reinforcement steel for RCC Works. 1000.00 Kgs9.a Providing & construction brick masonry (115 tk) in CM 1:4 with class 50 bricks. 10.50 Sqm9.b Providing & applying Copolymer acrylic aggregate finish paint over external plasteredsurfaces of makes Heritage or other reputed make as per manufacturer’s specifications.22.00 Sqm10 Providing&doing water proofing treatment. 21.00 Sqm11 Providing 15mm tk. cement plastering to brick masonry at uneven surfaces. 50.00 Sqm12 Providing & laying Eurocon/ Duracrete tile flooring in external pavement. 50.50 Sqm13 Providing & fixing poly carbonate sheet. 150.00 Sqm14 Providing & fixing structural steel 2.79 M.T.7

EXTERNAL STAIRCASES.No DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY1 Earth work excavation in all types of soils.a) 0.00 to 1.50 m 6.72 Cumb 1.50 to 3.00 m 4.05 Cum2 Transportation of excavated earth. 6.80 Cum3 Backfilling to the excavated earth. 4.00 Cum4 Providing PCC 1:4:8 as levelling course under foundations, flooring. 0.50 Cum5 RR masonry in foundation, plinth & in basement in CM 1:6 prop. 0.00 Cum6 Providing & laying of Cast in situ RCC 1:1.5:3 incl. ShutteringBottom raft, walls, slab upto plinth level5.04 Cum7 Reinforcement steel for RCC Works. 410.00 Kgs8Fabrication and erection of MS emergency staircase including structural steel material asper drawing.4.00 M.T.9 Providing & fixing of M.S. Pipe railing for external staircase. 50.00 Sqm8